Home

ensim hydrologic - Civil and Environmental Engineering

1. 140 2 2 1 14 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 141 XI EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 2 1 14 1Known Flow 0 22 ee 142 2 2 1 14 2Computed Flow a 143 e To add a computed flow station aa 143 2 21 15 SIOPEANANSIS 4 mwa KTBEA AALOK AN ADAT BATA G TAG DO KAN 144 2 2 2 Rating Curve Analysis RCA 0 000 00 eee eee 145 2 2 2 1 Background and Theory a 145 2 2 2 1 1 Power Curve Fit 0 0 0 0 cece ee ee 145 2 2 2 1 2 Polynomial Curve Fit aa 146 2 2 2 2 The Rating Curve Analysis Interface 146 e To perform an RCA on a HYDAT station 05 146 e To create an RCA from any two time series 146 2 2 2 2 1 Working With Rating Curves 0 000 eee aes 149 e To adjust the rating curve by creating a subset 149 e To inactivate an individual data point 00008 149 e To adjust the rating curve directly 0 00 00 cee ees 150 2 2 2 3 Opening an Existing RCA 0 00 ce eee 154 e To open an RCA 1 ee ees 154 2224 Savingan RCA gon cts du eed esueddeeeageousveueucegt uu 154 e To save an RCA wie 4 maban ee wid ae WG alow Henan week GARA OES 154 23 WATFCOOD ass c eee eta aero ae ee ee aa ar ae ee 155 2 3 1 WATFLOOD Map Files 0 0 0 0 c eee ee 155 2 3 1 1 Opening an Existing Watflood Map File
2. 20 I0 NG NG AA BC 1C NANU SUAL AA AA adiwe 20 MSA AA 24 TASA AMDE S unos ernie bA YEA ANAL a mak LK dee eee ENN 25 1 4 3 4 2 Coordinate Systems 0 0 0 ee 25 1 4 3 4 3 Coordinate System Converting Projections 26 e To change the projection of the object 26 1 4 3 4 4 Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections 26 e To assign a coordinate system to an object 26 k4 34 5 EPSO S maa oc tees EH UNA LANANG TG Wo a Da BANGAG 27 1 4 3 4 6 Selecting a Coordinate System 28 14 3 5 Mela Dalacasa ciivuda tutdeteead ened Ne EEE KEN DY keke 30 1 4 3 6 Applying Changes to an Object s Properties 30 Vil EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 14 3 7 Copying Data Item Properties 00 30 e To copy data item properties aa 30 bo MENG anos UGE ANDA BE MAAGA AWAN HARANA A NA PAA AA anak 32 1 5 1 Creating a View Window 00 eee 32 1 5 2 Removing a View Window 2 2 2 32 1 5 3 Properties Shared by all View Types 32 1 5 3 1 The Properties Dialog a 33 1 5 4 The 1D View Window 0 0 00 cc 33 1 5 4 1 Labels of Axes in a 1D View aa 34 1 5 42 The 1D View Window Status Bar 0000 00 34 1 5 4 3 Manipulating the 1D View a 35 1 5 4 4 Display Properties of the 1D View Window
3. 155 2 3 1 2 Creating a New Watflood Map File 155 e To set map file specifications manually 0000 155 e To set map file specifications automatically 156 e To return to the default grid 2 0 ee 157 2 3 1 3 Modelling Multiple Watersheds 158 2 3 1 4 Watflood Map Data Attributes 159 2 3 1 4 1 Description of Data Attributes 159 2 3 1 4 2 Calculating Default Data Attributes from the Watershed Object162 2 3 1 4 3 Displaying Different Data Attributes in the Watflood Map 162 e To display the same data attributes for all cells 162 e To display all the data attributes for a single cell 163 2 3 1 5 Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes 163 2 3 1 5 1 Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons 163 e To add land class data aa 164 e To map land use data aa 164 e Points to remember when applying land use data to a Watflood Map 166 2 3 1 5 2 Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs 166 e To map land use data a 166 2 3 1 5 3 Editing Land Use Data 0 AA 166 2 3 1 5 4 Resetting a Land Use Class 167 e To reset a land use class aaa 167 2 3 1 6 Saving the Watflood Map aa 167 2 3 2
4. 0 7 98 Menu Bart cccccccccececececececcccscsccess 7 N NARR ACCESSING visiccesncostedssavsie e 184 185 National Water Data Archive 171 Networks u cccccc and 11 266 file format AA NO 267 PIAN sA 268 file header 1 1 1 11 266 ICON cccccescecceccececceccececcesceccecacceceecs 4 in GENID maana 189 O OilSiM 000000 cece ccc ccc ccc ecceccececceccecescesceces 7 Overview 2 0 0 ccccceccccecccceccccscecececcecesces 1 P Parcel Set 10 11 254 file format ASCI AA 255 BINAY ma 255 file header ccccccescescaeceecees 254 Point Set ceeece eens 10 256 file format ASCII cisscscsesedwadeusoonasosnacedoaes 25 file header 1 1 2 256 September 2007 NC ON agam ANNA AA 4 Points extracting cross sections from 108 Polar yY AA 36 Prode eeror 189 Predefined Channels 125 Probability Distribution 97 Projections ISSIS DINE Jcgrcaeg agencesheosuve dagseestsiess 26 CONG E ann 26 Properties applying changes 30 COMOUE AN 19 VG OG GG AA 54 56 COIS pieng E 30 data attributes aaa 20 display re 17 1 dimensional views 35 2 dimensional views 41 3 dimensional 45 OUNCE a 19 polar VIEWS msa 38 KENO CNN aaa 17 SCAN AA cane eon 18 STUD opera eee ae EE N 18 spherical view cccee
5. Figure 4 17 This dialog allows you to enter an Equidistant interpoint spacing value e For an Equi Distance resampling the number to be entered represents the distance between each point If you enter a number greater than the existing value the cross section will contain fewer points while a smaller number will produce a cross section containing more points The length 1s divided by the value entered to determine the new pointCount value and the points are equally spaced along the line 3 After entering the new value click OK 4 2 1 5 6 Interpolating a Cross Section If data is available for the segments on either side of a cross section that data can be used to produce a cross section for a segment that resembles a combination of its neighbours To interpolate data from two cross sections 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view select the segment to which you would like to assign the combined cross section The segment must have neighbours on both sides 2 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection lInterpolate CrossSection at Segment Interopalakte Cross Section i i x Cross Section A Target Cross Section Laos Section B Segment i Segment 2a Segment 3 Ratio Sect A to B 0 5 Figure 4 18 The centre cross section is a combination of the left and right cross sections 3 Use the arrows to select two source cross sections from the channel 205 The GENID Model
6. Ellipsoid Unknown UF Apply Cancel Figure 1 91 Registering a GeoTIFF image at the corners 4 If the coordinate system is known it should be assigned see Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections on p 26 5 On saving the GeoTIFF image the origin and pixel size will be written to the file Only non rotated images in a rectangular space can be saved A rotated or stretched image may viewed only 1 7 11 Classification of a GeoTIFF Image The pixels of a GeoTIFF image may be categorized into classes by associating the pixel value to a colour and a class name In Ensim this is only possible with 8 bit and 16 bit images To classify a GeoTIFF image 1 Import the GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 2 Open the Properties dialog and select the Classes tab 114 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2007 Properties of Example Image ki Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Rainbow Custom Theme Save Cancel Figure 1 92 Classes tab for a GeoTIFF image 3 The colour value of each image pixel is associated with a class name In the figure above the image contains seven values ranging from 21 to 27 The group of class colours names and values is defined as a theme and may be saved as an ASCII thm file see GeoTIFF Theme files thm on p 271 for more information The user has the option of creating a Custom Theme or selecting from a list of pre
7. anaana eee eae 83 e To save stream lines eee 84 t643 TNS RUG socre ee Gwen See bADERPERAP LNG Ph LOL REG reigi 84 1 65 Extracting Data saa aa aNG KAN rans Suen nage hoon 85 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 1 6 5 1 Extracting Surfaces a 86 1 6 5 1 1 Extracting Temporal Statistics 0005 86 e To extract temporal statistics as a surface 86 16 5 122 Extracting SIOPES cuciveneotc diavereee ss esses duane 87 1 6 5 1 3 Extracting Aspects 00 88 1 6 5 1 4 Extracting Curvatures a 89 1 6 5 2 Extracting Residuals 0 aa 90 1 6 5 3 Extracting Isolines a 91 e To extract an isoline aa 91 1 6 5 4 Extracting Paths a 91 e To extract a path aaa 91 1 6 5 5 Extracting Points 0 0 a 91 e To extract points from a data item 0 0 aaa eee 92 1 6 5 6 Extracting Time Series aa 92 e To extract a time series nananana eee 92 1 6 5 7 Extracting a Velocity Rose 00 AA AA a 94 e To extract a velocity rose eee 94 1 6 6 Create Vector Field 0 0 0c eee 96 e To create a vector grid or mesh 0 0 00 ce ee ee 96 1 6 7 Computing a Distribution aa 97 e To create a distribution aaa ee 97 1 6 8 Mapping Objects ees 98 e TO map objects sa awdeviaducaene Siwae wesw eed e
8. 35 1 5 5 The Polar View Window 0 000 eee ee 36 1 5 5 1 Coordinates ina Polar View a 37 1 5 5 2 The Polar View Window Status Bar 0005 3 1 5 5 3 Manipulating the Polar View a 37 1 5 5 4 Display Properties of the Polar View Window 38 1 5 6 The 2D View Window 222 aaa 39 1 5 6 1 Coordinate Systems and Units in 2D Views 39 1 5 6 2 The 2D Window Status Bar 0 aa 40 1 5 6 3 Manipulating the 2D View a 40 e To move a data item already in the view to the top layer 40 1 5 6 4 Display Properties of the 2D Window 41 1 5 7 The 3D View Window 02 aaa 42 1 5 7 1 The 3D Window Status Bar aa 43 1 5 7 2 Manipulating the 3D View aa 43 1 5 7 3 Display Properties of the 3D View Window 45 1 5 8 The Spherical View Window aa 46 1 5 8 1 The Spherical View Window Status Bar 46 1 5 8 2 Manipulating the Spherical View 00000 e eae 47 1 5 8 3 Display Properties of the Spherical View Window 47 1 5 9 The Report View Window 0 0 000 eee ees 49 1 5 9 1 The Report View Window Status Bar 04 49 1 5 9 2 The Report View Window Tool Bar 0 058 50 1 5 9 3 Manipulating the Report View aaa 51 e To adda view to a report 0 0 ee 51
9. 47 statis DAN seors anakaa0a AA naka na 46 SVNCHTOMIZING assisi 62 troubleshooting 00eeeeeeee 66 305 EnSim Core W Wa 306 tershed maa AA 117 CO IS amanda 119 ING gaar EEE 120 EE a PE E 120 DAS eA 129 CRAD e aE E 121 COMPONENtS a 117 119 creating a 118 DEM naasa NA napa 121 a E 274 format POS GING AA 276 DINA aNG 276 en PAP 274 flow paths a 121 importing from Topaz 118 OPODO eae nee Ee 118 OULIECL NOES sapang ahaha 12 Kee AA eee eee ee 131 drainage area ratio analysis 141 computed flow 143 known flow 008 142 extracting basin flow path distances 140 basin network 0 139 depression fill 133 downstream reach 138 drainage area 132 drainage directions 131 hypsographic curve 139 relief potential 137 stream POWET u s 136 upslope elevation 134 upslope slope 135 upstream network 137 wetness index 666 135 slope analysis 144 September 2007 WATFLOOD Haman 117 bankfull animation 169 SV CMG LINCS ce wes 168 Importing files eee eeeeeeeeee 167 TAP TICS nG 155 CIA I a 155 data attributes 159 calculating 162 description 159 displaying 162 CO a
10. 00000 eee 125 e To add a predefined channel to a Watershed 127 2 1 3 3 5 Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes 127 e To select an outlet node 0 aaa 128 e To select a channel node near a watershed outlet node 128 2 1 3 4 Basin or Watershed Boundaries 00 0000 eee 129 2 1 3 4 1 Creating and Removing Basins 0005 130 STOd0GaDdol seeds none oo AA AA 130 e o remove a basin es 130 2 2 HYDROLOGIC TOOLS woe ccc weet ecwce teen ee eee eae eae ears 131 2 2 1 Watershed Tools 0 0 0 ee es 131 2 2 1 1 Extracting Drainage Directions 0 0 0 0 000 ee 131 2 2 1 2 Extracting Drainage Area 0 0 a 132 2 2 1 3 Extracting Depression Fill n anana 0 0 0 0 cc cee eee 133 2 2 1 4 Extracting Average Upslope Elevation 134 2 2 1 5 Extracting Average Upslope Slope 135 2 2 1 6 Extracting Wetness Index 0 135 2 2 1 7 Extracting Stream Power 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 136 2 2 1 8 Extracting Relief Potential 0 0 0 0 0c ee eee 137 2 2 1 9 Extracting Upstream Network 0 0000 cee eee 137 2 2 1 10 Extracting Downstream Reach 00 00 eee eee 138 2 2 1 11 Extracting Basin Network 0 0c cee ee eee 139 2 2 1 12 Extracting a Hypsographic Curve 0 00000 eee 139 2 2 1 13 Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances
11. CreationDate Friz Aor 15 2005 11720 AM a i a a a EE E EndHeader 39 526000 84 539000 22 21855000 57107000 14 29961000 22 6939000 1 962003000 472631000 48 153000 56 1 10000 bas LOU TlLs322000 102933000 32 41 9000 3342791000 355411000 Slu297000 65 639000 65 461000 352 369000 52 993000 27 681000 I WO 4FRB DO O Ul Point sets have no unique keywords Only general keywords are used See File Headers on p 236 for more information on general keywords File Format xyz Point sets have one of the simplest file formats of any EnSim file type Data is always stored in ASCII format The data in a point set file is organized into rows of coordinates that position individual points in space Each line holds the coordinates for a different point The first number on a particular line is the x coordinate of the point the second number is the y coordinate and the third is the z coordinate If no z coordinates are given in the file all z coordinates are considered to have a default value of 0 EnSim can also read files that do not contain a header but do contain properly formatted data that is files with two or three values per line If the file is then saved within EnSim a header will be added Note XYZ ASCII files may also be comma delimited 252 Appendix A September 2007 XY Data Objects xy dat XY data objects are stored in a relatively simple format Their data does not vary over time XY data objects a
12. EnSim Hydrologic provides an alternative tool to obtain land use information Classes may be generated directly from a GeoTIFF image The image must be preprocessed such that it comprised only of the landuse classes required To map land use data 1 Ensure that the Watershed object is a child of the Watflood Map If it is not already associated open the watershed object that was used to generate the map In the WorkSpace drag the watershed into the Watflood Map to associate the two This will not change the map s data attributes 2 Import the GeoTIFF file with the preprocessed land use classification 3 Optionally the preprocessed classification theme may be edited On the Classes TAB of the GeoTIFF Properties page enter the desired class names or select one of the predefined themes Note edits to the themes may be saved for reuse The saved files are stored as ASCIII thm files in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory 4 Ensure that the Watflood Map is selected within the WorkSpace 5 Select Tools Map Object from the menu bar or Map Land Use Data from GeoTIFF from Watflood Map s shortcut menu 6 A dialog will appear listing the compatible GeoTIFF objects Select the appropriate GeoTIFF and then select OK When the land use data is applied the grid cells will change colour according to the percentage of the cell s area that was covered by the land use class 2 3 1 5 3 Editing Land Use Data Land use data can be edite
13. Figure 5 8 This 2D view shows the triangular mesh associated with the Elevation tab shown above By default a newly created HBV EC Parameter Set will contain five elevation bands each of equal elevation range 5 2 2 3 The Land Use Tab The Land Use tab allows you to examine the relative areas of each land use category There are four categories that are of significance to HBV EC e Lake This category is used for water other than that located within a channel Note Lakes are always considered to have a slope of 0 zero Note Lakes are always considered to have a slope of 0 zero and to fall within a single elevation band e Glacier This category is used for terrain that is covered by snow or ice year round e Forest This category is used for terrain that is covered with trees including deciduous coniferous and mixed forest e Open This category is used for terrain that has relatively little tree cover as compared to the Forest category This may include plains rocky areas or desert among others 218 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 Climate Hevation Land Use Slope Aspect Regions Display Spatial Meta Data Show Legend Lake Glacier 4 605 Forest 93 97 Open Figure 5 9 This watershed contains regions of all four terrain types but is largely forested To assign areas of the watershed to a different category see Identifying Zones Within HBV EC on p 221 By
14. Properties of Sample Watershed l Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Basin 2 Known Flow Computed Flow Display Spatial Meta Data Stations Add Remove Cancel Figure 2 32 Use the Known Flow tab to enter collected data about nodes To add a known flow station 1 Drag the Channels object into a view 2 With the Properties dialog open click on the Channels object within the view to identify the location of a flow station 3 Select the Add button from the Stations area of the Known Flow tab e The station name will appear under the Name column To change the name of the station click on the name and edit the text e The Drainage Area will be calculated from the station and appear in the Drainage Area column 4 Click on the Flow box and enter the flow for the station 5 Select the Apply button To remove a known flow station 1 Click on the station on the Known Flow tab of the Properties dialog 2 Click the Remove button 142 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 2 2 1 14 2 Computed Flow The Computed Flow tab describes the computed flow calculated from the known flow stations Properties of Sample Watershed l x Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Bazin 2 Known Flow Computed How Display Spatial Meta Data Stations Fit Line Method a Remove Remove Tete Pororo z Interpolate Point to Point gt Point to Point
15. Spatial NodeCount 86029 Elevations Levels 4 600 900 1305 2 EndElevations Slopes Levels 2 2b EndSlopes Aspects Type 2 EndAspects EndSpatial Model WaterShed Name SampleWatershed ModelTimeStep 24 StartDate 1996 10 01 00 00 EndDate 1997 09 30 00 00 RoutingModel Parallel PRUNOTTRE 0 4 RunoffAlpha 0 3 RunoffKS 0 1 RunoffFRAC O InitialFastReservoirDischarge 10 InitialSlowReservoirDischarge 10 InitialFastReservoirTemperature 8 InitialSlowReservoirTemperature 8 OutletElevation O ClimateZone Name Climate Zone 1 METER ILS YVR Irear mer AtmosphereRFCF 1 AtmosphereSFCF 1 AtmospherePGRADL 0 0005 AtmospherePGRADH O AtmosphereEMID 5000 AtmosphereTLAPSE 0 005 AtmosphereTT 0 AtmosphereTTI 1 AtmosphereEPGRAD 0 0005 AtmosphereETF 0 5 ForestTFRAIN 0 8 ForestTFSNOW 0 7 ForestCanopyFactor 1 0 SnowAM 0 05 SnowTM 0 SnowCMIN 3 SNOWDC 240 SnowMRF 0 9 SnowCRFER 2 294 Appendix E SnowWHC 0 5 SnowLWR 2500 SOLLFC 200 Soi LBETA 0 7 SorluP Oss GlacierMRG 1 5 GlacierAG 0 5 GlacierDKG 0 2 GlacierKGMin 0 1 GlacierKGRC 0 7 ElevationBand Name Elevation Band 1 Elevation 435 100000 LandUse Forest Name Forest slope 12 5 aspect 0 Aspect 0 000000 Slope 15 000000 Inltlial8snows0ol1d 0 000000 TInitialSnowLliguid 0 000000 InitialSoilMoisture 0 000000 InitialSoilWaterTemperature 0 000000 EndLandUse LandUse Forest Name Forest slope 12 5 aspect 90
16. The items listed under the category Data Items in the WorkSpace are referred to as objects The following is an image of an EnSim Hydrologic WorkSpace displaying various objects 1 e the Jock River watershed object the Rectangular Grid the Basin 8 boundary etc WorkSpace ER Data Items GB Jock River EA Depressionless DEM E Rectilinear Grid Fl study wtrshd shp Cg Watershed Outline WTRSHD_CD 3 pig ae Basin amp boundary 5 Vie CC Ca pro a a ee T Figu Fach object is a coherent collection of data The data contained within a particular type of object may come from a variety of sources Take a 2D line set object for example A 2D line set object consists of one or more 2 dimensional lines The geometry of each line is defined by two or more xy points Each line may also have a number of attributes associated with it For example if the line set is a set of isolines representing contour data each line will have an associated elevation The data that comprises a line set object may come from for instance an ArcInfo shape file a MapInfo interchange file or an EnSim native 12s 2D line set file The organization of data is quite different in each of these source files However the data from each are organized in EnSim as a line set object EnSim uses objects as a way of taking data in various formats and putting them in a uniform format All objects of the same type e g line sets 2D Rectangular s
17. The parameters required to execute the HBV EC model are stored in a data file with the extension HBV For more information on the structure of this file see The HBV EC Parameter Set File on p 293 Within the WorkSpace the parameters are displayed as an HBV EC Parameter Set object 212 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 To create a new HBV EC parameter object select File New gt HBV EC Run from the menu bar A New HBV EC Parameter Set object will appear in the WorkSpace and the HBV EC dialog box will open WorkSpace Si fs Data Items BI New HBV EC Parameter Set E B New Watershed AB DEM AB Channels en bn Basin 1 Basin Spatial jG Climate Zones G Elevation Bands GM Land Use Regions GM Slope Bands a pating Bands To we om Ea en k ans oe pr Figure 5 1 Ti The new HBV EC Parameter Set object contains several children objects This HBV EC Parameter Set dialog consists of three or more panels EnSim WaterShed This panel contains information on the watershed that is being modelled e Basin This panel contains spatial information derived from the watershed selected on the EnSim WaterShed panel e Simulation This panel contains the parameters for the model itself e Climate Zone This panel displays and allows you to edit variables that describe the conditions in a particular climate zone This panel 1s only displayed after the HBV EC Model has been configured
18. aaa 216 5 2 2 2 The Elevation Tab aa 217 5 2 2 3 The Land Use Tab 0 aaa 218 5 2 2 4 The Slope Tab aa 219 5 2 2 5 The Aspect Tab 4c cigeunvtecdeueeveuey ANA WA 54 4 eRe booed 220 5 2 2 6 Identifying Zones Within HBV EC 0 naaa anana a 221 e To identify a zone anaana eee ees 221 5 2 3 The Simulation Panel 00 aaa 222 5 2 4 The Climate Zone Panel 2 0 00 cee ees 225 5 2 4 1 The Parameters Tab aa 225 5 2 4 2 TheMetTab a 229 5 3 THE HBV EC MODEL 0 cee es 231 e To run the HBV EC model 2 aa 231 5 3 1 The Results of the HBV EC Model 232 APPENDIX A FILE TYPES OF ENSIM CORE 235 General Information aa 23b File Headers aa 236 ASCII and Binary Files 0 0 000 cee ees 240 ASCII PICS 244055408 coe dnd heat eee ead boos DAD AMUR aes 240 Binay Files s paaa ee gat BAKA AL Sees oS ee ee AT WAG 240 NATIVE FILE FORMATS 0 000 ce eee eee es 242 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v 2 0 0 ee 242 File Headers r2s r2v 0 0 ee es 242 Data Organization r2s r2v 0 es 243 File Formats r2s r2v 0 0 0 ee es 243 COA 244 DING a ated ms Baa aah Gre ion ah a a GM AG a ws 244 2D Triangular Meshes t3s tJy 246 File Headers t3s tJy 0 0 0 0 ce eee 246 File Formats 13s t8v
19. 2 0 000 cee eee 112 1 7 9 Digitizing from an Imported Image 045 112 Table of Contents September 2007 e To digitize from an imported image eee 112 1 7 10 Georeferencing a non georeferenced GeoTIFF 113 e To georeference a non georeferenced tiff 113 1 7 11 Classification of a GeoTIFF Image 114 e To classify a GeoTIFF image 0 cee ees 114 e To create a Custom Theme a 115 e To choose from a predefined theme AA 115 2 ENSIM HYDROLOGIC 2 202a aaa naaawa 117 2 1 WATERSHED OBJECTS ctuccucedchedaceet adv naw MA ANA NG KA 117 2 1 1 Opening an Existing Watershed Object 118 2 1 2 Importing a Watershed from Topaz 118 2 1 3 Creating a New Watershed Object 118 2 4 3 1 Watersheds vic2ta5 ceeses PAGA HIAENEA BA GYERA es KUMANAN 119 e To delineate a watershed aaa 120 Zee DENS eresie Erno sre nre nE ren REESE EEEk 121 2 1 3 2 1 Checking for Errors and Editing the DEM 121 2 1 3 3 Channels and Flow Paths aaea 121 2 1 3 3 1 Channel Attributes 00 ee 122 2 1 3 3 2 Displaying Channels 0 a 123 e To view more or fewer channels 00000 eee eee eee 124 2 1 3 3 3 Editing the Channels nananana 00 ccc eee 125 2 1 3 3 4 Using Predefined Channels
20. 4 Click the Reset button to include the entire data set 5 Select the ppl button to apply your changes If you have selected any dates outside the range of data for the station the date will reset to the maximum for that parameter 183 HYDAT Database September 2007 3 3 NARR DATABASE 3 3 1 Introduction The North American Regional Reanalysis dataset is a long term consistent high resolution database of approximately 180 climatological parameters that cover the North American continent It was developed at the National Center for Environmental Prediction This dataset has a spatial resolution of 32 km on a 349 by 277 grid and a temporal resolution of 3 hours between January 1979 and the present ee ESN y Qu a Jj lt Figure 3 20 NARR data coverage More information can be found at http www emc ncep noaa gov mmb rreanl 3 3 2 Downloading the NARR Data NCEP provides a download service where users can extract individual parameters from the NARR database via a set of perl scripts Perl is open source and freely available A standard distribution called ActivePerl can be downloaded for free from www activestate com For the sake of convenience these scripts have been included in the EnSimHydrologic distribution and can be found in the directory INSTALL DIRHNARR They files include e get httpsubset pl e get inv pl e get grib pl e get gfs pl One executable file 1s also provided 184 Sectio
21. EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 NATIVE FILE TYPES Watershed Objects wsd The watershed object is the most important file type in EnSim Hydrologic since it contains the basic geographical and geophysical data necessary to create the hydrological model All data values in the watershed object correspond to a vertex of the DEM which forms the basis of the watershed object The file extension for a watershed object is wsd and it is represented in the WorkSpace by the icon The three data objects that are contained within a watershed objects are also represented by icons The DEM has the icon of a 2D scalar rectangular grid the channel object has the network icon 4 and the Basin has a unique icon j The basin object otherwise has the properties of a 3D line set File Headers wsd An example of a watershed object file header is shown below tit HHH HH HH HHH HEE HH HH HH EEE HH HH EH EEE EE EE EE EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE H FileType wsd ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType WaterShed it Application EnsimHydrologic Version Za WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM a a am a E a Gp a Ga a a ee Name Watershed Projection LatLong Ellipsoid NAD80 AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeName 2 Direction FlowAlgorithm AT Scarch it HydroGrid KORTOLI 409000 000000 VOK1G11f 4978000 000000 XCount
22. If both the data item and the view have identical coordinate systems the object can be dragged onto the view e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Different If the data item has a coordinate system different from the view a warning message similar to the dialog shown below will appear En5imHydrologic x ERROR Data Object Example Object Can t be displayed in 2D View 2 ERROR Coordinate systems do not match object Example Object Coord5ys UTM Zone 10 GP S80 view Coordsys LatLong GR 580 150 Figure 1 15 This error message is shown when an object s coordinate system does not match that of its view e New Data Item Created in View All new data items created in a view will acquire the coordinate system of the view e Data Item Extracted from Data Item with Existing Coordinate System Data items extracted from other objects items will acquire the coordinate system of their parent object e Multiple Data Items in View Changing the coordinate system of a data item in a view with multiple data items displayed will not change the coordinate system of the view To view the object that has had its coordinate system changed move it to a new view or change it back to the coordinate system of the view If only one object is in the view then the view s coordinate system 1s changed when the object s coordinate system is changed Similarly if multiple data items are displayed in a pa
23. The area of upstream drainage at each node or point of the DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Drainage Area from the menu bar If a basin is selected the drainage area value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The drainage areas can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view 132 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 lox Figure 2 19 These images depict a Drainage Area map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 3 Extracting Depression Fill The modifications made to the original DEM or grid to create a Depressionless DEM can be viewed by extracting the depression fill This operation can only be performed if the watershed was delineated using the Jenson flow algorithm See Creating a New Watershed Object under Watershed Objects on p 118 for more information The depression fill shows the amount by which EnSim Hydrologic had to fill the depressions to bring them up to the level of the surrounding land The depression fill can be extracted as a surface and displayed in a 2D or 3D view Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Depression Fill from the menu bar Ifa basin is selected the fill value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero 133 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Figure 2 20 These images show a Depression Fill map in 2D left and 3D right view
24. Type 1 ts1 Type 1 time series have the simplest organization of the four types of time series They contain scalar data that varies with a constant time step There is one column of data the values for each time step If more than one value is present on a line only the first will be read The time step is constant and is specified with the DeltaT keyword in the header If no time step is included in the file a dialog will appear when the file is opened in EnSim that asks you to supply a time step in seconds Type time series files without headers can be opened within EnSim If a headerless Type 1 time series file is saved within EnSim it will be given a header An excerpt from a Type 1 time series file is shown below A portion of the header is included to show the time step or DeltaT value The time step for this data is one minute or 60 seconds DeltaT 020180000 EndHeader 900000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Pon ADEO Type 2 ts2 Type 2 time series are only slightly more complex than Type 1 time series They contain vector data that varies with a constant time step There are two columns of data The first contains the magnitude or scalar value of the data for that time step and the second contains the direction of the vector in compass degrees Each row contains data about a different time step The time step is constant and is specified with the DeltaT keyword in the header
25. asc arc These files are read in as rectangular grids and can be saved as rectangular grids within EnSim See 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v on p 242 for more information e ArcView Shape Files shp Only the GIS features in point or line format 2D or 3D are supported by EnSim The legends and other view decorations cannot be imported Shape files are represented in the WorkSpace by the ArcView icon The data they contain lines or points are represented as children with an icon identifying the specific data type Each data type may have multiple attributes Shape files cannot possess multiple children When an ArcView Shape file is opened in EnSim it may be treated as a line set point set XYZ point set or parcel set depending on the type of data it contains Sample Arcview Shape Figure A 3 An ArcView Shape file containing line data in the WorkSpace e NRCan and USGS Digital Elevation Maps dem DEM files are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grids In the WorkSpace they have the gp icon They may be treated as native r2s files e MapInfo Interchange files mif Only the GIS features in point or line format 2D or 3D are supported by EnSim The legends and other view decorations cannot be imported Shape files are represented in the WorkSpace by the MapInfo icon z The data they contain lines or points are represented as children with an icon identifying the specific data type Each data type
26. no soil and no canopy the only variable listed for Lake terrain is Area Land Class Parameters Forest slope 22 1 aspeckS Y 18 2125 spect 180 Slope fe Initial Snow Solid U Initial Snow Liquid 0 Initial Soil Morsture T Figure 5 19 These variables apply to a specific Land Class e Area This variable displays the total area of the selected Land Class This value is obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Aspect This variable shows the bearing of the Land Class in degrees with 0 indicating North 90 indicating East and so on All terrain within the class will be considered to have this bearing Ifthe value is inappropriate you can change this variable e Slope This is the Slope of the Land Class in degrees All terrain within the class will be considered to have this slope If the value is not appropriate you can change this variable e Initial Snow Solid This is the initial snow solid in millimetres This value represents the total liquid water content of the snow pack or the amount of water that would be obtained if the solid portion of the snow were completely melted The default value is 0 e Initial Snow Liquid This is the initial snow liquid water content which represents the amount of liquid water found within a sample of snow The default value is 0 e Initial Soil Moisture This is the initial moisture content of the soil as a proportion This variable is only listed f
27. thm to support classification of GeoTIFF images see Classification of a GeoTIFF Image on p 114 The theme file contains the categorization of pixel values to colours and class names The theme file is an EnSim file and can be loaded and saved only from the Classes tab of the GeoTIFF Properties dialog These files are stored in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory An example of an ASCII theme file is shown below CLASSIFICATION THEME FILE Original name EC INDEX CLASS CLASS CLASS CLASS CLASS CLASS CLASS Al Ad 23 24 25 26 2l COLOUR 0x2222 b1 Ox00fbff 0x006400 Ox 3806c Ox20a2d9 0x254283 Oxeeeeat TEXT Impervious Deciduous Coniferous Agriculture Pasture Wetland Water e CLASS Each class is defined by the pixel value or index the RGB colour value and the class name 271 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 PAO Appendix B September 2007 APPENDIX B FILE TYPES OF ENSIM HYDROLOGIC EnSim Hydrologic is capable of reading all of the file types that are either native to or supported by EnSim Core In addition EnSim Hydrologic has two more native file types the watershed object and the 2D rectangular cell grid and supports twelve more external file types These extra files allow EnSim Hydrologic to be an effective integrated numerical modelling environment for hydrological models For EnSim conventions regarding file headers and common keywords see File Headers on p 236 273
28. 3 In the Generate Channels area adjust the parameter Channel headwater drainage area Increasing this parameter will decrease the number of flow paths displayed and accordingly decreasing this parameter will increase the number of flow paths displayed Note Very small channel headwater drainage area values may slow down channel regeneration 124 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 Generate Channels 2 Maximurn drainage area on grid doo km Channel headwater drainage area PA wy Generate Channels 2 Maximunn drainage area on grid o2 km Channel headwater drainage area 10 BI Figure 2 10 As the drainage area decreases more channels are displayed within the watershed 2 1 3 3 3 Editing the Channels Before adjusting the channels their flow paths should be checked against real channels Import GIS data into EnSim that contains information about the rivers and streams in the watershed that is being modelled See Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 270 for information about compatible file formats The channels should be adjusted 1f they differ significantly from the channels in the GIS data Since the channels are generated based on the DEM the DEM must be edited to alter the channels The DEM should be modified in such a way as to cause the surface water to flow along the proper path Remembering that water flows downhill the elevation at nodes of the DEM along the c
29. Elevation 146 Data Collection Pernod 1915 to 1997 Figure 3 16 The details of a CDCD station cannot be edited directly 180 Section 3 2 COCD DATABASE September 2007 e Identification This section details the location and ID number of the CDCD station e CSN This is the ID and name of the station e District This is the district ID and district name in which the station is situated e Province This is the province in which the station is situated e Lat Long This is the latitude and longitude of the station in decimal degrees e Airport This is the Airport ID applicable only if the station is an airport e Elevation This is the elevation of the station e Data Collection e Period This details the years during which data was collected at this station 3 2 4 2 Meta Data See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 30 for more information Properties of CAMPBELLFORD i i station MaxT emp MinT emp Fain SNN Precip SUG Details Meta Data CAMPBELLFORD Tupe COCO Station Director Filename Cancel Figure 3 17 The Meta Data tab of the CDCD station 3 2 5 Properties of Associated Time Series There are six possible time series that can be linked to a CDCD station These include MaxTemp MinTemp Rain Snow Precip and SOG snow on ground For each time series linked to the station a tab will appear in the properties dialog These time series are similar to oth
30. Figure 1 76 The Data tab shows some information about the distribution e Abscissa X axis e Intervals This is the total number of intervals of data represented on the curve e Maximum This is the maximum value found within the time series 97 EnSim Core September 2007 e Minimum This is the minimum value found within the time series e Units This is the units of measure used for the data in the time series e Ordinate Y axis e Maximum This is the probability of the most probable value in the time series e Minimum This is the probability of the least probable value in the time series e Units Units of probability are dimensionless This value is always defined as probability e Mean This is the mean value over the time series e Std Dev This is the standard deviation from the mean over the time series e Percentile Calculation This section allows you to determine the value below which a given percentage of the distribution lies Enter a percentage in the box and click Applu to display the value The percentage must be between 0 and 100 and is limited to two decimal places 1 6 8 Mapping Objects The Map Objects tool maps the values scalar and vector or data attributes from one object to another object Values can be mapped from objects that are in the form of a grid or mesh or that enclose an area such as closed polylines or polygons Polygons and points can be used to map values to grids or meshes Mappi
31. If no time step is included in the file a dialog will appear when the file is opened in EnSim that asks you to supply a time step in seconds Type 2 time series files without headers can be opened within EnSim Ifa headerless Type 2 time series file is saved within EnSim it will be given a header An excerpt from a Type 2 time series file is shown below A portion of the header is included to show the DeltaT value The time step for this data is 10 seconds DeltaT 00 00 10 000 EndHeader 0 000000 0 000000 51 885268 0 000000 260 Appendix A September 2007 LES 2113 120 6677376 238120234 103 580318 ZI lg 9539243 8922245105 344 795983 792220052 Ios JILL T75 632632 148 677744 75 550902 SUC eS L051 Tat TZ0L9 B03 SOLO C7 s234322 60G 616749 100 1439 73 Type 3 ts3 Type 3 time series files contain scalar data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has two sets of values The first is the explicit time and the second 1s the corresponding scalar data value There are four formats that may be used to specify the date and time although only one format may be used in a particular file Hours minutes and seconds are always specified regardless of the format although the values may be zero The date and decimal seconds are optional If the date is omitted hours increment beyond 24 An example of each time format 1s shown below e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 003 e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 e 0062 42 27 003 e 0062 42
32. The T3 Mesh tab of a new Triangular Mesh with new PointSet as source data The user has the option of selecting a closed polygon as a constraint line which will be used as the outer boundary of the triangulation Select the _ Itlangulate button in the T3 Mesh tab This will create a triangular mesh based on the source data points according to the specifications described in the previous step 70 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 Note The Properties dialog contains all the tabs of a viewable object in addition to the T3 Mesh tab See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 for more details 1 6 1 5 Creating a New Table Object Create a new grid object by selecting File gt New Table Object The table object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty If the Properties dialog of the table object is opened and the Data tab is chosen The attribute list will be empty Properties of New Table l 1 x Display Data Meta Data Records 0 Attribute Name i dax Units OF Apply Cancel Figure 1 48 The Data tab of an empty Table Object To build the table object drag the source object s into the empty table object in the WorkSpace The source data must be a time series object Once they are added to the table object they will appear as attributes on the Data tab Note The first time series added to the table object will define the start time the deltaT and the item count To successf
33. The number of attributes is determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header The above grid illustrates the layout of a binary r2s file for a grid containing n nodes p attributes and data varying over m frames Each scalar value 1s a 4 byte floating point number For Vector data there are two data sets contained within the file The first gives the x component of the vector at each point of the grid and the second gives the y component of each point The order of the values in each block of data corresponds to the order of points in the grid as given in Data Organization r2s r2v on p 243 Note Vector files are single attribute fim Xan Xana Kana Porn Wan Yano Similar to the previous grid this grid illustrates the layout for a binary r2v file containing n nodes varying over m frames Each x and y component is a 4 byte floating point value XatNn YatNI YatN2 YatNn 245 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2D Triangular Meshes t3s t3v The three 3 in t3s stands for 3 node triangles the simplest possible finite element grid The data contained in a triangular mesh file 1s in two parts the first lists the coordinates and the data attributes of the mesh points and the second lists the nodes of the elements The file extensions for a 2D triangular mesh are t3s and t3v Their icons are 4 and respectively The s in 3s indicates that the data in the file are scalar and the
34. This attribute shows the ice melt from glaciers in millimetres for each area over the simulated period e Glacier Water Storage This attribute shows water storage from glaciers in millimetres for each area over the simulated period 233 The HBV EC Model September 2007 234 Appendix A September 2007 APPENDIX A FILE TYPES OF ENSIM CORE General Information This appendix about file types supported by EnSim is included for two reasons e To allow you to create or edit files with external applications so that they may be used within EnSim e To allow you to become familiar with the file types used by EnSim There are a few basic object types native to EnSim Each is represented in the WorkSpace by a particular icon e 2D Rectangular Grid scalar gg and vector ff e 2D Triangular Mesh scalar and vector q Line Set 2D g7 and 3D 48 e XYZ Point Set Point Set or Parcel Set e XY Data Item e Time Series scalar and vector e Network e Table 7 These icons help to identify an object s type Many objects can retrieve and save information from and to several file formats For example the source data of a 2D line set object might be an 12s a shp or an mif file Even though these files have different formats the underlying data once imported into EnSim is handled in the same way See Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 270 for more information about file types from other
35. This controls the white space surrounding the graph as a percentage of the view window 5 5 The Polar View Window The polar view window can display either a velocity rose or a vector time series in a polar plot format The polar view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the polar view A new polar view window can be opened by pressing the FF button in the tool bar A typical polar view window is displayed below 36 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 ioil Wind Data YS L 1 1 1 7 1 1 p 4 5 AL 4 F Jar a EP Figure 1 19 A typical polar view window displaying probabilities of wind speed against direction 1 5 5 1 Coordinates in a Polar View Each point within the polar view is determined by a magnitude and an angle The magnitude 1s measured radially from the centre of the plot The direction spans clockwise from 0 to 360 degrees starting with O degrees on the upward vertical axis positive y axis 1 5 5 2 The Polar View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim application window provides information on the current window For an active polar window with a time series the location of the cursor is displayed with respect to the magnitude and direction Ready Polar Plat Mag 2 7067 Dir 67 1 A 1 5 5 3 Manipulating the Polar View The view can be panned by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button depressed Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt
36. ccc ees 263 File Format MDO aaa 264 ASCII ARA 264 SPA PT 264 Velocity Roses vr1 2 0 0 aaa 265 File Headers vr1 0 aaa 265 FIC FO MAS Vil ao ue bawa vs oe ee eae ya GA oe aS oe a 265 PSC PA PAY 265 Networks N3s aaa 266 File Headers NIs aaa 266 File Formats N3s aaa 267 POC cater PAA 267 DINA s22ec4echeeneeeeee S64 ceveenaeaaseeneceanea at 268 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE FORMATS ENSIM CORE 270 GeoTIFF Theme files thm 0005 271 APPENDIX B FILE TYPES OF ENSIM HYDROLOGIC 273 NATIVE FILE YPES qa Ha s anama R a Peewee NG NG 274 Watershed Objects wsd 0 4 AA aaa 274 File Headers wsd aa 214 File Format wsd aaa 2 6 ASCII se euee beg eoueswes AY 276 BINAY 2ucaceveee oeeneeaee eee eeeGeeses ee Ran ENa 2 6 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c 0 000 eee aes 211 File Headers r2c ee ee 217 File Formats r2c sa a ce scans eee woe Oe G GORA ew ee 278 ASO AA 278 Multiframe ASCII 2 aaa 279 BINA APA PAA 279 XV Table of Contents September 2007 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE TYPES ENSIM HYDROLOGIC 281 APPENDIX C FILE TYPES OF THE RCA 283 The Rating Curve Analysis File rca 283 File Header rca 2 aaa 283 File Format rca 2mm ANAKAN DA ND DB eRe Gow ewe wo 284 ASC geteqebavgreveueeuearved se
37. command from the shortcut menu The following resample dialog will appear 76 Section 1 6 Tools Resample LineSet l x Source Line5et Name Example Lines Point Count of Selected Line Length of Selected Line 1159 9 4yg Delta of Selected Line 19 309 Hesample Options i Selected Line Only Method Equal Distance Delta 100 W Create New LineSet New Name Resampled Example Lines Cancel Figure 1 55 This dialog box is used to resample lines September 2007 The Resample LineSet dialog is divided into two parts a Source LineSet section at the top and a Resample Options section at the bottom The Source LineSet section contains data associated with the selected line or lineset object Greyed text is read only The user can specify the resampling parameters within the Resample Options section If a line was selected from the view the user will have the option of resampling only that line or the entire lineset There are two resampling methods to choose from Maximum Distance and Equal Distance Maximum Distance If this method is chosen the 2D or 3D Line or Lines will be redrawn ensuring that the distance between each point does not exceed the Delta distance entered Beginning at the first point on the 2D or 3D Line if the distance from one point to the next is greater than the Delta value a new point is inserted at the Delta distance This procedure is repeated along the entire path
38. contents of the 1D views Changes made within this panel are reflected in the 1D views only after you click Apply e Name The name of the rating curve analysis The default name is RatingCurveAnalysis followed by the Station ID 148 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 e Rating Curve The two rating curve options are listed in the top list box Select E CO H HO N for the power curve or sania func H for the polynomial curve The default option is the power curve e Poly degree This option is only available of the polynomial rating curve has been selected The highest polynomial order is 6 The default value is 1 to describe a line e Corr Coeff This is the correlation coefficient for the fitted curve The closer the coefficient is to 1 the better the fit of the curve to the raw data e The text box located below the Corr Coeff contains all of the coefficients for the selected rating curve To edit any of the coefficients click on the coefficient name The value will become highlighted and can then be edited When the any coefficient is changed the rating curves will be redrawn and the correlation coefficient recalculated e Display The data shown in the views can be examined in several colour schemes e Default All data points in all graphs are shown in red e By Month Each month of the year is shown in a different colour e By Year Each year is shown in a different colour e Subset This area is s
39. e To manipulate a view that has been added to a report 51 e To change the order of objects in the report 51 e To change the border around an object in the report 51 1 5 9 4 Report View Window Page Setup Properties 52 1 5 9 5 Report View Templates aaa 53 e To create a report template a 53 e To use a report template aaa 53 1 5 10 View Decorations 0 0 0 cc es 53 1 5 10 1 Legends a 54 1 5 10 1 1Colour Scale Legends 0 0 0 ees 54 Vill Table of Contents September 2007 1 5 10 1 2Independent Legends 0 0 cee eee 56 e To create an independent legend 0 00 eee ee 56 e To edit an independent legend n nananana aaa 56 e The quick legend cc ee eee b7 1 5 10 2 The COMPASS eae se ma AG GG bw de wees ewe AA 58 1 5 10 3 The Simulation Clock 000 0 cc eee 58 1 5 10 4 Labels aa 59 To create a label 2 0 ccc AA 59 e To edit a label a 60 LOT ANAO sorier rrna nG Ah NEEESE a AG Ar AE DA AA 60 1 5 12 Flight Paths 2 aaa 61 e To create a new flight path aaa 61 1 5 12 1 Flight Path Properties cee eee 62 1 5 13 Synchronizing Two Views 0 ee eee 62 e To synchronize Views 1 0 00 ee eee 63 1 5 14 Saving and Copying Images 0 ee eee 64 1 5 14 1 R
40. for any object the Save WorkSpace operation will be cancelled but any objects already saved will remain saved To Load a WorkSpace Note Loading an EnSim Workspace file will remove any existing objects or views from the EnSim environment If necessary make sure that you ve saved the current WorkSpace EnSim WorkSpace files created by a EnSim application can be loaded by that EnSim application only The files are not compatible in any other EnSim application 1 Select File Load WorkSpace from the menu bar 2 When prompted to continue select the OF button The current WorkSpace will be cleared Ifthe Cancel button is selected no changes will be made to the current WorkSpace 2 In the Open dialog select the desired EnSim WorkSpace File and select the OK button Section 1 3 The EnSim Interface September 2007 1 3 THE ENSIM INTERFACE The interface is customized for specific applications as necessary The basic graphical user interface consists of four main components a menu bar and a tool bar both for selecting various windows and EnSim functions a workspace for managing open data files and views and an area for various views 1 e 1D Polar 2D 3D Spherical and Report An example of the basic EnSim interface follows The title bar identifies this interface as being from WaveSim However most EnSim applications have the same basic interface and will look similar to this example WavesSim 2D view 1
41. number of frames will depend on the parameters chosen for the simulation For more information on viewing time varying data see Animation under Views on p 60 4 2 3 1 Creating a Hot Start From an Output In some cases it may be useful to use the results of a simulation as input for another simulation This is particularly common with Run To Steady State simulations To extract a Hot Start from a GENID model run 1 After a simulation has completed right click on the GEN1D Parameter object in the WorkSpace 2 From the shortcut menu select Create Hot Start Network A dialog will appear 3 Enter the number of the frame that you would like to use as input to another simulation Note The first frame is numbered 0 209 The GENID Model September 2007 Hot Starts Create a Hot Start Network by extracting the relevant data from a user defined frame of the Output Network Frame Number z Figure 4 24 Use this dialog to create a Hot Start network 4 Click OK 5 Save the Out Network object by selecting File 3Save from the menu bar or by clicking Bl When you create a new GENID Parameter object use the Hot Start network file as the Channel object This file contains the velocities discharge and surface elevation at the chosen frame These conditions are then used as the initial conditions for the new GENID model 210 5 THE HBV EC MODEL The HBV model is a conceptual watershed model developed by SMHI
42. that corresponds to the type of zone you re identifying to a 2D view window 2 With the window open and the map visible click on the rq button on the tool bar 221 The HBV EC Model September 2007 3 Using the Polygon tool trace the outline of the zone See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 68 for more information on using this tool 4 When you ve completely outlined the area press lt Esc gt or click E to stop drawing Give the line a name and click OF 5 Within the WorkSpace select the map again either Climate Zones or Land Use Regions and select Tools Map Object from the menu bar 6 From the dialog box select the object that identifies the zone If you ve just created the object it will have the name that you selected in Step 4 Click OK 7 If the zone you re identifying is a climate zone you re finished The area you ve defined will be added to the list of climate zones You ll identify the properties of each climate zone on the Simulation panel Select Land Use Type Figure 5 14 This dialog lets you choose a Land Use Type If you re identifying a land use region a dialog box will appear letting you select which type of region you re describing Select the land use category and click OK You ll see the area on the map change colour to match the new land use type In either case you can check the Area column on the appropriate tab on the Basin panel to confirm that the changes have
43. used by the coordinate system Default is Unknown Possible values are Clark66 GRS80 WGS72 WGS74 Or Sphere CentreLatitude Required if the Projection 1S PolarStereographic The centre latitude of the projection A negative centre latitude indicates a Southern Polar Stereographic projection CentreLongitude Required if the Projection 1S PolarStereographic The centre longitude of the projection CentralMeridian Required if the Projection Is LambertConformal Or Albers The central meridian is the longitude of the centre of the projection It is also referred to as the Longitude of Origin 237 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 238 LatitudeOfOrigin Required if the Projection iS LambertConformal or Albers The latitude of origin is the latitude where the central meridian crosses the projection origin or base line FirstStandardParallel Required if the Projection 1S LambertConformal or Albers The first standard parallel is the latitude nearest the equator where the cone of the conic projection intersects the globe SecondStandardParallel Required if the Projection 1S LambertConformal or Albers The second standard parallel is the latitude nearest the pole where the cone of the conic projection intersects the globe FalseEasting Required if the Projection 1s LambertConformal or Albers The false easting is the value added to the x coordinate It is usually used to remove negative coordinate va
44. you can access detailed information in several ways To access a selected station 1 Click on a station within a View as shown in Figure 3 3 All attributes of the selected station will be displayed 172 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2007 StnlD OFKFOOS Stn Mame OTTAWA RIVER AT BRITANNI StnData Flow Level Conc Load Drainage 5t Lawrence River Prov ON B ear 1915 E fear 2U00 parj F 5 805 45 365 Figure 3 3 The attributes of a station can be accessed in a view window 2 Right click on the selected object and select Load Selected from the shortcut menu or select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT gt Load Selected from the menu bar Station details as well as associated time series are then shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station WorkSpace fg Data Items Efe HYDAT 5D Flt O2KFOOS Na vo Flow02EF005 ba o Level0 KFO05 ka ta COMC02KFO0G nG Ng Load02KFO05 Ee ee ee Figure 3 4 Data from a specific station are shown as children of that station To access a station by ID 1 Select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT Search by ID from the menu bar Search for which Station ID xX Cancel Cancel 02kF005 Figure 3 5 This dialog allows you to search for a HYDAT station by ID 2 Enter the HYDAT ID number in the dialog and click Uk All HYDAT ID numbers are uppercase 173 HYDAT Database September 2007 Statio
45. 0 cee ee ee ees 247 FOO sone ote ee eee ee ee dae eee es eee 247 DINAN pee ee eae ees ede et ee eee 6 eed oe bee eta ee ees 248 Line Sets i2s is 446660 5 0644 ad ae ed eee wow ee oun ee WA 250 File Headers i2S i3s 0 a 250 File Formats i2S i3s eee eee 251 ASC PAPER APA 251 SC AA PAP AS 251 XYZ Point Sets xyz 00 0 Aa 252 File Headers Xxyz cee ee ee eee 252 File Format XYZ met te oo oe eee wa oe 6 eae we eae a oH Hae 252 XY Data Objects xy dat 2 0 00 ee eae 253 File Headers xy dat 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 253 File Format xy dat 0 eee eee 253 Parcel Sets pel 0 0 0 cc ee ee 254 XV EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 File Headers pel aaa 254 File Formats pel aa 255 FOCI eee wb eed eee ee ad eee oe 6 ode A 255 PINAY seae ra ec PAPA 255 Point Sets pt2 0 0 00 eee eas 256 File Headers pt2 0 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee 256 File Formats pt2 Aa 257 POGI kama de kanga gh kee eek AA tae A WA KG NG KA AG 257 Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 258 File Headers ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 00008 258 File Headers tS5 0 2 2 0 0 aa 259 File Formats ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 260 AOC AA AA ee bs 260 BINAY 2ccteuctaateteeteeces PAA 262 WADICS lo PAA PAA 263 File Headers tb0
46. 0 00 cee ee ee 206 4 2 1 5 8 Generating a Simple Cross Section 206 e To generate a simple cross section 0 000 eee ee 206 4 2 1 5 9 Removing a Cross Section 0 0000 207 e TO remove a cross section ee eee 207 4 2 1 5 10Cross Section Properties 0 0 eee eee 207 e To view the properties of a cross section 207 4 2 2 Running the GEN1D Model 00005 208 e Torun a GEN 1D simulation aa 208 4 2 3 Displaying Simulation Output 005 208 4 2 3 1 Creating a Hot Start From an Output 209 e To extract a Hot Start from a GEN1D model run 209 5 THE HBV EC MODEL 222 2na con 211 5 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 222222222 eee 211 5 1 1 Background and History of the Model 211 5 1 2 Algorithms Specific to the Model 211 5 1 2 1 Climate ZONES 0 aa 212 5 1 2 2 Snow Melt Factor Variation with Terrain Aspect and Slope 212 5 1 2 3 Watershed Routing ccs 212 5 1 3 References cc ee 212 32 THE MBV EC INTERFACE c40 m0 BABABA GG AGAWAN GAAN D eave 212 5 2 1 The EnSim WaterShed Panel A a 213 e To identify an alternate basin object 0 000000 0c eee 215 5 2 2 The Basin Panel a 216 XIV Table of Contents September 2007 5 2 2 1 The Climate Tab
47. 101 yCount 101 xDelta 400 000000000000 yDelta 400 000000000000 Angle 0 000000 SourceFile JockRiver rzZs Name DEM EndHydroGrid it HydroChannels 274 Appendix B September 2007 DrainageAreaThreshold 8 000000 gt MinWaterShedArea 375 000000 gt MinAdjWaterShedArea 26 000000 OutletsViewable 0 Title Network Name Channels EndHydroChannels Basin 1 Outlet x 445400 000000 Outlet y 5017600 000000 Title Basin Name Basin 1 EndBasin it For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 236 The Name and Title keywords that are used for several watershed subcomponents are described in that section The FlowAlgorithm keyword indicates which algorithm was used to generate the depressionless DEM from the source data The Watershed object uses several keywords that are similar to those found in a 2D rectangular grid to describe the depressionless DEM These keywords are found after the keyword HydroGrid which indicates the beginning of the subsection and before the EndHydroGrid keyword which indicates its end e xOrigin This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e yOrigin This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e xCount The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along th
48. 163 land use GUIGNO sisrate 166 geoTIFFS aakala 166 polygons 163 resetting 167 multiple watersheds 158 OPENING Hansen Saat 155 SAVING umakma 167 bib cea scans aceseapecuseesaetseconeacesees 169 supported files u s 281 WaveSIM 1 1 1 1 1 7 Wetness Index Uu 135 WorkSpace The u 3 ACTIONS ula 5 LOO eee E 6 A E E Apn 6 X XY Object ama AGANG 253 ETO dese ssiemerscncineseceasemeeesar 253 file header 253 TC OWN aaa AA 4 XYZ Point Set ua 292 file format eee 252 fle TIC AG CF aan 252
49. 2 2 1 4 Extracting Average Upslope Elevation The average elevation of all upstream nodes flowing into each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Ave Upslope Elevation from the menu bar If a basin is selected the upslope elevation value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The average upslope elevations can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view Figure 2 21 These images depict an Average Upslope Elevation map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 134 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 2 2 1 5 Extracting Average Upslope Slope The average slope of all upstream nodes flowing into each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface In this case slopes are calculated using the 8 neighbour finite difference method Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools 3Watershed Extract Ave Upslope Slope from the menu bar Ifa basin is selected the upslope slope value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The average upslope slope can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view ei 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 22 These images depict an Average Upslope slope map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 6 Extracting Wetness Index The topographic wetness index is a function of the drainage area and the slope Higher wetness indices may indicate regions of the DEM that are more likely to g
50. 27 An excerpt of data from a ts3 file is shown below The time increments every two hours starting at 3 AM on April 15th 2005 as indicated by the explicit time EndHeader 2005 04 15 3200 00 000 0 003000 23005704715 5200400 000 0 001350 2005 04 15 7200200 000 0 001327 2005 04 15 9 00 00 000 0 001442 2005 04 15 11500200 000 0 001532 2005704715 13 00 00 000 0 001712 2005 04 15 15 00 00 000 0 001909 2005 04 15 17 00 00 000 0 002037 2005704713 19 00 00 000 0 002359 2005 04 15 21 00 00 000 0 004285 2005 04715 23 00 00 000 0 006134 2005 04716 01 00 00 000 0 004698 Type 4 ts4 Type 4 time series files contain vector data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has 3 sets of values The first is the explicit time the second is the corresponding magnitude or scalar data value and the third is the direction in compass degrees There are four formats that may be used to specify the time as explained in the description of Type 3 time series 261 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 An except of a Type 4 time series is given below This time series does not follow a regular time step EndHeader 00 00 000 0 000000 YO 00 51 885 0 000000 120 03 03 427 120 877376 270 03 58 120 103 580318 66 04 51 955 89 223187 45 05 44 795 79 220052 30 06 36 791 75 832632 25 07 28 677 75 550902 15 08 20 610 77 772019 300 09 13 351 87 234322 87 10 06 818 100 143973 85 11 00 241 112 868333 210 11 53 61
51. Aspect Bands Display Spatial Meta Data North East South West North 0 38 525 East 90 61 3625 South 180 60 9275 West 270 542575 Figure 5 12 This Aspect tab divides the terrain into four aspect bands 220 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 There are three options for the aspect category which can be selected on the menu at the top of the tab e None The aspect of the terrain is ignored for the simulation e North South The terrain is divided into north facing and south facing categories e North East South West The terrain is divided into north facing south facing east facing and west facing categories BEAN Aspect Bands East Figure 5 13 This watershed has been divided into north east south and west facing aspects 5 2 2 6 Identifying Zones Within HBV EC Two of the tabs within the HBV EC panel obtain their data from user supplied information instead of deriving it from the watershed object The Climate and Land Use tabs require you to provide information on their respective subjects This information must be mapped onto the triangular mesh corresponding to each data tab To identify a zone Note These instructions assume that you do not already have a data item describing the area or perimeter of the zone to be identified If you have such an object open it and start with step 5 1 Drag the map either Climate Zones or Land Use Regions
52. Average The Count option counts the number of points defined by the Boolean operators in the And box below The Sum Min Max and Average options complete the specific operation of a specific attribute From This option shows the source object which contains the data to be examined To This option provides a name for the time series that is to be created Where cells are within the polygon This option lists any closed polylines within the data item which may be used to provide a spatial constraint The word cells in the title of this box may be different depending on the type of data item And Each of these three options lists the attributes within the data item and the available Boolean operators lt and gt The third column allows you to enter a value to define the criterion The time series data item will be created and displayed in the WorkSpace as a child of the originating data item The time series may be saved in ts format where ranges from 1 to 5 depending on the type of time series data See Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 on p 258 for details on types of time series data 1 6 5 7 Extracting a Velocity Rose A velocity rose can be extracted from any vector time series ts2 or ts4 in the WorkSpace The velocity rose 1s a statistical representation of the frequency of occurrence of speed and direction The velocity rose plot can be viewed in a Polar view see The Polar View Window on p 36 o
53. Below The label of the lowest colour level indicating a range below a certain number The default below label is the word below e Font This determines the font of the title numbers and labels The Font Name and Colour can be edited The legend width 1s determined by the longest of the title subtitle or level fields 1 5 10 1 2 Independent Legends An independent legend may be displayed in any view window The legend can be both created and edited To create an independent legend With a view selected select View New Legend An empty legend will be drawn within the select view window and a legend properties dialog will be automatically opened To edit an independent legend If the legend properties dialog 1s not already open see above then select the legend within the view by double clicking on it The properties dialog can be launched by either double clicking again on the selected legend by selecting Edit gt Properties or by selecting Properties from the legend s shortcut menu 56 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 Hi Title D Wew B Subtitle Decorations W Border E Colour 25 Width M Background l Colour W Colour Italics Bold Underline None 10 Jeni Figure 1 34 The independent legend property dialog The independent legend properties that can be edited are as follows Title Subtitle Both titles are shown at the same font size with the subtitle app
54. CAL FRICTION run type e CAL FRICTION MIN STRICKLER Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 10 Description the estimated lower limit of possible Strickler values for a RUN CAL FRICTION run e CAL FRICTION MAX STRICKLER Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 50 Description the estimated upper limit of possible Strickler values for a RUN CAL FRICTION run e RATING CURVE NODE ID Optional Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location to be monitored to generate the rating curve in a run type RUN GEN RATING CURVE e RATING CURVE DISCHARGE START Optional 288 Appendix D September 2007 Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 2 000000 Description Records the initial discharge value at which the rating curve 1s generated e RATING CURVE DISCHARGE DELTA Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 1 000000 Description Records the change in discharge between values of the rating curve e RATING CURVE STEP COUNT Optional Type integer Valid Values any integer equal to or greater than 1 Default 10 Description Records the number of generated values used to generate a rating curve in a RUN GEN RATING CURVE run Input Files e CHANNEL NETWORK FILE Required Type text Valid Values
55. Criteria Minimum watershed area Minimum adjoining watershed area Cancel Figure 2 7 The Channels tab is found on the watershed Properties dialog Flow paths are represented by network segments and may be saved in n3s format see Networks n3s on p 266 for more information on file formats 2 1 3 3 1 Channel Attributes EnSim defines the channels of the watershed by connecting the nodes of the DEM that fall along the path of surface water flow Each channel or flow path has a stream order and a drainage area Stream order and drainage area are data attributes of a channel and can be found under the Data tab of the Channel object s Properties dialog or can be displayed in a popup window See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 and Data Probes under Probing Data on p 80 for more information Stream order or Strahler order is a measure of the relative size of a channel Headwater channels have an order of one When two channels of the same order meet the single downstream channel that 1s formed has an order that is one greater than its two upstream channels The drainage area of a channel is the land area upstream over which surface water drains to the most downstream node of a segment of a channel A channel segment is that part of a channel that lies between two of the channel s tributaries The most downstream node of a channel segment is its watershed outlet node See Watershed or Bas
56. Figure 1 27 The Display Properties dialog of a 3D view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section The Compass under View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 80 e Use Display Lists Using display lists will update the view quickly after changes are made but at the expense of memory If the object being displayed occupies a lot of memory space using display lists may make updating the view slow In that event toggling this option off may help to update the view more quickly e Show Crosshairs Crosshairs are the red green and blue axes defining the x y and z directions respectively e Lock View When toggled on the ability to move data items in the view will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock sj in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g e Rotate and Translate control the movement of the viewing area as described previously See Manipulating the 3D View on p 43 for more details e
57. HH HH HE EE HH HH HH EE CE HH EE EEE EO EH EE a EEE OE EO EEE EOE OE EE EEE EEE FileType 12s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType 2D Line Set it Application EnSimTelemac Version 2 4 18 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 15 2005 11 20 PM Ba AA AA AA AA AA it Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown i AttributeName 1 fractl AttributeType 1 float AttributeName 2 name AttributeType 2 text AttributeName 3 subname AttributeType 3 text AttributeName 4 fract2 AttributeType 4 float AttributeName 5 whole 250 Appendix A September 2007 AttributeType 5 integer EndHeader 4 0 3 Southern Ontario Lakes Ontario 0 5 3 213003961 84360190 2 606635 49 289100 44075829 24 170616 90 047393 45 023697 6 0 4 Southern Ontario Lakes Erie 0 75 2 8 473034 94 596351 18 269154 19 145908 11 9102 gt 14115879 S0 531684 33 lt h77043 IAL B7 65532975 6 086118 79 506262 Line set files have no file specific keywords See File Headers on p 236 for information on general keywords File Formats 12s i3s ASCII All line set files are in ASCII as currently only non time varying line sets have been implemented The following format is repeated for each line in the set The first line of data contains at least one value The first of these is an integer that represents the total number of vertices in the line The other values a
58. Importing WATFLOOD Files 00 000 aa 167 2 3 2 1 Watflood Event File Properties 00 000 a ee 168 e To save changes to the Event file 0 0 00 0002 ee 168 2 3 3 WATFLOOD Output aa 169 2 3 4 Bankfull Animation aaa 169 xii Table of Contents September 2007 e To create a bankfull animation aa 169 3 ENVIRONMENTAL DATABASES u 171 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE 0 00s aasa 171 3 1 1 Introduction a 171 3 1 2 Accessing the Database 0 00 cee ees 171 e To access the HYDAT database 0 171 3 1 3 Accessing Station Details 0 0 a 172 e To access a selected station Aa 172 e To access a station by ID aaa 173 3 1 4 Properties of aHYDAT Station 174 3 1 4 1 Details zu bAhLBBAARENLUDLENA KAG DAWA hha hhG Duha kA 174 3 14 2 HYDEX 0 ec am G AG hane mang de hbaed Da cede bade cae eee deems 175 3 143 Meta Data v2 AA MAGNA ANG oo KARA KARA KA eS ow Bees WAG a 175 3 1 5 Properties of Associated Time Series 176 Ill DUDE pagdaan eee eee eee bee eee ee eee eee d 177 3 2 CDCD DATABASE a6 ie bates PBA nese e eee betwee ween bes 178 3 2 1 Introduction 222422 tececcadee te BIG Gee DES eee ede he ae 178 3 2 2 Accessing the Database 0 cee ee 178 e To access the CDCD database AA 178 3 2 3 Accessing S
59. Ioj x File Edit View Tools Run Window Help x Dil S a F x a E aaae 2 WorkSpace bea Ge Data Items Eli Fiews Clang 20 view 1 Works pace Ready Cartesian Figure 1 3 The EnSim interface window 1 3 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar consists of the standard Windows options File Edit View Tools Window and Help Fil Edit View Tools Window Help Commands in these menus that are specific to EnSim will be detailed in the appropriate sections Specific EnSim applications may contain other menus in the menu bar e g WaveSim EnSim Core September 2007 and OilSim have the Run option in their Menu Bars which contains commands related to running a simulation 1 3 2 The Tool Bar The main tool bar gives quick access to some of the commands in the menus It can be toggled on or off using the Tool Bar command in the View menu To move the tool bar click on the tool bar with the mouse and drag it to the desired location oleja S a F saz a Hao Other tool bars exist for specific command functions For example there is an Animation tool bar for EnSim applications that have animation capabilities For more information on these tool bars see the information specific to the function 1 3 3 Shortcut Menus Shortcut or context menus are available for most windows and objects by right clicking on the selected window or object Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 1 4 DATA ITEMS
60. Other Land Use Descriptions EndLandUse EndElevationBand Elevation Band Name Elevation Band 2 Other Elevation Bands EndElevationBand EndClimateZone gt ClimateZone Name Climate Zone 2 Other Climate Zones EndClimateZone EndWaterShed EndModel ENdHBVEC EndHeader September 2007 For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 236 The Name and Title keywords that are used for several subcomponents are described in that section For a detailed description of the parameters used to define the Watershed object see Watershed Objects wsd on p 274 Within the hbv file shown below the Watershed parameters appear between the HydroGrid and EndBasin keywords 295 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 The keywords found in the Model section of the header are the same as the variable names used in the respective panels of the Simulation and Climate Zone panels of the HBV EC Parameter Set object See The Simulation Panel on p 222 and The Climate Zone Panel on p 225 for details on the meanings of the keywords File Format hbv HBV files are always stored in ASCII format The body of the file consists of a list of values for the parameters identified by the AttributeName keywords In general this will be the Elevation and Flow Direction of each node in the watershed starting in the bottom left corner and going from left to right top to b
61. Rainfall Snowfall C olumnUnits degC mm mm ColumnType float float float EndColumnMetaData EndHeader 2 s2 0 24 4 220 1853 lad NB Cae U a Ie 48 U O sd O 0 bad OO 1 8 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 abad Gud 263 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 e StartTime This keyword is only present if time is associated with the table data In this case the first row of table data 1s associated with the date 2003 01 01 and the time 12 00 The value may be written as date and time or just a time The times below are all valid formats 2003701701 12 00 2005701701 12700700 242002700 000 24 00 00 e DeltaT This keyword is only present if the StartTime keyword is present It represents the time step used and must be a time not a date The times below are valid formats e 24 00 00 000 e 12 00700 e 72 00 00 e ColumnMetaData This keyword initiates the block of keywords and values that describe the table attributes columns The keywords found within the block are e ColumnNanme The column or attribute names Specify the name for each column from 1 ton e ColumnUnits The column or attribute units Specify units as a string for each column from 1 to n This keyword is optional e ColumnType The column or attribute data type Specify the data type for each column from 1 to n Data types may be float integer boolean text or date e EndColumnMetaData This keyword ends the block of keywords and values that d
62. Segment If you have collected data about the bathymetry of the channel that data can be associated with the segment to which it applies To associate a cross section with a segment 1 Load the cross section into the WorkSpace as an 13s 3D line set file See Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data under How To Hints and Tricks on p 107 or Line Sets 12s 13s on p 250 for more information on creating a 3D line object 2 Within the WorkSpace drag the 3D line object containing the cross section data onto the Channel object within the GENID container 3 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view window select the segment with which the cross section is to be associated 4 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection Associate CrossSection at Segment rag Associate Cross section with selected segment ID 2 Please specify the cross section ID Cancel Figure 4 13 Use this dialog to select a cross section to associate with a segment 5 In the dialog box enter the ID of the cross section to be associated with the segment Lines within the file are numbered in the order in which they were created 6 Click Ok 202 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 4 2 1 5 2 Scaling a Cross Section Scaling a cross section allows you to multiply the entire cross section by a single factor To scale a cross section 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view
63. Select one of the choices shown in Figure 3 11 Environmental Data Open HYDAT d Open CDED Import MARR Subset British Columbia Worthern Territories Alberta Saskatchewan Manitoba Onkario Quebec Maritimes Load Selected Search by ID Figure 3 11 This menu is used to access the CDCD database Once the selected data has been loaded the corresponding region becomes greyed out Additional selections including the Canada option add stations to the CDCD object The CDCD object is a multi attribute point set which can be displayed in a 2D view 178 Section 3 2 COCD DATABASE September 2007 WorkSpace ER Data Items neg CCD CSN Figure 3 12 The CDCD object appears in the WorkSpace 3 2 3 Accessing Station Details Once the CDCD object is in the WorkSpace you can access detailed information in several ways To access a selected station 1 Click on a station within a View as shown in Figure 3 3 All attributes of the selected station will be displayed ak T 7 CSN 1137 Name CAMPBELLFORD Airport Province Ontario F District ID 615 District Name Lake Ontario Counties F Elevation 146 First Year 1915 Last Year 1997 StartHecNumb 4505 A F600 44 300 Figure 3 13 The attributes of a station can be accessed in a view window 2 Right click on the selected object and select Load Selected from the shortcut menu or select File Environmental Data Open
64. Soil Moisture it sxOrigin 0 000000 wyOrigin 0 000000 it 277 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 FrameTime 313 00 00 000 xCount 27 iycount 38 xDelta 1 000000 yDelta 1 000000 EndHeader For an explanation of the common keywords used in r2c files see File Headers on p 236 The remaining keywords used in 2D rectangular cell grid files are similar to those used in rectangular grid files e xOrigin This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e yOrigin This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e xCount The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along the y direction e xDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left corner An additional keyword is sometimes used in r2c files e FrameTime When data in an r2c grid is extracted from a data file containing time variable information this keyword is used to identify the time at which the data was extracted in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds File Formats r2c ASCII The ASCII data in an r2c file is organized into a grid The number of columns corresponds to the number of cells in the
65. This is the liquid water holding capacity of snowpack expressed as a fraction of snowpack water equivalent The default value is 0 05 which indicates that snowpack can consist of 5 liquid water before it begins to flow LWR This is the maximum amount of liquid water that can be retained by a snowpack in millimetres The default value is 2500 This value comes into play when the snowpack 1s extremely deep e Soil variables FC This is the field capacity of the soil in millimetres The default value is 200 This indicates the maximum amount of water that the soil can retain BETA This controls the relationship between soil infiltration and soil water release The default value is 1 Values less than this indicate a delayed response while higher values indicate that runoff will exceed infiltration LP This is the soil moisture content as a proportion of FC below which evaporation becomes supply limited meaning that actual evaporation will be less than potential evaporation This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 7 e Glacier variables MRG This is the ratio of melt of glacier ice to seasonal snow at the same air temperature The default value is 2 and the minimum is 1 There is no maximum value This account for the difference in albedo between ice and snow resulting in a greater amount of energy being needed to melt the same amount of ice as snow e AG This is the factor controlling the relation be
66. View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 80 41 EnSim Core September 2007 1 Use Display Lists Using display lists will update the view quickly after changes are made but at the expense of memory If the object being displayed occupies a lot of memory space using display lists may make updating the view slow In that event toggling this option off may help to update the view more quickly Show Grid When this checkbox is turned off the lines of the grid are removed but the coordinates remain visible This is useful when viewing gridded data The grid of the 2D View can sometimes overlap with the lines of the object causing the lines to be hidden Lock View When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock g in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red X and Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes Labels This toggles the grid coordinate labels Colour This is a colour selector not a checkbox By clicking on the coloured square a dialog appears allowing you to choose a colour for the gridlines and the grid coordinates Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of t
67. and Field of View behave as described previously in this section See Manipulating the Spherical View on p 47 for more details 48 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 1 5 9 The Report View Window The report view window allows you to display several views at once and to synchronize several animated views The report view also lets you prepare one or more views for printing while including legends headers or other formatting objects Unlike other views the report view does not display data items Instead other types of views can be dragged onto and displayed within a report view A new report view window can be opened by pressing the button or by selecting Window New Report View You can open an already formatted report template by selecting Window gt Load Template See Report View Templates on p 53 for more information Figure 1 30 The report view can contain other views as well as decorations 1 5 9 1 The Report View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window If the current Medium See Report View Window Page Setup Properties on p 52 is Paper the status bar for the report view window shows the orientation of the current report as Letter Legal or Custom The bar also shows the position of the mouse cursor in inches measured from the top left corner of the sheet as well as the current zoom level Ready Letter 7 16 5 23 70 96 A YA If the curr
68. and additional panels are displayed 1f more than one climate zone 1s used within the simulation See The Climate Tab on p 216 for more information on Climate Zones 5 2 1 The EnSim WaterShed Panel The WaterShed panel allows you to select and edit the watershed object that is to be modelled For detailed information on creating a watershed object see Creating a New Watershed Object on p 118 There are two ways to prepare a watershed for the HBV EC model 213 The HBV EC Model Properties of New HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation Watershed DEM Channels Channels def Basin 1 Name New Water5hed ype Water5hed Directory Filename Cancel Figure 5 2 This is the WaterShed panel with the Predefined Channels option enabled September 2007 e Ifyou ve already created a watershed using EnSim Hydrologic you can open that object and drag it to the HBV EC Parameter Set object The information on the existing watershed will be copied into the HBV EC watershed child object including the Channels and Basin objects You can also select the watershed by clicking Ral and selecting the file Ee WorkSpace f3 Data Items El E New HBV EC Parameter Set WorkSpace Ci Es Data Items Et New HBV EC Parameter Set New W LT 8 DEM ba D Channels A Basin 1 HGA HBV EC Spatial HBV EC PHT ro oe BA DEM a LG na 3 Lag HBV EC
69. and model data An EnSim application can be designed to run a simple numerical model or a suite of numerical models providing a variety of pre and post processing tools It is designed as a generic toolkit from which a system developer chooses components to create an application For the modeller EnSim creates a virtual environment where simulation results can be viewed animated and analyzed in one two and three dimensions This allows you to observe complex interactions of various phenomena in an intuitive manner providing a realistic view of simulation results Presentation of simulation results to non technical audiences can be greatly improved by providing seamless integration with other Windows applications such as word processors spreadsheets and multimedia tools 1 1 2 Getting Started EnSim Core forms the basis of a variety of applications e g WaveSim EnSim Telemac EnSim Hydrologic that comprise the EnSim family These applications all share fundamental functions which form the core of EnSim As a result this EnSim manual is set up in a modular fashion There is a section under the heading EnSim Core that details the functions common to all EnSim applications and a separate section under the title of the application that describes those functions that are particular to the specific EnSim application As a first time user it might be easier to begin with the section on EnSim Core to become familiar with the basics of EnSi
70. associated open the watershed object that was used to generate the map In the WorkSpace drag the watershed into the Watflood Map to associate the two This will not change the 164 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 map s data attributes In addition ensure that the polygons or GIS files containing the land use data are available in the WorkSpace 5 Select a land use class in the Data tab of the Watflood Map and press Apply A green check mark will appear to the left of the land class name 6 Ensure that the Watflood Map is selected within the WorkSpace 7 Select Tools gt Map Object 8 A dialog will appear listing the compatible objects Select the object corresponding to the proper land use type and then select OK When the land use data is applied the grid cells will change colour according to the percentage of the cell s area that was covered by the land use polygons 9 In the view verify that the cells are coloured according to the percentage of the cell covered by the polygon s This can be done either by checking the colour against the colour scale or by double clicking on a cell to bring up its attribute values 10 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each remaining land class 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 56 The colour of each cell indicates the percentage of its area belonging to a particular land class The Map Object tool described in the section Mapping Objects under Tools on p 98 can be used to apply one or more
71. attributes a 122 ALI ah RA 123 6 150 AE 125 ouer MOUCS sinea 127 predel Md AP 125 CHC Canadian Hydraulics Centre 1 Ch zy coefficient 006 189 COCR rene ana 58 Compass ma 58 Contours displaying isoline outlined filled 109 Coordinate Systems 25 assigning projections 26 converting projections 26 CALETA na 28 NA a 2 a le NAA Zi in 2 dimensional views 39 Crookshank ee 189 Cross sections extracting from gridded data 107 from points and line data 108 Curvatures aNG 89 D Data see 9 adding other objects to 5 OC AN AA teeta 67 WTS S maana nba 68 DOMIS maa NANANG 67 regular orid AAP 68 sloping structure 110 table ODICCE scssiecsastss neneved ceeae 71 triangular mesh 70 displaying two features 108 CIS a GA 71 attributes acs ancacesaereacestecenaeeneues 12 299 EnSim Core POL aa UNA 73 resampling lines and linesets 76 resampling time series 78 INGGLES aasa Nika 73 extracting spatial subset 111 temporal subset 111 IAPONLING siais 10 NO ACI AKN 10 11121 0 0 1 Se cen ee me 98 NANG AA 10 properties 16 removing other objects from 5 PENA AA 6 SANG naaa AEE 11 16 Data Objects See Data items Data Probes UVS CUT SOR AA 82 live st
72. bar 140 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 Figure 2 30 A surface representing flow path distances to the outlet extracted from a selected basin shown in 3D view 2 2114 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis The Drainage Area Ratio DAR Analysis tool allows for the estimation of channel flow at a selected point or along a user selected section of the channel Calculations are made using the Drainage Area Ratio method This method assumes the flow along a channel is proportionally linear to the drainage area To launch the DAR Analysis 1 Click on the watershed object in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Watershed gt DAR Analysis from the menu bar This will add a DAR analysis point set object to the watershed object The DAR Analysis will appear as an additional tab in the watershed Properties dialog Properties of Sample Watershed x Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Bazin 2 L BY Ma e AY ee a EC a a a ea a Figure 2 31 The DAR Analysis tab appears after an analysis has been run The DAR Analysis tab has two unique tabs e Known Flow 141 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 e Computed Flow To identify the computed flow stations from the known flow stations refer to the Display tab Within the Display tab a unique colour may be selected for each of the stations 2 2 1 14 1 Known Flow The Known Flow tab describes known flow stations located on the channel object of the watershed
73. closed polygons defining land use to the Watflood map These polygons can be from a GIS source or can be created in EnSim Hydrologic using the polygon tool See Drawing Points on p 67 and Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Tools on p 68 for more information The Map Object tool is designed to apply a value to a grid node but for the Watflood Map the percentage of the grid cell occupied by the mapped polygon is applied to the grid cell instead 165 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Points to remember when applying land use data to a Watflood Map e The land use polygons must be closed Open polylines cannot be used e A data item that is being mapped to the Watflood Map may contain multiple polygons e Polygons can be applied to a land use class for which a polygon has already been applied The percentages will be added to the existing percentages Overlap of polygons between the first application and the second will not be accounted for e All of the polygons within a given GIS file must define the same land use For example all the polygons in the forest shp GIS file must define forest land use all the polygons in the urban shp GIS file must define urban land use and so on e EnSim cannot map complex polygons such as nested polygons or polygons with holes Using a GIS software package split any complex polygons in the GIS file into simple polygons before applying the data 2 3 1 5 2 Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs
74. data attribute objects in EnSim include parcel sets line sets r2c objects and networks By selected in the Undo Edit option the previous edit will be reversed Undo Edit can be used on the selected object until the first edit 1s reversed 1 6 2 2 Editing Points Select the point or node to be edited and select Edit Selected Point from the shortcut menu This edit option will only appear when a polyline has been selected The dialog box that appears is similar to the dialog box that appears when a triangular mesh or an xyz data item has been selected The difference with this box is that the attribute cannot be changed An example is shown below Please specify new values for the point at Cancel ka 31 297 Y 65 535 Lance Value E Figure 1 52 This dialog box is used to edit points The X and Y coordinates at the selected point on the 2D or 3D Line can be changed Once the coordinates have been changed press DE 1 6 2 3 Editing Time Series To launch the time series editor dialog either select a point in the time series or the time series object itself and select Edit from the shortcut menu If an actual point is selected that point 73 EnSim Core September 2007 will be highlighted in the Data Points list box An example of the time series editor dialog with the selected point highlighted is shown below Edit TimeS5eries x Source Times eres Mame frain StartT ime 199612431 16 00 End ime 20
75. data for intervals smaller than a day use midnight 00 00 as the start time End This is the end date and time of the simulation Like the Start Date this value may be limited by available data Enter the end date and time of the simulation as YYYY MM DD HH MM The default value is 2000 01 01 00 00 Notice that this is the same as the default Start Date Time Step hrs This contains the number of hours in each step of the model simulation The default value is 24 hours or 1 day per step e Outlet Elevation This is the elevation of the outlet from the watershed in metres This value is determined from the basin of the watershed and cannot be edited e Routing These variables apply to the entire watershed regardless of the number of land classes or climate zones 224 Configuration This parameter selects the model to be used to calculate The value for this variable can be either Parallel or Serial If the value is set to Parallel the Runoff FRAC variable will be available If it is set to Serial the Runoff Perc variable will be available The default value is Serial Runoff Perc This is the rate of percolation from the fast reservoir to the slow reservoir per day This simulates the effects of groundwater recharge on the slow reservoir This variable is only available if the Routing Model is set to Serial The default value is 5 Runoff FRAC This is the fraction of runoff directed to the fast reservoir Watersheds that
76. def Basin 1 Channels Display Spatial Meta Data Number of Channels Main Channel Secondary Channel 1 True Secondary Channel 2 True Secondary Channel 3 Cancel Figure 2 12 This dialog tab lists each of the predefined channels Once a channel has been added to this tab it cannot be removed although it can be disabled by clicking on the True or False descriptor in the Enabled column and clicking Apply 126 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 You can deactivate the Channels def tab by selecting the Channels def object in the WorkSpace and hitting lt Delete gt or by selecting Remove from the object s shortcut menu To add a predefined channel to a Watershed 1 To add a predefined channel to a watershed object the channel must be loaded as a 2D or 3D Line Set object If your channel data isn t in a form that EnSim can access you can enter the data manually by creating an Open Line object See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 68 for more information on this process 2 Once you have a 2D or 3D Line Set object with your data open in the WorkSpace there are two ways to create the Channels def child object of the Watershed e Click the Enable Predefined Channels box on the Watershed Properties dialog See Figure 2 11 on p 126 for details e Drag the 2D or 3D Line Set object to the Watershed object 3 To add additional channels drag the Line Set object describing the channel
77. default all areas of a newly created HBV EC Parameter Set watershed are assigned to the Open region 5 2 2 4 The Slope Tab The Slope tab lets you control the number of slope bands that will be used in the model as well as the criteria for each band Like the Elevation tab you can change the Min values by clicking on and editing the values the Max Area and Median values will change accordingly You can also change the colour values by clicking within the Colour column Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Bands Display Spatial Meta Data Number of Bands 6 2 7 Show Legend 36 1825 5 27 32 321475 295 Al 27 37 955 235 11 20 26495 15 5 34 6075 55 Figure 5 10 This watershed has been divided into six slope bands of roughly equal area 219 The HBV EC Model September 2007 The numbers given for the Min Max and Median values refer to the percentage of slope ranging from 0 flat to 100 vertical Each slope category is referred to within HBV EC by its median value a 2D View 2 0 00 to 11 00 Figure 5 11 This triangular mesh corresponds to the Slope tab shown above 5 2 2 5 The Aspect Tab The Aspect tab shows the aspect or the direction that the slope faces of the terrain within the watershed This value combined with the elevation and slope values gives the position and orientation of each area of land within the watershed Climate Elevation Land Use Slope
78. each point on the grid There will be a new data record for each time step The format given below is repeated for each time step The first numbers in the data record comprise a record header that specifies the time step data and time of the record See Figure A 1 on p 240 for more information on the record header For Scalar data each record header is followed by a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each node of the grid for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n is the total number of nodes in the grid Each value is a 4 byte floating point number The values for each node are listed in order beginning at zero index Vl of Al V2o0f Al Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap IRH2 vi of Al V2 of Al ma Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 of A2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap 244 Appendix A September 2007 Gaan of Al V20fA1 Vnof Al V1 of A2 V20ofA2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e WV Node value VI is the value of the first node and Vn is the value of the last node The order of these values corresponds to the order of the points of the grid See Data Organization r2s r2v on p 243 for more information on the ordering of points within a grid e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the last Note
79. file locations 171 loading a station 172 ONCE W arao ease aeen cence 171 stations ACCESSING saire n 172 details lt i ccnncasdsanecssbenpecaasecnorsite 174 PAYS AA APAN 175 MEUA naa 175 POPE aaa dan 174 PINGGA NANANA 176 SUNOS PPO 177 Hydrologic EnSim Uu l Hypsographic Curve 139 Hypsometric Curve See Hypsographic Curve I ICON ae e ANA 3 4 container a 4 OCOLIT aan kon Gan stews 4 302 September 2007 line set DID aaa AA 4 6 i 4 IYA APA 4 AGA ceascassecscavecscossassaccaqmnceeaqe 4 rectangular grid Seb AA 4 AA AA 4 LANIE seater E A E 4 time series BSC AVN a ANA 4 LU APA 4 triangular mesh sedih NBP 4 VO CIOL ara E 4 a AA 4 Images copying to clipboard 66 digitizing from an imported 112 paa er re ee 66 PO COLGIIIG AA 64 saving and copying 64 MENG UNCC ama 7 Isoline Outlined Filled Contours displaying 109 K Kamphuis a ANA nee 189 L Label paaa S9 Legends Colour Scale S4 56 Line Data extracting cross sections from 108 Ei SC AA 250 AD maa 10 TOON ma AA AA 4 ID x niesace E 10 eo AA 4 file format ASO mania aaah saaan 251 Index PINAY AA 251 file header ccccccesceecesceecees 250 Live Cursor u 1 a 82 Live Stream Lines Cursor 83 M MapInfo Interchange Format 270 SAVIN a E E 16 Mapping Objects
80. from the menu bar The following dialog will appear 185 HYDAT Database September 2007 Import NARR data variable g of o 1979 01 01 00 00 00 a 1979 01 01 00 00 00 a Figure 3 21 The Import NARR data variable dialog 2 Select the directory Path for the source NARR data by clicking on the Ka button to browse for the directory or by typing the path directly into the window Note Set the directory representing the variable e g TMP 2m not the subdirectory for a month e g 197901 186 Section 3 3 NARR DATABASE September 2007 Select directory containing a MARR wariable Figure 3 22 Set the directory containing the NARR variable 3 The source data parameters are displayed in the upper part of the NARR import dialog These include the time span of the data 1 e 1979 to 2006 inclusive the DeltaT or timestep i e 3 hours and the indices of the source data grid 1 e 349 by 277 Source Path D Data NARAMTMP_2m JD StartD ate 1979 01 01 00 00 00 EndDate 2006 12 31 21 00 00 DeltaT 020000 Indices HEAR 349 ere 81 11 Figure 3 23 The source parameters of the NARR data 4 The NARR data can be subset both spatially and temporally for output The source grid ranges from indices 1 1 at the bottom left corner to 349 277 at the top right corner The user can subset the grid spatially or choose the full extents by editing the X1 Y1 and X2 Y2 indices To subset data temporally for
81. of results during the simulation The format is hours minutes seconds e Allow the model to vary the timestep If this box is checked the simulation will vary the time step as needed to complete the simulation in a reasonable amount of time If results are varying widely between time steps the interval will be decreased if they are not varying at all it will be increased e Run Type This selection determines the type of simulation to be performed which in turn determines which coefficients will be involved There are five Run Types 194 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 Hun to Steady State Calibrate Friction To Water Level Calibrate Friction To Discharge Generate Hating Curve Figure 4 5 The Run Type menu indicates what type of simulation is being prepared e Run A standard simulation run which involves one or two coefficients e Courant The Courant number is the ratio of the physical speed of the model to the calculation speed Fora GENID model this value must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1 This parameter is only visible when the Allow the model to vary the timestep option has been activated e Viscosity The viscosity coefficient from the motion equation Water is assumed to have a viscosity value of 1 See Basic Equations under General Background on p 189 for more information e Run to Steady State This type of simulation generates a model of the channel under steady state con
82. p28 ASC Ensim format S Pf ay ASCE nSim format Are View Shape shy panga __ Time Series Type 1 ts ASCII EnSim format Time Series Type 3 ts3 ASCII EnSim format Time Series Type 2 42s ASCII Mag and Dit format a ASC Mag and Dir EnSim forma Time Series Type 4 t4s ASCII Mag and Dir format 8t 2D LineSets 12s ASCII EnSim format 13 EnSim Core September 2007 o 1is ASCl EnSimfomag o ayerASCTaSi toma Arvie Sap Capo Maplofo Interchange Format mi 3D LineSets i3s ASCII EnSim format PASC Sima pf ye ASC nim format ay ASCH distance value Site po AreView Shape Gop Mtn Hnterchange Format mi mt Tables 80 Tae Dota EnSim format ee Coen eto tx Da Avon Shapes Ne pf t Binary Single Brame Ensim format Pt 8 Binsry Mult Frame Sim bm _ 8 ASCTT Single Frame Sim format p88 Binary ME rane asteg age ASCE Gabi format po Surfer Grid ase Arenfo AST rid DEM DTED amp CDED 2s ASCII Single Frame EnSim format ft Hy 2s Binary Single Frame EnSim format a 2s Binary Multi Frame EnSim format Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 Pf F188 ASC Single Frame EnSim format ol avBinag ubt ye ASC Sim format ol a SuemGmd sso ArerntoASCD God pT e Binay Single Frame EnSim forma a E ui Fare Basin toma pT s ASCI Single Frame EnSim format oo e Binary Multi Frame Sit Pf ye ASC nim format ol
83. respond quickly to precipitation will tend to have higher values while watersheds that show a delayed response will have lower values This variable is only available if the Routing Model is set to Parallel The default value is 0 7 Runoff KF This is the fast reservoir coefficient which determines what proportion of the fast reservoir is released per day Ata value of 0 the fast reservoir won t release any water while at a value of 1 it will empty itself each day The default value is 0 2 Runoff Alpha This is the fast reservoir exponent In conjunction with Runoff KF it determines the release rate of the fast reservoir The default value is 0 1 Runoff KS This is the slow reservoir coefficient Like Runoff KF it determines the amount of the slow reservoir released each day but for the slow reservoir The default value is 0 05 Initial Fast Reservoir Discharge This is the rate of discharge from the fast reservoir at the beginning of the simulation in thousands of litres per second The default value is 0 Initial Slow Reservoir Discharge This is the rate of discharge from the slow reservoir at the beginning of the simulation in thousands of litres per second The default value is 0 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 5 2 4 The Climate Zone Panel The variables shown on this panel are specific to a particular climate zone In most cases an HBV EC simulation will contain only a single climate zone and so t
84. select the cross section to which you would like to apply the scaling factor 2 From the cross section s shortcut menu select Scale Que x Scaling the Selected Cross Section Please specify the scale value Cancel Figure 4 14 This dialog allows you to enter the scaling factor 3 Enter the multiplier you would like to apply to the cross section and click OK 4 2 1 5 3 Copying a Cross section to a Segment If multiple segments have similar cross section data it is possible to copy the cross sections directly from one segment to another To copy a cross section to a segment 1 Select the segment to which you would like to copy the cross section Copy Cross Section x Figure 4 15 This dialog is used to copy cross section data directly from one segment of a channel to another 203 The GENID Model September 2007 2 From the shortcut menu select CrossSection gt Copy CrossSection to Segment 3 Select a scale if the segments are of different sizes and click Copy gt gt 4 2 1 5 4 Orthogonally Positioning a Cross Section If a created copied or otherwise associated cross section is not properly positioned with regards to its segment it can be automatically moved horizontally on the x y plane so that the cross section meets the midpoint of the segment at a right angle Note The x y position of the lowest point of the cross section 1s set to the midpoint of the segment To orthogonall
85. selected the popup windows of previous data probes remain open when others nodes are probed e Extended Popup Info This option will display extended information if any is available in popup windows For example if an object with multiple data attributes is probed all of the attributes will be displayed e Show Probes This option highlights using a green square outlined in magenta locations from which time series have been extracted Highlights will remain visible until the time series object is removed from the WorkSpace a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 58 These nodes have had time series extracted from their data Multiple probes can be viewed at the same time To retain history of previous probes choose View Selection info A window will appear in the view as shown below If the Extended Info option is selected the extended information will appear for each selected item 8 1 EnSim Core September 2007 VELOCITY Uy Mode 491667 0194 P4691 71 000 000786947 000436745 bd ag O O0052 2577 MS Dir 146 695 Deg VELOCITY Uy Node BAY 491442 688 P4691 435 000 0 000664364 0 000740701 O 00099455 M 5 138 087 Deg Figure 1 59 The Selection Info window shows data from several probes Any number of data points can have the attributes and their value viewed in this window If the Extended Popup Info option is selected in the Display tab the extended information will appear for each selected item Clicking on the _
86. shown above are as follows e FileType Required Shows the file type in the form of the file extension such as r2s 13s t3s and so on whether the file is ASCII or binary and the version number of the EnSim file type This tells EnSim the format of the data in the file based on its type Note A binary file still has an ASCII header so that it can be read in a text editor e Application Optional States the EnSim Application such as EnSim Hydrologic EnSim Telemac or WaveSim with which the file was created e Version Optional This gives the version of the EnSim Application with which the file was created e WrittenBy Optional This is the username assigned to the computer workstation or account with which the file was created e CreationDate Optional This is the date and time at which the file was last altered Other keywords that are not specific to a particular file type and are included below the dashed line of the header include 236 Appendix A September 2007 Name Optional The default is the root of the filename It is the name of the object that is displayed in the WorkSpace The entry may be changed directly in the file header or by editing the Name field of the MetaData tab of the object s Properties dialog Note If you save an object using the Save As command the Name keyword will be stripped from the file When the file is loaded the Name field on the MetaData tab will be set t
87. the name of any existing network file Default none Description the name of the n3s file that contains the channel network Boundaries e DOWN BOUNDARY NODE ID Required Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the downstream boundary e DOWN BOUNDARY TYPE Required Type text Valid Values LEVEL CONSTANT LEVEL SERIES DISCHARGE CONSTANT DISCHARGE SERIES FREE FLOW Default LEVEL CONSTANT 289 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Description records the type of the downstream boundary node e DOWN BOUNDARY VALUE Required for LEVEL CONSTANT Or DISCHARGE CONSTANT downstream boundary types Type floating point Valid Values any positive number Default none Description records the value of the downstream boundary level or discharge e DOWN BOUNDARY FILE Required for LEVEL SERIES Or DISCHARGE SERIES downstream boundary types Type text Valid Values the name of any existing Type 1 time series file Default none Description records the name of the file containing varying water levels for some boundary types e UP BOUNDARY NODE ID Required Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the upstream boundary e UP BOUNDARY TYPE Required Type text Valid Values LEVEL CONSTANT LEVEL SERIES DI
88. time series have no dates in common the RCA cannot be performed for those time series It s a good idea to reset the subsets on both series before performing an RCA and then restrict the data of the RCA afterwards This process is explained in the section Working With Rating Curves on p 149 To perform an RCA ona HYDAT station 1 Right click on a HYDAT station in the WorkSpace 2 Select Rating Curve Analysis from the shortcut menu The RCA will appear in its own view window A normal rating curve analysis cannot be performed on a HYDAT station which is missing either the level or flow time series Ifthe HY DAT station does not have any level and discharge time series with overlapping dates an RCA can be performed on any two concurrent time series even if they re from different stations To create an RCA from any two time series 1 Ensure that there is at least one Type 1 scalar implicit see Native Data Items on p 10 time series in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Rating Curve Analysis from the menu bar The Rating Curve Analysis dialog will appear 146 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 Rating Curve Analysis To perform a rating curve analysis Select a TimeSenes for both water discharge and level Diechange mars FlowOe2kKFO0S Level m Cancel Figure 2 35 Use this dialog to select two time series for an RCA 3 Select the discharge object from the available time series in the fi
89. to the other See Display Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 17 for more information e Animate checkbox settings see Animation on p 60 e Show and Options settings from the Legend section of the Colour Scale tab see Colour Scale on p 19 31 EnSim Core September 2007 1 5 VIEWS Views are windows within EnSim where data items can be displayed There are six types of views 1 dimensional 1D Polar 2 dimensional 2D 3 dimensional 3D Spherical and the Report view each with unique display properties Within views animation of time varying data is controlled data can be recorded in movie avi format and various characteristics of the display can be altered including the background colour 2D grid display and extended popup information View windows are treated as objects in the WorkSpace View objects have properties much like data items that affect the environment in which data items are displayed Relationships between data items and view windows are generally handled in the workspace For example changing the display parameters of an object in a view re layering multiple objects in a 2D view and adding and removing objects to and from views are all performed from the WorkSpace 1 5 1 Creating a View Window New view windows are added to the WorkSpace using one of the view window buttons or by using one of the New View menu commands in the Window menu 1D polar 2D 3D spherical or re
90. tools available in the EnSim Hydrologic environment These hydrologic tools are used in conjunction with the EnSim Core tools to provide a greater understanding of the physical characteristics of the watershed The Watershed Tools are e Extracting Drainage Area e Extracting Drain Direction e Extracting Depression Fill e Extracting Average Upslope Elevation e Extracting Average Upslope Slope e Extracting Wetness Index e Extracting Stream Power e Extracting Relief Potential e Extracting Upstream Network e Extracting Downstream Reach e Extracting Basin Network e Extracting a Hypsographic Curve e Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances e Drainage Area Ratio Analysis and e Slope Analysis 2 2 1 1 Extracting Drainage Directions The flow direction at each node or point of the DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Drainage Direction from the menu bar The drainage directions can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view 131 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 a 2D Yiew 1 Ca TE KAEN TA Fes SS Se Figure 2 17 Each node in this object shows the direction in which it drains The drainage direction values at each node correspond to the flow directions identified in the direction schematic shown below North is assigned a value of 6 Figure 2 18 Each value corresponds to a direction as shown above 2 2 1 2 Extracting Drainage Area
91. upstream boundary is constant enter the water level in metres in the text box e Water Level Series If the upstream boundary varies over time click w to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes in its water level e Discharge Constant If the upstream boundary has a constant discharge enter the value in m s in the text box e Discharge Series If the upstream boundary has a discharge that varies over time click A to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes 201 The GENID Model September 2007 e Reflective This boundary type indicates that there is no discharge entering the channel from this node It effectively acts as a barrier to flow Node ID The upstream boundary is automatically defined as the highest node of the network opposite the downstream boundary Series Click Ka to select and load a scalar time series that describes the changes in the boundary conditions over time if you ve selected a Water Level Series or Discharge Series boundary type For more information on the property tabs for the time series see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 4 2 1 5 Cross Sections After the simulation parameters have been established but before the simulation can be run cross sectional data must be entered for each segment of the channel network There are several ways to accomplish this 4 2 1 5 1 Associating a Cross Section with a
92. will open Calculator xX Yarnables Stat End A VELOCITY UV Mas zl 1 133 c foo bl Result Name Time Units 3 cancel Figure 1 81 The calculator for gridded objects is considerably more complex e Variable Use this box to assign variable names A B C or D to data items currently in the WorkSpace These variable names are then used to form the equation in the Expression box In the list box next to the variable name a list of the available objects which match the geometry of the selected WorkSpace will appear For scalar data items you can choose the range of frames to which the operation will apply The range first frame to last frame is set in the Start and End boxes It is important to note that for a range setting larger than one frame the maximum range of frames selected is used as the template for all other ranges If a range is later selected that is less than the maximum range an error message will appear A range of one frame can be used Ifa scalar data item is selected a list box will appear The options available in the list box for a scalar object are Value X and Y For vector data items you can choose the range of frames in which the operation will apply The range first frame to last frame is set in the Start and End boxes If a vector data item is selected a list box will appear The options available in the list box for a vector item are Mag U V X and Y If Mag is chose
93. window This is especially useful when comparing two or more timeseries e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 80 35 EnSim Core September 2007 1 Show Grid When the check box is turned off the grid lines are removed The axes coordinates remain visible Show Labels This check box toggles the axes coordinate labels Grid amp Label Colour This is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the grid and the axis interval labels When the box is selected a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of the view window size Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here 1s 8 As the number of divisions is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter is used as a guideline for the number of divisions Lock View When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock sj in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g X and Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes Margins
94. x direction which is recorded as the value of the xCount keyword of the grid The number of rows corresponds to the number of cells in the y direction recorded as the value of the yCount keyword The first value of the data file corresponds to the bottom left cell of the grid Cell numbering begins at zero The next data value in the file found to the right of the first value in the same row is the value of the next cell in the r2c grid Each value in the grid is saved as a floating point number with up to 6 decimal places EnSim can also read files that are not properly formatted to some extent The values may be in free format with any number of spaces tabs or line returns between the values The values are read from left to right top to bottom and assigned to cells according to that order 278 Appendix B September 2007 Multiframe ASCII The ASCII r2c file is capable of storing time varying data The ASCII data for each frame is organized exactly the same as for a single frame ASCII file except the data 1s blocked within Frame and EndFrame keywords EndHeader Frame 1 ul 1993701701 1200200 000 00 0 0 0 0 Oe Dil 0 0 040 00 OO 0 0 040 DO 0 0 xl 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 0 0 0 O O 0 0 Wet 0 0 0 0 0 0 O30 Qe 0 5 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
95. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EndFrame Frame 2 2 1993701701 27 00 00 0007 O20 040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 O50 Dx 040 040 Oz 040 0 0 040 00 05O 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 3 0 3 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 5 0 4 0 5 0 3 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EndFrame e Frame The data for each timestep or frame is lead off by the Frame keyword The values following the keyword are the integer frame number the integer step number and the time associated by this frame If there is a space within the time string then the string must be enclosed by double quotation marks The following are both valid time strings 1993 01 01 1 00 00 000 and 12 00 00 e EndFrame The data for each timestep or frame ends with this keyword Note On loading the ASCII multiframe r2c file EnSim will save the ASCII file to a binary file This is required to enable EnSim to visualize multiframes A message will be displayed to the user Binary Both time varying and non time varying data can be saved in binary format The format used is very similar to that found in time varying rectangular grid files The primary difference 1s that the values are listed for each cell instead of each vertex One record is saved for
96. 12 05 01 10 00 TimeS par 5599 Days 18 00 00 DeltaT 6 00 00 als units SEC Arig units mm Point Count 22400 Min Value 0 45 2002 02 21 10 00 00 rola 2002 02 27 16 00 00 3d 26514 200204721 22 00 00 4 6 ols 200204722 04 00 00 Fore 2002702722 10 00 00 6 2 fol 2002 02 22 16 00 00 0 2 Foleo 2002 02 22 22 00 00 0 fold 2002 02 23 04 00 00 45 foe 2002 02 23 10 00 00 3 4 262 2002 02 23 16 00 00 0 2622 2002 02 23 22 00 00 0 2623 2002 02 44 04 00 00 0 ro24 2002404724 10 00 00 0 2625 2002 02 44 16 00 00 Dr Add Delete Cancel Figure 1 53 This dialog box is used to edit time series The time series editor dialog is divided into three parts the Source TimeSeries data section at the top the two edit pages Data Points and NoData in the middle and the option for creating a new timeseries or overwriting the source time series at the bottom The Source TimeSeries section contains data associated with the time series object Some fields such as X axis units and Y axis units are editable Greyed text is read only 74 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 The Data Points page lists the item number the time and the value for every point in the time series object Both the time and the value are editable fields Data points may be added by using the Add button Selected data points may be removed by using the Delete button Note although added points appear at the bottom of the point list the po
97. 189 creating hot start 209 Index September 2007 CTOSS SECTIONS sanan 202 running simulation 208 adjusting vertically 206 GeoTIFF nan 271 ASSOCIALING nsss 202 classification 114 COPYING s sssesseessessneesneeneesneenes 203 draping onto a DEM Uu 106 SEMCTAUING aasa 206 georeferencing ecer 113 interpolating 205 GOUT Aa na 4 POSITIONING ua anan anansnaassnassnn 204 SAVIN OS cast masara aaa 16 PTOPCTUES 0 sssessesessessseeeseens ni theme files 271 KENO NG aaa ka fi Ka 204 Getting Help aNG 2 SCAMS E 203 Getting Started 0 0 cece displaying output 208 Gridded Data equations ee ee eee 189 extracting cross sections 107 files Hle Torma eee 285 file headers 285 293 297 H BAG AG 193 geometric requirements 190 IBY BO AA PHAT 117 211 e ec he 191 algorithms 211 VOT a cris oecaee ccccoce cx cane 191 BACK OTOUTIG aai binasa 211 a ee 191 Climate ZONES c ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 cross section 191 HISTO EEEO 211 AA 191 AA AN 212 NOdES re 191 basin panel n 216 width nma 191 ASPECL aE 220 parameters 193 climate ossu 216 boundaries u s 289 elevation usses 217 constants u s 287 identifying zones 221 file anakan ha DANOEA 285 LAS 218 general 286 UU jas 219 110 0 wagi mn 289 climate zone panel 225 GUP eriin deserves 291 climate zone paramet
98. 1DRun object is created or it can be opened by double clicking on the object in the WorkSpace The Properties dialog has four tabs e Simulation e Channel e Down Boundary e Up Boundary 4 2 1 1 Simulation The Simulation tab is used to manage parameters regarding the overall simulation 193 The GENID Model Properties of NewGENiDRun x simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Parameters Hun Name NewGEN1DRun 91d Hun Tupe Temporal Start Time 0 00 00 Duration 1 00 00 Time Step 0 00 30 000 Allow the model to Output Name n38 Attributes to Save to Output Network File j2 Surface Elevation m F Conveying Width rm iY Velocity m s Cross Sectional Area m7 i Discharge m 2 3 Apply Cancel Figure 4 4 The Simulation tab controls the overall simulation run There are two main sections to the Simulation tab September 2007 The upper section Parameters controls some of the general simulation information e Run Name This is the file name of the GENID parameter file g1d This name is also used as the root for naming generated output files Temporal This area controls the time step and duration of the simulation e Start Time The time in the simulation at which calculations begin The format is hours minutes seconds e Duration The length of time to be simulated The format is hours minutes seconds e Time Step The interval between calculation
99. 24 To File button opens a dialog box asking for the name of a file to which the data in the Selection Info window should be saved The data will be saved as a simple text file 1 6 4 2 The Live Cursor The live cursor is a tool that displays attribute values on rectangular grids 12s r2v or r2c and triangular meshes t3s or t3v This value is interpolated at the position of the mouse cursor and 1s automatically updated as the cursor is moved over the select data object in a 2D view To use the live cursor first ensure that the desired data object is selected then click on the E button in the tool bar Once the cursor is placed in the view a box will appear next to the pointer as shown in the image below As the cursor is moved the interpolated attribute value is updated and displayed next to the cursor To turn off the live cursor press the F button again or the lt Esc gt key 82 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 2p view 2 ox Figure 1 60 The Live Cursor shows interpolated data values 1 6 4 2 1 The Live Stream Lines Cursor The live stream lines cursor is a tool that calculates and displays the path of a particle in a flow field Stream lines are automatically enabled for rectangular vector grids r2v and triangular vector meshes t3v The path is calculated at the position of the mouse cursor and is automatically updated as the cursor is moved over the select data object in a 2D view The op
100. 3 46 2575 Area Figure 5 18 The Elevation Band information contains only one editable variable Number of Land Classes This variable shows the number of Land Classes contained within the Elevation Band A Land Class consists of a particular combination of Land Use Region Slope Band and Aspect Band Remember Lakes are always considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 so all lakes within a particular Elevation Band are considered to comprise a single area This value is obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited Band Elevation By default this variable gives the median elevation for the Elevation Band All areas within the band are considered to have this elevation If this value isn t appropriate for example if the majority of terrain is near the top of the band and hence above the median enter the corrected value here Area This variable shows the total area of the terrain contained within the Elevation Band in square kilometres This value is obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Land Class Parameters 228 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 A Land Class consists of a specific combination of Land Use Region Slope Band and Aspect Band All of the Land Classes within the particular Elevation Band chosen in the previous area will be shown in the list displayed at the top of Figure 5 19 Note Because all Lake terrain is considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 with no snow
101. 3 4 Spatial The Spatial tab shows the x and y extents of the object The units of the extents distances and locations depend on those used in source file i e if all data in the source file are in units of feet then the values shown in the Spatial Tab will have units of feet This tab is not available for 1D data or objects that contain other objects An example of the Spatial tab is shown below There are two main sections on the Spatial tab The Attributes section describes the origin node count delta extent and angle of the data item The Coordinate System section describes the projection and datum of the coordinate system Both of these sections are discussed further in the following sections This page varies for different object types Following these sections 1s a list of criteria for coordinate system selection 24 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 Properties of Example Object x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Attributes k Y Origin of o Max 4900151 016274 Min a0s00268 37821717 Extent 29998 6832 40000326 Coordinate System Projection Assign UTM bd UTM Zone 18 Ellipsoid WGSB4 Figure 1 11 The Spatial tab of the Properties dialog has two sections 1 4 3 4 1 Attributes The attributes shown in this section will vary from one object type to another The possible attributes shown here are e Origin This is the starting location of the object
102. 4 5 6 8 8 8 11 10 oTa LZ 10 11 15 TL 12 13 CE 3 eS 12 14 16 TZ re 17 IZ 7 15 ba 19 13 For more information on header keywords see File Headers on p 236 e NodeCount Required The total number of nodes in the mesh e ElementCount Required The total number of triangular elements in the mesh ElementType Optional Currently the default T3 is the only supported value Shows the type of finite element used in the mesh EnSim only creates triangular finite element meshes with three nodes per element called T3 meshes File Formats t3s t3v The data contained in a triangular mesh file is divided into two parts the first lists the coordinates and the values of the data attributes of each mesh point and the second part lists the node indices of the elements or the connectivity of the mesh ASCII Only files that contain non time varying data can be stored in ASCII format The coordinates and values of the mesh points are listed in order by node number The first set of coordinates on the first line of data applies to node 1 The second set on line 2 applies to node 2 and so on There is a coordinate and value set for each node of the mesh In the above example there are 17 entries since the NodeCount keyword has a value of 17 The first number on a line is the x coordinate the second number is the y coordinate and the third and following numbers are the values ofthe data attributes In the examp
103. 4 Create a new point set See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 67 for more details For each point set drawn define its value as something representative of the object For example you might define houses as 1 and businesses as 2 1 7 10 Georeferencing a non georeferenced GeoTIFF Non georeferenced tiffs may be loaded and manually georeferenced To georeference a non georeferenced tiff 1 Import a GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 2 Open the Properties dialog and select the Spatial tab 3 The pixel size the coordinates of the origin or SouthWest corner of the image can be set and applied Properties of Example Image ki Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Coordinate System Projection Assign Cartesian af Registration f Ongin Delta 4 Comers Pixel Size Ellipsoid Unknown Cancel Figure 1 90 Registering a GeoTIFF image at the origin Alternatively the image may be stretched into place by setting the coordinates of the four corners To do this click on the 4 corners button and set pixel size and the corner coordinates 113 EnSim Core September 2007 Properties of Example Image i Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Coordinate System Projection Assign Cartesian af Registration C Ongin Delta f 4 Comers Northwest MorthE ast fo 8 74 y ma 72 Southwest SouthE ast sl ox 7a Yoyo
104. 4 125 383311 175 D DD O O O O O O O O O O Type 5 ts5 Type 5 time series files contain multiple scalar data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has an explicit time time value plus n values where n equals the point count of the extraction line Like the ts3 time series there are four formats that may be used to specify the date and time although only one format may be used in a particular file Hours minutes and seconds are always specified regardless of the format although the values may be zero The date and decimal seconds are optional If the date is omitted hours increment beyond 24 An example of each time format is shown below e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 003 e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 e 0062 42 27 003 e 0062 42 27 An excerpt of data from a ts5 file 1s shown below EndHeader 19977047 03 23 59 54 922 2722 192985 222 193712 222 193705 272 193791 722 194516 19914047404 00 59 54 922 222 191448 222 192171 22241927163 222 192237 222 192944 1997 04 04 01 59 54 922 222 190000 222 190734 222 190725 222 190809 222 191537 1997 04 04 02 59 54 922 222 189433 222 190151 222 190143 222 190219 222 190930 1997 04 04 03 59 54 922 222 188974 222 189712 222 189707 222 189793 222 190526 1997 04 04 04 59 54 922 222 188998 222 189740 222 189734 222 189813 222 190541 Binary There are no binary time series file formats 262 Appendix A September 2007 Tables tb0 Table objects contain data values organized in a tabu
105. 5 11720 AM ERTEN IEE PE EE PN CE NT EE E EE NP EE EEE E EE EE E NE AttributeName 1 State AttributeUnits 1 NONE AttributeName 2 Thickness AttributeUnits 2 metres AttributeName 3 Volume AttributeUnits 3 litres AttributeName 4 Radius AttributeUnits 4 metres AttributeName 5 Volume Fraction AttributeUnits 5 Percent AttributeName 6 Exposure Time AttributeUnits 6 sec EndHeader 1688711 355469 22274 814453 1 9 437626e 006 28 0892 30 7797 0 280892 61321 19500 916016 23334 943359 1 4 051L6le 006 27 1164 46 1559 0 271164 61321 19521322266 2355805249297 1 4 5 74956 0006 25 1464 4126263 0 251464 61321 18509 814453 22344 748047 1 1 19806e 005 29 8996 28 1831 0 298996 61321 18685777344 21950718750 1 S 679 136 006 24 5049 36 9069 0 245049 61371 182515394531 Z331 871094 L Za DO9S006 23 6394 5245398 0 236394 1321 18806742188 22367779297 1 1 486378 005 32 0508 26 1988 0 320508 61371 180636 828125 22063 134706 1 2 519456e 006 24 6362 55 7903 0 246362 61321 1849 1 363201 221322728516 1 2x1709608000 25 6871 54 9518 0 256071 0L3271 254 Appendix A September 2007 File Formats pcl ASCII Parcel files that contain data that does not vary over time are stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n 2 columns where n is the total number of data attributes possessed by each point The two extra columns are used to store the x and y coordinates of the points The information for each point begins on a new li
106. 6 2 The 2D Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window For an active 2D window the view s current coordinate system and the location of the cursor is displayed Ready LLGRS80 0 360 1 123 119 49 376 la A 1 5 6 3 Manipulating the 2D View Panning the 2D View or Zooming In and Out The view can be panned by dragging the cursor with the left mouse button held down Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up if that option is available Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view is being manipulated a hand cursor W will appear The view can also be manipulated by adjusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view Reordering Objects in the 2D View Data items are drawn in the view in the reverse order in which they are added to the view window The last data item to be added to the view is the top layer of objects drawn in the view and the first in the list of objects contained in the view It will obscure all previously added objects 1f they overlap To move a data item already in the view to the top
107. 7 DataType Type 5 Time Series Application EnSimHydrologic Version HAPIS PALO WrittenBy Username CreationDate Mon Jul 16 2007 11 20 AM da a GG a ae es AttributeName 1 Attributelnits 1 AttributeName 2 Attributelnits 2 BeginLine 8 Point Point Point Point Point Point Point Point 43245934 4526L6 452 10b 1452849 452849 452849 452113 452115 EndLine it EndHeader 495433 191608 638834 i1343 689540 003346 ogie Sal 768993 5464098 5464098 22241219 5464098 5464098 5464098 30 L640 5464098 5464098 5464098 037764 166487 2397899 467922 720075 248804 e BeginLine This keyword is used in the ts5 time series file to lead off the block of points that represent the extraction line used to generate the file The keyword value represents the number of points in the extraction line e Point This keyword represents a point in the extraction line The values are the x and y coordinates of the point e EndLine This keyword is used in the ts5 time series file to end the block of points that represent the extraction line used to generate the file 259 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 File Formats ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 ASCII Time series files are always recorded in ASCII format In all four types the data for each time step is recorded on a new line Each file uses a slightly different format for the layout of data
108. 95 EnSim Core September 2007 e Constant Interval If checked the bin widths will remain constant using the Interval value If unchecked the minimum value for each bin becomes editable in the list within the dialog e Name Enter the name to be used by the extracted velocity rose object By clicking on the OK button the velocity rose object will be created and displayed in the WorkSpace as a child of the originating vector time series The velocity rose can be saved as an ASCII vr1 file See Velocity Roses vr1 on p 265 for more information on this file type 1 6 6 Create Vector Field Two scalar rectangular grids r2s or triangular meshes t3s can be combined to create a vector rectangular grid r2v or a vector triangular mesh t3v To create a vector grid or mesh 1 Select the grid or mesh object that represents the U component from the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools gt Create Vector Field The following dialog will appear Select Object containing component x U Component M All Frames Mesh LU Cancel Figure 1 74 The Create Vector Field dialog The Create Vector Field dialog parameters are described below e U Component The name of the grid or mesh that was selected as the U Component data object e V Component The names of all data objects found in the workspace that have the same type and spatial geometry as that of the U Component object All Frames If the V Componen
109. A a AP EG NP a GN ab PN AttributeUnits 1 M AttributeName 1 FREE SURFACE LocationX 444997 593750 LocationY 5022443 000000 StartTime 0 00700 000 DeltaT 0 15 00 000 EndHeader e LocationX This keyword is used in time series files that were created by EnSim as a result of a time series extraction from another data tile This value represents the x coordinate of the location of the data probe from which the series was extracted e LocationY This keyword is also used in time series files that were created by EnSim as a result of a time series extraction from another data tile This value represents the y coordinate of the location of the data probe from which the series was extracted 258 Appendix A September 2007 e StartTime This is the explicit time in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds when the time series begins If the type of time series uses explicit time as is the case for ts3 and ts4 files this is the time of the first data point If explicit time is not specified as with tsl and ts2 files the time 1s set to 0 00 00 000 e DeltaT This is the time step used in files that do not use explicit time as is the case with ts1 and ts2 files File Headers ts5 An example header from a type 5 time series file is shown below AA HH HH EH EE EH EH HE EEE HE EE Ha EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE FileType ts5 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council EC 1998 200
110. AR a a ES SEE PEG GA Ba MA PS AE O a Ga GG BN ki a Na BA a a a a AttributeName 1 State AttributeUnits 1 NONE AttributeName 2 Thickness AttributeUnits 2 metres AttributeName 3 Volume AttributeUnits 3 litres AttributeName 4 Radius AttributeUnits 4 metres AttributeName 5 Volume Fraction AttributeUnits 5 Percent EndHeader 18871 355469 22274 814453 1 9 43762e 006 28 0892 30 7797 0 280892 19500 916016 23334 643359 1 4 051616 006 27 1164 46 1559 0 271164 195213222060 2Z3536 592929 1 4 5174958 006 2521464 41 6283 0 251464 18809 814453 22344 748047 1 1 19806e 005 29 8996 28 1851 0 298996 18685 777344 21950 718750 1 5 6797 se 006 24 3049 36 9069 0 245049 182512394531 241551 9171094 1 23725892006 23460394 52 5598 0 236394 18806 142188 22367 779297 1 1 486376 005 32 0508 26 1988 0 320508 186364028125 2206052134766 1 2 519458 006 24 6362 55 7903 0 246362 1849 30320 221315220516 1 27096867006 25 6671 54 9319 Ua256e 71 256 Appendix A September 2007 File Formats pt2 ASCII Point set files never contain data that varies over time Consequently the data are always stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n 2 columns where n is the total number of data attributes possessed by each point The two extra columns are used to store the x and y coordinates of the points The information for each point begins on a new line The first value on a line is the x coordinate and the second is the y coordinate D
111. BA WrittenBy Username CreationDate Thu Jul 05 2007 03 42 PM a IN ef er N SourceFile winddata ts2 it Name Example Velocity Rose Title Example Velocity Rose Velocity Rose LocationX 0 000000 LOCATI1ONY 0 000000 i SECCTOTNIOCN 45 000000 SpeedBinCount 8 Probabilities by sector Table sum should be 1 Dir 0 0 Dir 45 0 Dir 90 0 Dir 135 0 Dir 180 0 DIE 2520 Dir 270 0 Dir 315 0 F 0 109489 0 113607 0 114917 0073367 0124743 0 195209 0 138873 0 129796 Table Sum 1 000000 EndHeader 0 000000 O 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 22500000 0027513 0 026483 0 026577 0 026670 0 030882 0 019745 0 028355 0 022366 5 000000 0 038181 0 030788 0 040988 0 034438 0 052218 0 050710 0 046849 0 036684 taD00000 07027793 04029384 0 027232 0 009639 0 027606 0 068220 0 027513 02033595 10 000000 0 012727 02019465 0 013382 0 002620 0 010200 0 056122 0 018248 0 022272 122500000 0 003182 0 006457 0 006270 0 000000 0 003182 0 011698 0 009826 0 011042 15000000 0 000094 0 001029 0 000468 0 000000 0 000655 0 001778 0 003837 0 002901 17 500000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000936 0 002246 0 000936 File Formats vr1 ASCII The data is organized into n rows of data where n is the number of speed bins and r 1 columns of data where r is the number of directions The extra column which is the lead column is used to store the velocity value for the bin 265 EnSi
112. C model has two unique filetypes hbv which contains all of the parameters required to run the simulation and met which contains meteorological data The HBV EC Parameter Set File File Header hbv The header of an HBV EC Parameter Set file consists of a listing of the objects contained within the HBV EC Parameter Set object as well as the values used to define them EHH Ht HH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HE EEE HE EH EE EE EEE HOE EE HE EEE EEO EE EEE EEE EEE FileType hbv ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType HBV EC Parameter Set it Application EnSimHydrologic Version Aga WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Dec 16 2005 03 23 PM AA PA AG Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Sphere it gt SourceWaterShedFile SampleWaterShed wsd it AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeName 2 Direction it FlLowAlLgori thm AT Search it HydroGrid XOrigin 481900 000000 YOL1Gin 5462000 000000 ZOOUINT SOU YCOUNL 640 xDelta 50 000000000000 yDelta 50 000000000000 Angle 0 000000 Name SampleDEM EndHydroGrid it HydroChannels DrainageAreaThreshold 2 000000 MinWaterShedArea 150 000000 MinAdjWaterShedArea 10 000000 OutletsViewable 0 Title Network Name Channels EndHydroChannels 293 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Basin 1 Name Basin 1 Outlet x 489700 000000 rOUtLet y O463100 000000 Title Basin Name Basin 1 EndBasin HBVEC 1
113. CDCD Load Selected from the menu bar Station details as well as associated time series are then shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station WorkSpace c Data Items Eg coco CN Ela CAMPBELLFORD ven o Maximum Temperature Hep Minimum Temperature ser a Rainfall pa Snowfall ia Da Precipitation wo fee SrawinGround Figure 3 14 Data from a specific station are shown as children of that station 179 HYDAT Database September 2007 To access a station by ID 1 Select File Environmental Data Open CDCD 5Search by ID from the menu bar Query oo i fp Search for which Station ID S ThelD is a combination of a 3 digit District ID and a 4 digit CSM Cancel 61 61137 Figure 3 15 This dialog allows you to search for a CDCD station by ID 2 Enter the CDCD ID number in the dialog and click Uf Station details and associated time series will be shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station as shown in Figure 3 14 3 2 4 Properties of a CDCD Station The CDCD station properties are e Details e Meta Data 3 2 4 1 Details The Details tab displayed most of the pertinent data linked with this station There are two sections to this tab Properties of CAMPBELLFORD Hi station MaxT emp MinT emp Fain SHOWN Precip 50G Details Meta Data a CAMPBELLFORD District 615 Lake Ontario Counties Province Ontario Airport LatLong 443 o
114. Creeflg i falze EnSimfl falze Temperature Offset 0 etflg i falze Figure 2 58 This dialog allows you to edit the Watflood Event file Refer to your WATFLOOD User s Manual for details on the Event file The parameters Event Name Data Hours of Rain Hours of Flow Data Rain Conv Factor Rain Scale Factor Snow Scale Factor and Temperature Offset may be changed to reflect the desired values To change the state of the Event flags click on either of the Flag or the State to toggle the flag To change the Initial Soil Moisture values in the parameter file click on the index number or the value to edit the value To save changes to the Event file 1 With the Event file selected in the WorkSpace select File gt Save Copy As 2 Enter a file name and click 8B3ave If you changed the Event Name parameter in the Properties dialog the new name will be listed here as the default file name 168 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 2 3 3 WATFLOOD Output Watflood Binary Output wfo files can be opened in EnSim Hydrologic A Binary Output file will appear in the WorkSpace with various components displayed as children WorkSpace Rs Data Items Bea Jockdatt wfo vee Bd Precipitation a Ad Lower Zone Storage arid Runoff KA E Grid Quflow jam eji Tee iiin ain n iie Ja Ba m Figure 2 59 A Watflood Binary Output file The Watflood Output file may have many more compone
115. EN1D Run dialog 2 Select a 3D line set or a network file that represents the channel that is to be modelled See Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data on p 107 or Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data on p 108 for more information on creating a 3D Line Set 3 If there are any attributes that are required by the model but aren t already contained by the incoming object they will be added at this point The following dialog will allow you to set the default values Attributes that are greyed out will be added but are fixed in value 197 The GENID Model September 2007 Add Required Attributes x The following attributes are required by the GEN1D Model but are missing from the Channel Network Selecting OK will add them to the GENTD Network Surface Elevation Enter Depth value 0 0 elocity 0 0 Strickler Friction 0 0 Cancel Figure 4 7 This dialog may appear if you create a channel object from a network or 3D line object 4 Next you will be prompted to rename and resave the network object to conform to the requirements of the GENID model Click OK 5 Enter an appropriate name for the channel network and click Save 4 2 1 2 2 Opening an Existing Channel Object If a channel object has already been created it can be used as the basis for the simulation To open an existing channel object 1 Click on l in the Channel tab of the GEN1D Run dialog 2 Select the previously create
116. ESULT FILE GEN1D2 SAVE WIDTH True SAVE AREA True it End of File Simulation Parameters General Parameters e NAME Required Type text up to 256 characters in length Valid values any valid filename without an extension Default none Description the name of the run GEN1D uses this parameter as the basis for generated output filenames Simulation Parameters e RUNTYPE Required Type text Valid values RUN RUN TO STEADY STATE RUN CAL FRICTION RUN GEN RATING CURVE Default RUN Description records the type of run that has been saved This parameter also affects which other parameters are included in the file e DELTA T Required 286 Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description defines the simulation time step This value is very dependent on the hydrodynamics used Appendix D September 2007 e VARY DELTA T Required Type Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records whether the simulation can vary the time step as needed e SIMULATION TIME Required Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description defines the length of a simulation e START TIME Optional Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss
117. Ensim Hydrologic Reference Manual August 2007 No rey La CH H C No F CAHADIAN HYDRAULICS CENTRE CENTRE DHYORAULIOUE CANADIEN O g i que a a fe Ves ny Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council Water Survey Canada Ottawa Ontari Canada Copyright 1998 2006 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council EnSim Hydrologic was developed with Microsoft Visual C Copyright 1994 1998 Microsoft Corporation All rights Reserved MFC Microsoft Corporation Copyright 1997 All Rights Reserved OpenGL Silicon Graphics Inc Copyright 1993 All Rights Reserved EnSim Hydrologic 1s protected by HASP Software Protection System Copyright Aladdin Knowledge Systems 1985 2002 All Rights Reserved WATFLOOD SPLY Copyright by N Kouwen 1986 2000 Supported Foreign Files TOPAZ Grazinglands Research Laboratory and Department of Geography University of Saskatchewan ArcInfo Grid Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc Copyright 1997 2002 ArcView Shape Files Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc Copyright 1997 2002 DTED or CDED DEM National Imagery and Mapping Angency NIMA MapInfo Interchange Format MapInfo Corporation Copyright 2002 Surfer Grid Golden Software Inc Copyright 1994 1997 GeoTIFF Library Copyright 1995 Niles D Ritter Copyright 1999 Frank Warmerdam TIFF Library Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Cop
118. HAHA EE HEH FileType rca ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType Rating Curve Analysis it Application EnsimHydrologi1c Version asd WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pra Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM it a AA AA AA a AA AE a AL Name RatingCurveAnalysis 03BC001 it DischargeSourceName Flow03BC001 LevelSourceName Leve103BC001 it The rating curve has been fitted in the form Power Function Q C H HO N C Constant numerically equal to discharge when H HO 1 0 N Slope of the rating curve HO Effective gauge height of zero flow also called Scale offset it PowerCoeffLogC 62 194 PowerCoeffN 20 4427 PowerCoeffH0 O it The explanation of the general keywords used in the header is in Appendix A in the section File Headers on p 236 Keywords specific to the RCA are discussed below e DischargeSourceNane This is the name of the discharge or flow object used for the RCA e LevelSourceName This is the name of the level or stage object used for the RCA Below the Source identifiers there is a description of the rating curve type used If the RCA was generated with the Power Curve function the following keywords are used e PowerCoeffLogC The Log C coefficient value e PowerCoeffN The slope of the rating curve coefficient 283 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 e PowerCoeffHO The effective gauge height at zero flo
119. Hydrologic fy RatingCurveAnalysis 02FE007 Feb P Ma IC Fie Stat saa End 133820401 f ay di F No TF Dec Figure 2 39 This RCA has had several low flow values inactivated producing a well fitting curve September 2007 15x Discharge 0 Flow02FE007 Level H Lewel02FE007 ii T p pa 5 i S pa ai mi a I Discharge vs Level Example 2 With complex examples 1t may be harder to find an appropriate rating curve aaraa FERREE E RatingCurveAnalysis 036000 s10 3 Discharge 0 Flow03BC001 Level H Level036C001 Figure 2 40 This RCA is far more complex than the previous example and has a correlation coefficient of 0 9529 152 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 fy RatingCurveAnalysis 036000 Nama Discharge O How036C001 Rainy urainak 0 CIHHOTN Foy ca ee 4 dadada FERAE Figure 2 41 Examining the curve by year makes it clear that more than one rating curve exists 10 xj W RatingCurveAnalysis 0300H Name Discharge O Flow03BC001 RabngCurveAnahan Rating Curve Poy degree Tli mad Level H Level038C00 Con Coail Discharge ws Lewel zia Pa i7 Mar E Sen W Ap FF Oct E Map FF Nov W Jun W De Stat 156010718 i End ISA F
120. LD OF VIEW Figure 1 25 The Field of View determines the scope of the image produced e Near and Far Near and far are clipping planes of the view Clipping planes are limits perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and the view centre By default the clipping planes are located on either side of the view s data In the view s coordinate system s units near and far are defined by the distance of the clipping plane from the camera If while zooming in parts of the image begin to disappear the near parameter should be reduced in order to view all parts of the image CAMERA FIELD OF VIEW Figure 1 26 The Near and Far parameters determine the depth of the image Moves cannot be undone if changed in the Properties dialog box The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view 44 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 1 5 7 3 Display Properties of the 3D View Window The display properties of the 3D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of SD Yiew 7 x Display Recording Spatial Temporal Meta Data Uptions Background Colour Show Compass Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info M Show Probes Use Display Lists MW Show Crosshairs T Lock View Camera View Center rc Pi 1 3656406 Rotate Translate Hear 0 1 3056 Field of View Far 13 8564 m Apply Cancel
121. Min Elevation bot Surface Elevation 2 31894 Conveying Parameters width m 4903 Mean Depth rm 2582 blaximum Depth mj 4904 Area m2 116 402 Hydraulic A adius m 2495 Wetted Perimeter m 4665 Figure 4 20 The Cross Section Properties window shows the numerical characteristics of the cross section Note You can recalculate the values shown by entering a new value for the Surface Elevation and clicking the Compute button 3 Click the x button to close the window 207 The GENID Model September 2007 4 2 2 Running the GEN1D Model To run a GENID simulation 1 Make sure that all mandatory fields on the Simulation Channel Down Boundary and Up Boundary tabs are complete 2 Select the GENID Parameter file object in the WorkSpace 3 Select Run gt Check Parameters from the menu bar e If any information is missing a dialog box will appear listing the missing parameters GENID 4 Downstream Boundary Elevation file must be defined Figure 4 21 This dialog box lists any missing parameters e If there are no missing parameters a confirmation dialog will appear En5imHydrologic xX Parameter set validation completed J NG errors were Found in GENID Figure 4 22 This dialog box appears if all parameters have been entered 4 Select Run Launch Simulation from the menu bar 4 2 3 Displaying Simulation Output GENID produces a single output file
122. Model E WATFLOOD Watershed haan i BA DEM ee ny Channels Stream Order u he Channels Stream Order Bagang Ee NO Basin 1 NP BA PAA mg PI AA PP pr al a ae ae a mo aaa Figure 5 3 By dragging the Watershed object into the parameter set you can copy its data e Ifyou don t have a pregenerated watershed object you can load a DEM and use it to create a watershed by dragging it into the DEM child object of the New Watershed container within the HBV EC Parameter Set object 214 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 WorkSpace a h Data Items in FA Watershed DEM e New HBV EC Parameter Set New WaterShed WorkSpace Basin 1 H ee PA ee Figure 5 4 A DEM can also be added to the HBV EC Parameter Set object by itself Once the DEM has been added you can use it to create the Channels and Basin objects by clicking the Generate button When you generate the Basin and Channels for a new watershed the outlet node that is used represents the outlet of the entire DEM If the watershed that you re modelling is contained in a smaller portion of the map you ll have to designate the correct outlet node manually To identify an alternate basin object 1 In a view window locate the node of the Channels object that you would like to designate as the outlet node for the new watershed basin Select the node by double clicking it The node will be identified by a p
123. OOD September 2007 4 The display and colour scale can be edited for each data attribute See the sections Properties of Data Items and Colour Scale in the Data Items section To display all the data attributes for a single cell 1 Select the Watflood Map 2 Double click on a cell of the Watflood Map The cell will be highlighted in magenta and a box will appear with all the data attribute information for that cell a 2D Yiew 1 Cell 216 Column 7 How 12 Channel Elevation EL 114 297 Mm Drainage Area FRAC 62 Ha Drainage direction 5 South 4 Fiver Class IBN 1 Contour Density TROUGH 22 Channel Density ICHNL 1 Reach Number IREACH bi Impervious Area 0 Figure 2 53 The popup shows all of the data information for the Tighlighted cell 2 3 1 5 Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes The data attributes of a Watflood Map can be edited cell by cell To check and edit the cells the Watflood Map is best viewed by selecting the Surface style and viewing the map in a 2D view To edit a single cell select the cell and choose the Edit command from the shortcut menu A dialog will appear listing all of the data attributes Simply click on the desired attribute and its value will become highlighted Change the value and click Ok or select another attribute to modify 2 3 1 5 1 Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons Land use data attributes cannot be calculated from the DEM Therefore En
124. Panel The Basin panel allows you to identify regions within the watershed These regions include the climate zones elevation bands land use classes and slope and aspect areas The selections made on this panel will determine the number of classes to be simulated by the HBV EC model Properties of New HBV EC Parameter Set Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Zones Display Spatial Meta Data Show Legend OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 5 This HBV EC panel has not yet been activated Initially this panel is inactive To activate the Basin panel click the Generate Basin Data from Watershed button This will generate initial values for the spatial data corresponding to the watershed object Note If there is more than one basin object contained in the watershed you must select the basin that is to be used in the WorkSpace panel The Basin panel contains five tabs each of which corresponds to a 2D Triangular Scalar Mesh object shown as a child of the basin object within the HBV EC Parameter Set object The triangular mesh objects can be displayed in a 3D view window 5 2 2 1 The Climate Tab The Climate tab indicates how the basin is divided into climate zones Smaller watersheds will usually be contained entirely within a single zone but larger areas may require multiple sets of climate data 216 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 Cimate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect
125. Parameters panel Location X This is the horizontal location of the climate station This value is not used by the model since MET files are assigned to climate zones and need not be located within the zone Location Y This is the horizontal location of the climate station This value is also not used by the model e Data This tab shows the Start and End dates of the meteorological data as well as the total number of records and the time step between records It also shows the variables that are contained within the file their maximum and minimum values their units of measure and which variable is currently active None of these values can be edited directly See Data Attributes under Properties of Data Items on p 20 for more details on this tab 230 Section 5 3 The HBV EC Model September 2007 Properties ofNew HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation Climate Zone 1 Parameters Met FileName Sample met Display Station Data Monthly Data Meta Data Temperature deg C Evaporation mm January 23 11 February 4 16 March 62 37 April 8 5 63 May l2 98 June 14 6 111 July 17 1 124 August 173 101 September 14 7 61 October 93 9 26 November 5 2 1 OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 21 These values show the monthly averages over several years e Monthly Data The average monthly values for temperature and evaporation are displayed on this tab and can be edited e Meta D
126. SCHARGE CONSTANT DISCHARGE SERIES REFLECTIVE Default LEVEL CONSTANT Description records the type of the upstream boundary node e UP BOUNDARY VALUE Required for LEVEL CONSTANT or DISCHARGE CONSTANT upstream boundary types Type floating point Valid Values any positive number Default none Description records the value of the upstream boundary level or discharge e UP BOUNDARY FILE Required for LEVEL SERIES Or DISCHARGE SERIES upstream boundary types 290 Type text Appendix D September 2007 Valid Values the name of any existing Type 1 time series file Default none Description records the name of the file containing varying water levels for some boundary types Output e SAVE WIDTH Optional Type Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records whether the width values will be saved in the output file e SAVE AREA Optional Type Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records whether the area values will be saved in the output file RESULT FILE Type text Valid Values the name of any existing network file Default none Description records the name of the output of the simulation If this field does not exist EnSim will create it when any output of the simulation is first generated 291 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 292 Appendix E September 2007 APPENDIX E FILE TYPES OF HBV EC The HBV E
127. September 2007 4 Enter a value 1n the dialog that reflects the degree to which the created cross section should resemble each of the sources A value of 0 5 produces an equal combination of the two sources Lower values produce a result that more closely resembles cross section A while higher values produce a result that resembles cross section B The value must be between 0 identical to cross section A and 1 identical to cross section B 5 Click pp 4 2 1 5 7 Vertically Offsetting a Cross Section Vertically offsetting a cross section can be used to adjust the elevation of an entire cross section at the same time When you enter the vertical offset value every point on the line has its elevation increased or decreased appropriately To vertically offset a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section you d like to offset 2 From the shortcut menu select Vertical Offset 3 Enter the value in metres by which the cross section should be elevated To lower the cross section 1 e to reduce its elevation enter a negative number 4 Click Of 4 2 1 5 8 Generating a Simple Cross Section If no data exists for a given segment s cross section and no other option is available a rough approximation of the possible cross section can be produced To generate a simple cross section 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view select the segment for which you would like to generate a simple
128. Sim Hydrologic provides a tool to obtain land use information from GIS data The number of land uses described in the map file should correspond to the land uses described in the WATFLOOD parameter file 163 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Properties of Watflood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Edit Land Cover Attribubes Options Land Cover Classes 4 Add Delete Cleat Contour Interval Min ha Attribute ax Units o Impervious Area 0 Us 9 Wetlands T Ol 10 Class 2 T Ux 11 Class 3 Us 12 Class 4 T Ux 13 Bankfull Capacities 0 0 CHS CU Figure 2 54 Use this dialog to add more land classes to the map To add land class data 1 In the Data tab of the Watflood Map s properties dialog click the Add button The Add Attributes dialog box will appear add attributes ed Land Use Class Add Bankfull Capacity No Figure 2 55 Use this dialog to enter the name of the new class 3 Click on a keyword to add a class to the map e Land Use Class Enter the name of the new class in the Value column You can change the name of the new class later by double clicking its name on the Data tab e Add Bankfull Capacity Select Yes or No from the Value column If you select yes the Bankfull Capacity attribute will be added to the Watflood Map 4 Click OF To map land use data 1 Ensure that the Watershed object is a child of the Watflood Map If it is not already
129. Stereographic Lambert Conformal or Albers has been selected the central edit box will become active Enter the appropriate details e LatLong Select 180 to 180 or 0 to 360 degrees e UTM or MTM Enter the zone number e Polar Stereographic Enter the Centre Latitude and Centre Longitude e Lambert Conformal or Albers Enter the Central Meridian Latitude of Origin 1st Standard Parallel 2nd Standard Parallel False Easting and False Northing 5 Select an appropriate ellipsoid from the Ellipsoid Datum list box The available ellipsoids are WGS84 WGS72 GRS80 NAD83 Clark 1866 NAD 27 and Sphere See Ellipsoids on p 27 for more information 6 Select the Ok button to confirm your selections 7 Ifa mistake has been made in assigning the coordinate system reselect the Assign button on the Spatial tab 1 4 3 4 5 Ellipsoids EnSim lets you quickly and easily convert spatial data between projections e g from LatLong to UTM However to transform the coordinate data to the new projection it is essential the data object is assigned the correct ellipsoid The table below shows the ellipsoids supported by EnSim and their associated parameters WGS84 6 378 137 0 1 0 298 257223563 WGS72 6 378 135 0 1 0 298 26 GRS80 NAD83 6 378 137 0 1 0 298 257222101 Clarke1866 NAD27 6 378 206 4 1 0 294 9786982 6 371 000 0 0 0 perfect sphere The cause of misaligned data within a view is most likely non matching el
130. The timespan of this new time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan Note the Interval Sums method is not applicable for vector time series 1 e directions e Interval Means A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each resample DeltaT The timespan of this new time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan e Daily Sums ts1 amp ts3 with calendar dates only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each calendar day The timespan of this new time series is defined by 0 hours of the day identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the day identified by resample EndTime Note the Daily Sums method is not applicable for vector time series 1 e directions and requires calendar dates only e Daily Means calendar dates only A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each calendar day The timespan of this new time series 1s defined by 0 hours of the day identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the day identified by the resample EndTime e Monthly Sums ts1 amp ts3 with calendar dates only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each calendar month The timespan of this new time series is defined by 0 hours of the first day of the month identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the last d
131. View Analogous to the field of view of a camera lens it is the angle that defines the limit of the size of area you see around the view centre It has a zoom effect decreasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming in and increasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming out e Near and Far Near and far are clipping planes of the view Clipping planes are limits perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and the view centre By default the clipping planes are located on either side of the view s data In the view s coordinate system s units near and far are defined by the distance of the clipping plane from the camera If while zooming in parts of the image begin to disappear the near parameter should be reduced in order to view all parts of the image 1 5 8 3 Display Properties of the Spherical View Window The display properties of the spherical window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box 47 EnSim Core September 2007 Properties of 5pherical Yiew 2 x Display Recording Spatial Temporal Meta Data Uptions Background Colour Show Compass Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info M Show Probes Use Display Lists W Show Crosshairs T Lock View Camera View Center pal 13256709 o i U 0 0 z fbos b4 4 Rotate Translate Hear 4464695 Field of View Far 1530757 45 2 Figure 1 29 The Display Properties dialog of
132. When the grid is satisfactory click on the Compute Grid button EnSim will initialize the grid and then interpolate onto the grid the node values from a triangulation of all source data Isolines will be divided into sections based on the grid size and the vertices of the sectioned line will be used in the interpolation Note The Properties dialog of the grid contains all the tabs of a viewable object in addition to the GridGen tab See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 for more details 1 6 1 4 Creating a New Triangular Mesh Open the source data file This might be a point set xyz parcel set pcl line set 12s triangular mesh t3s or regular grid r2s Create a new triangulation grid object by selecting File 3New 5Triangulation The triangulation object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty The Properties dialog of the triangulation object will open automatically In the WorkSpace drag the source data into the triangulation object The data points will be shown as children of the triangulation object More than one file or object can be used as source data for the triangulation The Source Data for the triangulation will be listed in the Properties dialog Properties of new Triangulation x T3 Mesh Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Triangulation Options Source Data a pew PointSet Pa new LlosedLine new ClogedLine Triangulate Figure 1 47
133. X Y and Z extents Near Far and Field of View behave as described previously in this section See Manipulating the 3D View on p 43 for more details 45 1 5 8 The Spherical View Window The spherical view window displays data in a spherical view as though one was looking at the earth from space The spherical view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the spherical view A new Spherical View window can be opened by pressing the button in the Tool bar just as in all other views or select New Sphere View from the Window menu F F WG Ni Enkarisl Man fh o 12 mg rical TIE La r ks Ahit eR o cu ui 0 Gee a Belo 50 l Ta a XX F ait lie oe 4 KA P SET amba ee fg Be amak Figure 1 28 The Earth is most accurately seen in a spherical view Note Only data items containing LatLong coordinates may be viewed in a spherical view Viewing objects in other coordinate systems or changing a LatLong object to another system while it is being viewed in a spherical view can have unpredictable effects 1 5 8 1 The Spherical View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window The status bar for the active spherical window is identical to the 3D view status bar the view s current 46 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 coordinate system and the location of the crosshairs 1s displayed as well as the active type of View manipulati
134. YDEX information This tab also has three sections Refer to the HYDAT documentation for complete information on the HYDEX Properties of 07KF005 x station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDER Meta Data WATER LEVEL DATA FOR 1960 TO AFR 1952 COLLECTED BY MEDS 45 STATION NO 16125 OTTAWA BRITANNIA ONT WRB RESPONSIBLE FOR GAUGE EFFECTIVE APR 01 1982 ALL HISTORICAL WATER LEVEL AND DISCHARGE DATA ENTERED Data Collection Tupe H Status Ta Tributary Code 4600 Benchmark ID Benchmark Elev Guage Type H Figure 3 7 This tab displays additional HYDEX information 3 1 4 3 Meta Data Additional HYDEX information can be found on the Meta Data tab See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 30 for more information 175 HYDAT Database September 2007 Properties of 02KF005 station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDEX Meta Data OT TAWA AIVER AT BRITANNIA Name USK FOO5 Type HY DAT Station Director D AHYDATENZ Filename O KPO0S dat HO ediment0 119710545 HD ediment 1197T1WTAS HO ediment 119730545 HOSS ediment3 119740545 HOS ediment4 119750545 HOsSediments T19720545 Apply Cancel Figure 3 8 The Meta Data tab displays data about the station files as opposed to data about the station 3 1 5 Properties of Associated Time Series There are four possible time series that can be linked to a Hydat station These include Flow L
135. Zones Display Spatial Meta Data Show Legend Zone 1 215 0725 Figure 5 6 This watershed is contained within a single climate zone To assign areas of a watershed to a different climate zone see Identifying Zones Within HBV EC on p 221 5 2 2 2 The Elevation Tab The Elevation tab indicates which elevation bands appear in the watershed Within the tab you can control how many bands are used as well as the boundaries for each band Clicking within the Colour column allows you to change the colours assigned to each band Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Bands Display Spatial Meta Data Number of Bands 10 W Show Legend 15 174026 212525 1496 1 1119 1252 21 5325 1185 5 1003 1119 21 6025 1061 897 1003 21 5525 950 790 a97 21 53 843 5 670 790 21 395 730 541 670 21 5475 605 5 3G 41 21 5675 75 Figure 5 7 This watershed has been divided into 10 elevation bands of roughly equal area 217 The HBV EC Model September 2007 By clicking on and changing the values in the Min column you can redefine the limits of each band the Max Area and Median values will automatically change to match In the HBV EC model each elevation band is identified by a single elevation value By default this is the median elevation value of the zone 2D View 2 Elevation Bands tm 1254 0 to 1740 3 1119 0 to 1252 0 1003 0 to 1118 0 39 0 to 1008 0 BF OO to 790 0
136. a attribute such as elevation or concentration 18 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 e Vector Data In either 2D or 3D the magnitude refers to the length of the vector arrows Shift Changes the vertical location of the object ina 3D view The default shift is always zero A positive shift moves the object in the positive z axis direction and a negative shift moves the object in the negative z axis direction 1 4 3 1 3 Other Display Options Grid Step This is an option only for regular grids The default display is 1 The means that every node of the grid is displayed If the grid file is very large EnSim may be slow in updating the view when it contains the grid The grid step can be increased to show fewer points and allow EnSim to update the display more quickly The usefulness of this feature is dependent on your machine s CPU and graphical capabilities Points This option is available to line sets When the Lines and Points or Points style is chosen under the Rendering option this option allows the display of the points to be changed For example the points can be displayed as an X as triangles as squares and so on Show Node Labels This is an option for gridded objects If this option is selected the node i d number is displayed at each node The size of the labels can be adjusted Show Element Labels This is an option for gridded objects If this option is selected the node 1 d number is displayed in the cen
137. a of the grid To map objects 1 Open the two data items involved in the mapping One will be the source object The other will be the receiving object The values will be mapped from the source object to the receiving object 2 Select the receiving object the object whose values are to be changed in the WorkSpace 3 Select Tools Map Object 4 A dialog will appear providing a list of all open data items that can be mapped to the receiving object Select the desired source object Available Objects x 5 new OpenLine 5 themed CapilanoT elemac 30 1993 4 CapilanoT elemac20 1993 Cancel Figure 1 79 This dialog is used to select a source object when mapping Other possible examples of mapping objects include e Vector objects mapped to other vector objects e Vector objects mapped to scalar objects 99 EnSim Core September 2007 1 6 9 Calculators 1 6 9 1 The Calculator for Data Items The calculator tool performs basic arithmetic operations such as addition subtraction multiplication or division on all non gridded data items The calculator changes all the values of the data item by the same value or factor Only one operation may be applied at a time A possible application of this tool might be to change the units in a data item from metres to feet by multiplying all measurements by 3 280839895 To use the calculator 1 Select the data item in the WorkSpace upon which the arithmetic operation
138. a spherical view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section The Compass under View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 80 e Use Display Lists Using display lists will update the view quickly after changes are made but at the expense of memory Ifthe object being displayed occupies a lot of memory space using display lists may make updating the view slow In that event toggling this option off may help to update the view more quickly e Show Crosshairs Crosshairs are the red green and blue axes defining the x y and z directions respectively e Lock View When toggled on the ability to move data items within the view will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock sj in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red e Rotate and Translate control the movement of the viewing area as described previously See Manipulating the Spherical View on p 47 for more details e X Y and Z extents Near Far
139. al B Colour Bi Colour e ie Italics M Background Bald Colour Underline Figure 1 39 This dialog is accessed from the Options button shown in the above image 1 5 10 4 Labels Labels allow you to display text information within a view window They can be created and edited To create a label 1 With a view selected select the create labels button or View New Label 2 Click the cursor in the view window A text window will appear at the cursor location 3 Type the text that you would like displayed Note that the label will extend horizontally according to the length of the text and vertically in response to the lt Enter gt key 4 Click the cursor outside the label to finish S9 EnSim Core September 2007 To edit a label 1 Double click on a label to select it e To edit the label s text select Edit from the label s shortcut menu e To delete the label select Remove from the shortcut menu or press Delete e To move or resize the label click on and drag the border as desired Note that the text within the label will resize automatically Label properties can be accessed through the shortcut menu or by selecting Edit Properties Label Options x Decorations E Colour 2 2 width Background Colour Justify Gi Cancel Figure 1 40 The Properties dialog of a Label Colour Italics Bold M Underline e Font Allows the font type Colour and sty
140. al Stn 5 Computed Bzz 2d 49 9156 Stn 6 Computed 390 24 35 85959 Str Computed Ale 1 93939 Stn 8 Computed 162 56 195 032 Cancel Figure 2 33 The Computed Flow is based on the known flow stations There are two methods for calculating the flow at a station along the channel Interpolate Point to Point This option estimates the low flow by linearly interpolating between the nearest known lower drainage area and stream flow and the nearest known higher drainage area and stream flow Interpolate Average Slope This option estimates the stream flow along the channel by generating an average low flow versus average drainage area ratio Note Only one station is required for these calculations as all interpolation lines are drawn through the point where drainage area and low flow are equal to zero To add a computed flow station l 2 Drag the Channels object into a view With the Properties dialog open click on the Channels object within the view to identify the location of a flow station Select the Add button from the Stations area of the Known Flow tab e The station name will appear under the Name column To change the name ofthe station click on the name and edit the text e The Drainage Area will be calculated from the station and appear in the Drainage Area column The flow will be calculated from the known flow stations and appear in the flow column of the dialog 143 EnSim Hydrolo
141. allows you to edit location or value of a node 4 Edit the values in the dialog box 5 Click OK 199 The GENID Model 4 2 1 3 Down Boundary September 2007 The Down Boundary tab allows you to examine and edit the properties of the downstream boundary of the model Properties of NewGEN1DRun S x Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Tupe water Level Constant T 0 Node ID 1 Sees FileName Sample Down Boundary t31 Display Data Meta Data Visible Colour Styles Lines Solid hi Fonts Fill Square hd OF Apply Cancel 157 Line Width ma Point Size Figure 4 11 The Down Boundary tab defines the downstream boundary of the channel There are five ways to describe the downstream boundary e Type Use this box to select the general type of boundary at the downstream node e Water Level Constant If the downstream boundary is constant enter the water level in metres in the text box e Water Level Series If the downstream boundary varies over time click w to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes in its water level e Discharge Constant If the downstream boundary has a constant discharge enter the value in m s in the text box e Discharge Series If the downstream boundary has a discharge that varies over time click E to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes th
142. ally The default data attributes for the Watflood Map can be edited 2 3 1 4 1 Description of Data Attributes The physiographic data required by the WATFLOOD hydrological model are as follows e Channel elevation ELV This is the elevation at the midpoint of the main channel within a cell Note that for multiple basins with different watershed outlets the elevation at the outlet cells must be equal EnSim Hydrologic forces all outlet cell elevations to be equal to the lowest outlet cell elevation e Drainage area FRAC This is the percentage of the area of a cell within the watershed boundary that flows in the indicated drainage direction see Drainage Direction below EnSim Hydrologic will assign a drainage area of 100 to all cells within the basin outline Essentially the entire land area of the cell 1s considered to flow in the stated drainage direction Cells that lie on the basin boundary will be assigned a percentage based on the area of the cell that is included within the basin boundary 159 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 The drainage area of a cell can be greater than or less than 100 This accounts for cells that have multiple channels that drain into different cells Adjustment of the drainage area of cells must be done manually For example in the figure below two channels flow through the dark green cell One drains to the east and the other to the south In terms of element proportions 35 of the cell area drains
143. am flow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Tag file tag 4 Temperature gauge data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Tem file tem Distributed temperature data Components are stored as r2c objects Topaz watershed file See Topaz documentation for information on the format of these files Only Topaz output files in ArcInfo ASCII grid file arc format are supported Topaz watershed files cannot be created edited or saved with EnSim Hydrologic They may be loaded into EnSim Hydrologic and displayed in a 2D or 3D view or may be used to create a new EnSim watershed object URP Metafile Unified Radar Processor is the weather radar format used by Environment Canada URP Metafiles are loaded into EnSim as triangular meshes In the WorkSpace they have the icon They may be treated as native t3s files 281 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 282 Appendix C September 2007 APPENDIX C FILE TYPES OF THE RCA The Rating Curve Analysis File rca The file extension for a Rating Curve Analysis object is rca It is represented in the WorkSpace by the icon For information about using rating curve analyses see Rating Curve Analysis RCA on p 180 File Header rca An example of a header from an RCA object is shown below This RCA was generated with the Power Curve function tHE HH Ht HH HH TE EH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EE EH EH EEE HE EO EEE HAHAAHA
144. arly useful for illustrating the relationship between two attributes such as Discharge vs Level as found in a rating curve analysis 253 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Parcel Sets pcl Parcel sets contain point data possessing multiple attributes Since their contents are displayed as points parcel sets are represented by the point set icon in the WorkSpace They use the file extension pcl The data of a parcel set may vary over time If the data does not vary over time the file is stored in ASCII If it does vary over time the file is in binary format Parcels are only referenced in two dimensions x and y However elevation may be added as one of the attributes Parcel sets may be saved in ASCII as multi frame MapInfo Interchange mif files single frame MapInfo Interchange files or as single frame parcel files With the multi frame mif option all frames are saved in a single time step When the data 1s displayed all frames appear simultaneously With single frame mif and parcel files only the frame that is being displayed when the file is created is saved File Headers pcl An example parcel set file is shown below itt tt HH ee He te HH oe EE HEE aE aE Ee ESE SE EEE aE aE Ea ooo FileType pcl ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType Lagrangian Parcel Set Application EnSimHydrologic Version dala WrittenBy Username CreationDate Bry Apr l5 200
145. as an individual network Select the basin in the WorkSpace or a point on the basin boundary and then select Tools gt Watershed Extract Basin Network from the menu bar a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 28 A network extracted from within a selected basin shown in 2D view 2 2 1 12 Extracting a Hypsographic Curve The hypsographic curve also known as a hypsometric curve shows the percentage of a watershed that is below an elevation The hypsographic curve is extracted from the basin object of the watershed Select a Basin from the Watershed in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed 5Extract Hypsographic Curve from the menu bar The curve appears as an XY data item which is shown as a child of the Basin object This curve can be viewedin a 1D View 139 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 1D Yiew 3 de 42000 2 Malue 103 404 metres Figure 2 29 The data probe on this curve indicates that 42 of the basin is below 103 404 m in elevation The x axis 1s normalized between 0 and 100 The curve is created by using a sorting algorithm that determines the percentage of the watershed that is below a given elevation 2 2 1 13 Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances The flow path distance from each nodes within a basin to the outlet of the basin can be extracted as a surface Select the basin in the WorkSpace or a point on the basin boundary and then select Tools Watershed Extract Basin Flow Path Distances from the menu
146. ast and slow response reservoirs of similar configuration to those in the traditional HBV model Lindstrom et al 1997 5 1 2 2 Snow Melt Factor Variation with Terrain Aspect and Slope Within the traditional HBV model the snow melt factor does not vary with respect to terrain slope or aspect In the HBV EC model the snow melt factor varies as a function of aspect b and slope s as MF MFrrarx 1 4M e sin s e cos b 1 where MF pr 7 is the melt factor computed for flat terrain mm d and AM is a model parameter representing the aspect slope reduction factor dimensionless which varies between 0s AMx1 5 1 2 3 Watershed Routing The traditional HBV uses a MAXBAS parameter to transform fast and slow reservoir releases into streamflow The HBV EC model does not use a weighting function to distribute reservoir releases from the model Output from each reservoir is totalled to predict the discharge for the given model time step 5 1 3 References Bergstrom S 1995 The HBV Model In V P Singh editor Computer Models of Watershed Hydrology Water Resources Publications Highlands Ranch Colorado pp 443 470 Lindstrom G Johansson B Persson M Gardelin M and Bergstrom S 1997 Development and test of the distributed HBV 96 hydrological model J Hydrol 201 272 288 Moore R D 1993 Application of a conceptual streamflow model in a glacierized drainage ba sin J Hydrol 150 151 168 5 2 THE HBV EC INTERFACE
147. ata This tab shows any data located in the header of the MET file that isn t displayed on one of the other tabs This includes the path and name of the file the version number of the software used to create the file and so on See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 30 for more information on meta data 5 3 THE HBV EC MODEL When the HBV EC model is run the information supplied in the HBV EC dialog is used to calculate several results including both one and two dimensional data objects To run the HBV EC model 1 After you ve entered all of the required information in all three panels of the HBV EC dialog click pp to confirm your entries 2 Within the WorkSpace select the name of your HBV EC Parameter Set object From the menu bar select File Save 231 The HBV EC Model September 2007 3 Select Run gt Check Parameters from the menu bar A dialog box will appear listing any errors remaining in the parameter set If there are no errors found the the message box shown in Figure 5 22 will appear EnSimHydrologic xX NG errors or warning were found in i INFO Parameter set validation completed New HBV EC Parameter Set Figure 5 22 This message indicates that no errors were found 4 Once you have fixed any errors select Run Launch Simulation from the menu bar A number of data objects will be created as children of the parameter set 5 3 1 The Results of the HBV EC Model The results
148. ata attributes follow on the same line in the same order as they appear in the header 257 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 There are five types of time series supported by EnSim ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 and ts5 The first four types cover the range of combinations of scalar and vector data with simple time steps or explicit date and time They have the icons or 4 for time series containing scalar or vector data respectively e tsl scalar data with simple implicit time steps e ts2 vector data with simple time steps e ts3 scalar data with explicit time date hours minutes seconds e ts4 vector data with explicit time The fifth time series 1s a special type of time series called a timegrid It is generated using the Extract Time Series tool Along a Line and is essentially a collection of attribute values extracted along a line from a time varying grid or mesh See Extracting Time Series on p 92 for more information File Headers ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 An example header from a time series file is shown below Hit tH HH HH HHH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH EE EEE EOE EOE EE EEE OE EO EEE EEE OE EE EE EEE H FileType tsl ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType Type 1 Time Series it Application EnSimTelemac Version 2 4 18 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 15 2005 11 20 PM Sa a GG EG a a BG B
149. ates that the data item is in the process of being created For example a new regular grid will have a yellow star while a regular grid loaded into EnSim with the Open file command will not have a yellow star When an object is selected in the WorkSpace it is highlighted and becomes the current object All functions are then applied to that object Objects in the WorkSpace can be manipulated in the following ways e Adding an object to another object Data items can be added to the Data Items hierarchy by opening a file or creating a new data item such as a grid Files can be opened in the same manner New files can be created by choosing File New and selecting the item to be created or by creating the data item with an EnSim function For example when a 3D line is created it is added to the WorkSpace as a child of the parent object Selected objects can be added to other objects in the WorkSpace by dragging and dropping An object can only be dragged into another object that is capable of receiving data such as a view window or an empty data item e Adding data items to a view To add an object to a view select it from the Data Items section of the WorkSpace drag it to the View section of the WorkSpace and drop it into a view object The default view object in EnSim is a 2D View window After an object has been dropped into a view it can be displayed or hidden without removing it from the view by toggling the Visible command in t
150. ating New Data Items 1 6 1 1 Drawing Points EnSim has the ability to define and edit new Point Sets These points may be used for a number of uses or they may be used in conjunction with other tools such as Map Objects Points can also be digitized from a GeoTIFF Refer to the section Digitizing From an Imported Image for further details Points have a location as well as values or attributes Points can be saved in xyz shp and mif formats To create a point set 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the 7 button or select File gt New gt Points The button will appear depressed EI In the File gt New menu Points will appear with a checkmark 3 Click in the 2D View at a specific location to create the first point of the set Each click will create a new point 4 To end the point set reselect the button or press lt Esc gt The Points button will appear raised Alternatively reselect File gt New Points 5 A dialog will appear Enter a name for the new point set If no name is entered it will be named newPointSet by default Units may also be entered as well Once the Point set has been created the x and y coordinates as well as the value or z coordinate can be adjusted Select the point and click on Edit on the shortcut menu 67 EnSim Core September 2007 Hint Lock the view while drawing points using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse clic
151. ation and the actual elevation Higher values may indicate higher potential flow velocities The relief potential of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed gt Extract Relief Potential from the menu bar Ifa basin 1s selected the relief potential value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The relief potential surface can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view Figure 2 25 These images depict a Stream Power map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 9 Extracting Upstream Network The network upstream of a channel node can be extracted as an individual network Select a point on a channel and then select Tools Watershed gt Extract Upstream Network from the menu bar 137 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 a 2D Yiew 1 O x Figure 2 26 A network extracted upstream of a selected point on the channel network shown in 2D view 2 2 1 10 Extracting Downstream Reach The reach downstream of a channel node can be extracted as an individual network Select a point on a channel and then select Tools Watershed gt Extract Downstream Reach from the menu bar lolx Figure 2 27 A reach extracted downstream of a selected point on the channel network shown in 2D view 138 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 2 21 11 Extracting Basin Network The channel network within a basin can be extracted
152. ation data Attributes may be integer float text etc See Line Sets 12s 13s on p 250 for further details 3D Line Sets Open or closed collection of lines defined by three dimensional nodes Each line may have multiple associated attributes For example if the lines are contour lines it may include elevation data Attributes may be integer float text etc See Line Sets 12s 13s on p 250 for further details Point Sets Set of points each represented by an x and y coordinate Each point may have multiple associated attributes XYZ Point Sets Set of points each represented by an x y and z coordinate Parcel Sets Set of points each represented by an x y and z coordinate May have multiple attributes and may be time varying Location of points may move if they vary over time 10 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 XY Data Sets Set of scalar pairs Each pair represents values from two attributes attribute X and attribute Y Scalar Implicit Time Series Represents a scalar quantity varying with a simple time step in seconds extracted from an x and y location Vector Implicit Time Series Represents a vector quantity varying with a simple time step in seconds extracted from an x and y location Scalar Explicit Time Series Represents a scalar quantity varying with an explicit data and time extracted from an x and y location Vector Explicit Time Series Represents a vector quantity varying with an expl
153. ay of the month identified by the resample EndTime Note the Monthly Sums method is not applicable for vector time series i e directions and requires calendar dates only e Monthly Means calendar dates only A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each calendar day The timespan of this new time series 1s defined by 0 hours of the first day of the month identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the last day of the month identified by the resample EndTime Once the resample options have been chosen press DE If the Create New TimeSeries box 1s checked a new time series will be created and added as a child under the source time series in the workspace The source time series will remain unmodified If the Create New TimeSeries box is unchecked the source time series will be overwritten with the changes 79 EnSim Core September 2007 1 6 4 Probing Data Preliminary interpretation of the data can be done with the use of dynamic or static data probes Static data probes display the data attributes associated with a specific component such as a particular line cell or node of the object Dynamic data probes such as the live cursor continually update the probe value as the cursor moves across the view 1 6 4 1 Data Probes Data probes display the data attributes associated with the individual components of an object A component can be a node of a grid or mesh a point from an xyz set or a
154. been applied 5 2 3 The Simulation Panel The purpose of the Simulation panel is to provide information to detail the physical characteristics of each of the areas that have been identified on the Basin panel Because the HBV EC model is one dimensional the relative locations of the different types of terrain are not relevant Only the characteristics that have been described on the Basin and Simulation panels are considered For example one area might consist of all forested terrain located in Climate Zone 1 within Elevation Band 3 with a slope between 2 and 8 facing north A change in any of the five defining characteristics would result in a particular portion of terrain falling into a different area As aresult of this approach the total number of areas is equal to the number of climate zones multiplied by the number of elevation bands multiplied by the number of land use types appearing multiplied by the number of slope bands multiplied by the number of aspect bands Note though that Lake terrain is always considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 222 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 For example if we have one climate zone four elevation bands Open Forest and Lake terrain three slope bands and two aspect bands North and South the HBV EC model will have to be executed for each of 52 areas each of which must also be described Figure 5 15 Even a small number of groups in each category can resu
155. butelnits 1 m it 266 Appendix A September 2007 EndHeader Segment 1 4 1 034 20 5447562000000 4782662 000000 244 730000 544767 000000 4782623 000000 244 729000 544773 000000 4782603 000000 244 728000 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 EndSegment Segment 2 4 1 026 20 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 544783 000000 4782535 000000 244 525000 544782 000000 4782507 000000 244 322000 544781 000000 4782478 000000 244 120000 EndSegment Segment 10 3 1 347 15 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 544807 000000 4782515 000000 244 630000 544840 000000 4782503 000000 244 548000 EndSegment Node 1 1 1 246 760 Node 2 3 Ll 2 10 246 762 Node 3 2 2 3 8 246 763 Node 9 2 8 9 244 750 Node 10 1 9 244 732 Node LL 1 10 246 676 e SegmentAttributeName Gives the name of an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e SegmentAttributeType Gives the variable type such as integer text and so on for an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e SegmentAttributeUnits Gives the units for an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e NodeAttributeName Gives the name of an attribute possessed by a node e NodeAttributeType Gives the variable type for an attribute possessed by a node e NodeAttributeUnits Gives the units for an attribute possessed by a node e Segment Identifies the beginning of data pertaining to a segment of the network e EndSegment Identifies the end o
156. button on the tool bar Map files have the file extension map The watershed map file will be listed in the Workspace under the Data Items category and with have this icon s Note A basin shd file a WATFLOOD file that represents a processed map can also be opened and displayed in EnSim Hydrologic but it cannot be edited or saved All changes must be made directly to the map file and a new basin file must be generated by WATFLOOD Basin files have this icon s 2 3 1 2 Creating a New Watflood Map File To create a new map file select File New gt Watflood Map from the menu bar A Watflood Map object will be created and listed under the Data Items category Fa Data Items Ef new Watflood Map Channel Elevation ELY Figure 2 43 A new Watflood Map object The property dialog box will appear The Map Gen tab will appear with all the values in the Specification area set to zero The new map file does not need to be associated with a watershed The specifications can be set manually or automatically To set map file specifications manually 1 Enter Origin Count and Delta values for the cells of the grid 155 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Properties of Watflood Map i x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Specihicatian Ka Origin 43603775 1 49725111 Count 3 23 Delta 0 1 2863776 053760000 Default Settings tt User Settings f Fit to User specified deltas Source Wate
157. by first triangulating this data To create a cross section or 3D polyline from points or line data 1 Open a line or point set into the WorkSpace 2 Create a new triangular mesh by using File New 3 Drag the line or point set onto the mesh 4 Open the Properties dialog and select the Triangulate button 5 See section Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data under How To Hints and Tricks on p 107 for further steps 1 7 4 Displaying Two Features of an Object Simultaneously Sometimes it is desirable to display a spatial object as a surface while retaining the lines of the grid or mesh or to display an object as filled contours while also showing the distinct isolines that define the contours It may also be desirable to display two data attributes of an object simultaneously These things are all done similarly What is desired is to display the object in two different display styles or in two different ways To do this the object must be opened in EnSim twice That is there must be two of the same object in the WorkSpace To display an object in N different ways it must appear in the WorkSpace N times Each object is then displayed as one of the desired types 108 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2007 WorkSpace Data Items Surface wireframe aa Views Eba 2D View 1 wireframe A Works pace Sa z Ready Cartesian et Figure 1 86 This obje
158. calar grids point sets etc can be used and displayed in the same way and they can all have the same functions applied to them For example all line set objects have the same options for display and can be used in performing the same functions The same display options and functions are not necessarily applicable to an object of a different type say a 2D grid object or a point set All EnSim objects have a native file format See Native File Formats on p 242 for details There are different categories of objects spatial objects and container objects Spatial objects are those that have geometry and attributes They are the ones that can be displayed in a view edited manipulated etc Container objects do not have geometry They are containers or organizers for other objects and data They keep related objects together in one location An EnSim Hydrologic Watershed object is a container and so is an EnSim TELEMAC SELAFIN slf object Time series are similar to spatial objects in that they may be displayed edited and manipulated but they are different in that they do not have geometry only attributes EnSim Core September 2007 1 4 1 Loading and Importing Data Items To load a data item into the WorkSpace there are two types of data items recognized by EnSim 1 For native EnSim data items choose the Open command from the File menu or use the button When the Open dialog box appears select the file to be opened into the Wor
159. ch states the number of segments in the network These numbers are then followed by a series of records one per data attribute The same pattern number of attributes number of nodes and values of the attributes is used for the node attributes of the network This record structure 1s repeated once for each time step of the network RecHeader Seg Atts Al of S1 pa Al ofSn AnofS1 An of Sn Seg Atts Al ofNn An ofNI1 An of Nn Nodes Node Atts Node Atts Nodes Al of N1 e RecHeader The Record Header Each time step has a single record header 268 Appendix A September 2007 e Seg Att The number of data attributes associated with segments of the network e Node Att The number of data attributes associated with nodes of the network e Seg The total number of segments in the network numbered 1 to n e Node The total number of nodes in the network numbered 1 to n e A Attribute S Segment N Node 269 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE FORMATS ENSIM CORE EnSim supports several file types used by other applications Most are GIS related files used to import georeferenced data into EnSim For information on the organization of these files refer to the documentation from the parent application These files can be opened by selecting File Import from the menu bar in EnSim Foreign file types that are supported by EnSim include e ArcInfo ASCII grid files
160. cross section 2 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection gt Generate CrossSection at Segment Channel Shape x Bankfull width m 15 3 Bankfull Height m 14 97 Bottom width m 0 F Include Floodplain Floodplain width m U Floodplain Height rm fo Figure 4 19 This dialog allows you to create a simple cross section 206 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 3 Enter the estimated values for the cross section of the segment 4 Click Ok 4 2 1 5 9 Removing a Cross Section This option is available in case you want to remove a cross section from the Channels object To remove a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section that you d like to remove 2 From the cross section s shortcut menu select Remove 3 You will be asked to confirm your selection Remember once you ve removed a cross section 1t cannot be recovered Click Ves to remove the cross section or NG to abort the removal 4 2 1 5 10 Cross Section Properties The Cross Section properties window can be used to examine the profile of a cross section and to see what the effects of varying water levels are on its parameters To view the properties of a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section whose properties you d like to examine 2 From the shortcut menu select Properties B8 Cross Section ID 1 x Geometry Md asinium Width Max Elevation
161. ct is being displayed as a coloured surface and a black monochrome mesh simultaneously If the object is being displayed for editing purposes be careful to highlight the appropriate object in the WorkSpace to ensure that the correct object is being edited Also remember that EnSim considers the objects to be independent of each other Be careful to edit only one of the objects Remember that all attributes of an object not just the one being displayed can be edited with the Edit command in the shortcut menu Some other things to remember e Ifyou are displaying the objects in a 3D view ensure that the Scale of both is the same e Ifyou are displaying isolines and filled contours ensure that the colour scale attributes 1 e min max interval style levels etc of all objects is the same Even though an object may be displayed in monochrome the colour scale defines the values of the isolines 1 7 5 Displaying Isoline Outlined Filled Contours To display an object as filled contours and isolines in the same view the object need not be opened and displayed twice Isolines can be extracted from the grid or mesh making a new independent object To do this highlight the grid or mesh object in the WorkSpace select Tools Extract Isolines Multiple Isolines The new line set object will appear in the WorkSpace as a child of the grid or mesh It can be displayed in the same view as the grid or mesh 109 EnSim Core September 2007
162. cur in the x y plane using the lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the mouse or using the mouse wheel rotation and translation can occur in the z or vertical direction The options of Rotate or Translate can be chosen using commands in the shortcut menu or in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box During rotation manipulations a hand with an arrow cursor W will appear During translation manipulations a hand cursor wW will appear r 43 EnSim Core September 2007 An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view e Changing the view parameters in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are several types of controls to the view parameters e X Y and Z Camera Camera indicates the location in 3D space from which you are viewing the scene e X Y and Z View Centre View centre refers to the location of the centre of the point of interest within a view It is the centre of the view window Note that the crosshair is always drawn at the centre of the view e Field of View Analogous to the field of view of a camera lens it is the angle that defines the limit of the size of area you see around the view centre It has a zoom effect decreasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming in and increasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming out CAMERA FIE
163. d AttributeUnits this keyword identifies data pertaining to data attributes associated with data points This keyword is followed by an integer and text The integer identifies the placement of the attribute with respect to the order of the other attributes The number 3 would mean that this attribute is the third in the list of attributes to be read from the data in the file The text following the integer identifies the type of attribute data Attribute types are se Float e integer e boolean Appendix A September 2007 e CENT e date e one of In the file data the text or date must be enclosed by double quotation marks If this keyword is not used the attribute type is not specified and the attribute 1s given the default type of floating point float If the attribute type one of is used a list of character strings words enclosed in double quotes must follow on the same line as the type declaration In the body of the file integers are used to index these character strings For example a 3 in the file body that corresponds to an attribute with the type one of would be assigned the third character string on the list on the AttributeType keyword line e SourceFile Optional only used with data extraction files States the name of the file from which the data was extracted e FrameTime Optional only used with data extraction files States the simulation time at which the data was extracted Applicable to data e
164. d channel object It will have the extension n3s 3 Click Ok 4 2 1 2 3 Changing a Segment Attribute Value To change a segment attribute value 1 Double click on a segment of the network within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected segment 3 Select Edit from the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Segment Attributes x Cancel Figure 4 8 This dialog box allows you to edit a segment s attributes 198 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 4 Click on an attribute keyword or value to edit as needed 5 Click OK 4 2 1 2 4 Changing a Node Attribute Value To change a node s attribute values 1 Double click on a node within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected node 3 Select Edit from the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Node Attributes x Surface Elevation 319 87 2039795 Tributary Discharge 0 Cancel Figure 4 9 This dialog box allows you to edit the attributes of a node 4 Click on an attribute keyword or value to edit as needed 5 Click OK To change a node s location or value 1 Double click on a node within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected node 3 Select Edit Selected Point from the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Please specify new values for the location of the selected point Cancel ka 652025 163 a 501545 101 Value Figure 4 10 This dialog box
165. d in the same way as other data attributes of the Watflood Map file See Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes on p 163 for more information 166 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 2 3 1 5 4 Resetting a Land Use Class To reset a land use class 1 Select the land class attribute on the Data tab of the Watflood Map s properties dialog Click Apply 8 and ensure that there is a green checkmark to the left of the attribute you wish to clear 2 Click Clear The selected land class will now have a value of 0 for each cell 2 3 1 6 The Watflood Map can be saved as a map file or as a r2c file Select the Watflood Map object and choose File Save or File Save Copy As See Supported Foreign File Types EnSim Hydrologic on p 281 for information about the map file format Note The Watflood Map saved as an EnSim r2c file can be recognized as input by newer versions of the Watflood Model Saving the Watflood Map 2 3 2 Importing WATFLOOD Files WATFLOOD files other than the Watflood Map and the Watflood Output which are loaded through the open menu can be imported into EnSim Hydrologic With the exception of the Watflood Event file the files may be viewed but cannot be edited or saved in their native formats Refer to the section on Watflood Event File Properties on p 168 for details on the Event file Note Imported Watflood grid files such as tem and met files can be saved as EnSim r2c files w
166. d of rainfall The default value is 1 225 The HBV EC Model September 2007 226 PGRADL This is the fractional increase in precipitation with elevation for elevations below EMID per metre This parameter allows for the orographic effects of altitude on precipitation levels The default value is 0 0001 which indicates a 0 01 increase in precipitation per metre of elevation above the measuring station This value and PGRADH below must fall between 0 and 1 PGRADH This is the fractional increase in precipitation with elevation for elevations above EMID per metre This value can be used when there s a difference in orographic effects above and below a certain level The default value is 0 which indicates that elevations above EMID no longer experience an increase in precipitation EMID This is the mid point elevation separating precipitation gradients in metres The default value is 5000 Below this elevation PGRADL is used to determine the precipitation increase from elevation above it PGRADH applies TLAPSE This is the temperature lapse rate in degrees Celsius per metre The default value is 0 0065 This parameter takes into account the elevation of the MET file data when calculating the effective temperature at a particular elevation Typically this value should fall between the saturated and adiabatic temperature lapse rates so values from 0 006 to 0 010 can be expected TT This is the threshold air temperature f
167. d points only the number of values equal to the number of grid points will be used and excess values will be ignored In the case of more than one attribute once the data for each node is read for the first attribute then the data for the next attribute is expected starting again at the first node 1 Each attribute will be read sequentially If the file has been saved by an EnSim application the values at each grid point will be written in a matrix format The number of columns in the file corresponds to the number of vertices in the x direction of the grid and the number of rows corresponds to the number of vertices in the y direction For scalar data r2s the first value listed in the matrix is the value at the bottom left corner of the rectangular grid The matrix of values 1s repeated for each successive attribute For vector data r2v files the matrix is the same except that all of the x components of each vector for a particular data attribute are listed first After the x components for each point are listed the y components of the vectors are listed A vector data set contains twice as many values as a single attribute scalar data set with the same number of grid points Binary Both time varying and non time varying data may be stored in binary format However the header of the binary file is stored as ASCII characters so that the file can be examined with a text editor For each time step new values must be specified for
168. defined saved themes To create a Custom Theme 1 With Custom Theme selected the user can select from predefined colour schemes which include Default Colours Rainbow Grayscale USGS Reduced 40 Nice Colours RGB Interpolation and HSV Interpolation on the colour or name of an individual class to set their own colours and names 2 Also within the Custom Theme mode the user can edit individual class colours and names by clicking on them 3 To save the created scheme press the Save button This file will be saved to an ASCII thm file and stored in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory To choose from a predefined theme 1 All saved theme files found in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory are selectable from the list in the top right of the dialog Once a predefined theme is chosen changes to colour schemes class colours and class names are not allowed 2 Several documented land cover theme files are provided e EC Environment Canada e LA GAP Louisiana GAP Analysis Project e USGS NatAtlas LC USGS National Atlas Land Cover e EOSD Earth Observation for Sustainable Development of forests 115 EnSim Core September 2007 c2 2D Yiew 1 Example Image mage x Mpe1OUs5 ee Aaj Deciduous a ah iy NT i r Properties of Example Image ay Agriculture O PE wy 4 F TER E Bing Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Grayscale EC Save
169. describe the level of friction that applies within a segment 19 The GENID Model September 2007 Fach node of the network is linked to two additional attributes e Surface Elevation The elevation of the water surface at the node e Tributary Discharge Any additional influx or source of water at the node such as a tributary entering the main channel The boundary nodes are defined as the end nodes of the network object For additional information on boundaries see the sections Down Boundary on p 200 and Up Boundary on p 201 192 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 42 THE GEN1D INTERFACE 4 2 1 Setting Up Simulation Parameters The parameters for running a GENID simulation are contained within the GENID Parameter Set file gld For more information about this file see Appendix D on p 285 This file is created from the GEN1DParamSet object To create a new simulation parameter set select File 3New GEN1D Run from the menu bar An empty object called NewGEN1DRun will appear in the WorkSpace WorkSpace Data Items 3 B B NewGEN1DRun ban GA Channels P Down Boundary ya GA Up Boundary jh iiia B om E oe ka GA Figure 4 3 A new GENID Run appears in the WorkSpace with several empty components All data and parameters pertaining to the new simulation are specified through the Properties dialog of the NewGEN1IDRun object The Properties dialog appears when the NewGEN
170. ditions This model can then be used as a starting point in further simulations to establish behaviour under atypical conditions This type of simulation involves two or three parameters e Steady State Discharge Accuracy This parameter determines the point at which the model is assumed to have reached a steady state The smaller the value the more precise the determination The default value of 0 0001 represents a 0 01 variation Extremely small values such as le 07 are recommended e Courant See Run Type Run above e Viscosity See Run Type Run above e Calibrate Friction To Water Level This type of simulation is used to calibrate a friction coefficient for a channel if the surface elevation is known e Calibrate at Node ID This value represents the ID of the target node to which the calibration 1s to be applied e Calibrate to Water Level This value represents the target water level at the node specified above in metres e Minimum Strickler This is a lower calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel e Maximum Strickler This is the upper calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel e Steady State Discharge Accuracy See Run Type Run to Steady State above e Courant See Run Type Run above e Viscosity See Run Type Run above 195 The GENID Model September 2007 e Calibrate Friction To Discharge This type of simulation is used to determine the friction coeff
171. djusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box These will be the minimum and maximum values displayed on the X and Y axes An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the shortcut menu ofthe view object The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view which centres the entire object in the view window 1 5 4 4 Display Properties of the 1D View Window The display properties of the 1D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box A sample Display tab for a 1D window is shown below Properties of 1D Yiew 7 Display Recording Temporal Meta Data Options Background Colour W Automatic Colours Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info T Lock View Min Max x U 26 y 1 58987 2 8 fab M Show Grid I Show Labels P Grid amp Label Colour 3 2 Label Size a Divisions Hirt Apply Cancel Figure 1 18 The Display Properties dialog of a 1D view e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background of the 1D View window Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Automatic Colours If this box is checked a different colour will automatically be assigned to each data object that 1s added to the 1D View
172. e y direction e xDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left corner There is one additional keyword that is not found in a 2D rectangular grid e SourceFile The name of the file from which the Depressionless DEM was generated Several keywords are used to describe the channels These keywords are enclosed by the Hydrochannels and EndHydroChannels keywords e DrainageAreaThreshold The minimum drainage area required to treat a flow path as a channel that is displayed in a view within EnSim Channels displayed in a view will have an upstream drainage area equal to or greater than this value 275 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 e MinWaterShedaArea The minimum upstream drainage area of a point along a channel for that point to be considered as the outlet of a watershed e MinAdjWaterShedArea Watersheds adjacent to the potential watershed outlets must have upstream drainage areas equal to or greater than this value e OutletsViewable Specifies whether the target watershed outlets are displayed within a view 1 indicates yes and 0 indicates no Target outlet nodes are based in the criteria specified by the MinWaterShedArea and MinAdjWaterShedArea keywords The following keywords are specific to the Basin portion of the watershed object a
173. e Styles Solid Dotted Short Dash Long Dash Dot Dash and Long Dot Dash e Point Styles Fill Square Half Fill Square Square Fill Triangle Half Fill Triangle Triangle Fill Marker Half Fill Marker Marker Fill Diamond Half Fill Diamond Diamond Fill Octagon Half Fill Octagon Octagon Fill Star Star X Plus and Asterisk e Visible Indicates whether the object that has been dragged into a view is visible in a new window This option can also be selected from the shortcut menu e Transparent Indicates whether the object is transparent to underlying objects in the view window e Monochrome Changes the colour display of the object to one colour The colour can be changed by clicking on the adjacent colour box e Clip Contours Only available for grid objects Only available when the display style is Filled Contours When this is toggled on areas lower than the lowest contour level are not displayed e Animate Toggles the animation of time varying data The object is not in animation mode by default e Line Width Adjusts the line size of lines in the image Maximum line width is 10 e Point Size Adjusts the point size of points in the image Maximum point size is 20 1 4 3 1 2 Vertical Display Options e Scale Controls the exaggeration of magnitude A small number reduces the exaggeration while a large number will increase it e Scalar Data In a 3D view the magnitude refers to the value of the z coordinate or dat
174. e added to the grid object they will appear as children of the grid object in the WorkSpace The source data will appear in the Source Data box of the open Properties dialog EnSim calculates the Origin and Delta based on the default Count of 100 Click on the Initialize button to create a grid with the default parameters The icon of the grid object will change indicating that the new grid object now contains data Drag the grid object and the source data item s into a 2D view Edit the Specification options of the grid until the grid has the desired location orientation and resolution The Specifications options are as follows e Origin The location of the node in the Southwest bottom left hand corner of the grid e Count The number of nodes not elements in the x and y directions e Delta The interval between nodes in the x and y directions e Angle Rotates the grid at the angle specified in the clockwise direction The origin is the point of rotation and is thus not moved e Default Value Provides a value to be given to each node of the grid For example this value might represent the elevation at each node in the grid The Reset button will return these specifications to their default values and update the grid displayed in the view 69 EnSim Core September 2007 To view the changes to the grid based on the edited specifications click on the Initialize button The grid displayed in the view will be updated
175. e changes e Free Flow If the downstream boundary has an effectively unlimited rate of discharge select this option e Node ID The downstream boundary is always considered to be Node 1 of the network e Series Click to select and load a scalar time series that describes the changes in the boundary conditions over time if you ve selected a Water Level Series or Discharge Series 200 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 boundary type For more information on the property tabs for the time series see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 4 2 1 4 Up Boundary The Up Boundary tab allows you to examine and edit the characteristics of the upstream boundary of the channel object Properties of NewGENiDRun x Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Type water Level Constant 0 Node ID 187 Sees FileName Sample Up Boundary k81 A Display Data Meta Data Rendering Lines bd Style Visible Colour Styles Lines Solid bd Points Fill Square OF Apply Cancel Figure 4 12 The Up Boundary tab describes the properties of the upstream boundary 157 Line Width ma Point Size Like the downstream boundary there are five ways to describe the properties of the upstream boundary e Type Use this box to select the general type of boundary at the upstream node of the channel e Water Level Constant If the
176. e default value is 1 indicating that sunlight is completely blocked by the canopy Snow variables Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2007 AM This is the factor controlling the influence of the aspect on the melt factor The default value is 0 TM This is the threshold temperature for snowmelt in degrees Celcius The default value is 0 Lower temperatures will encourage snowmelt while higher temperatures will discourage it CMIN This is the value of the melt factor on the winter solstice for open areas in millimetres per degree Celsius per day This represents the minimum value for the snow melt factor over the course of the year The default value is 2 DC This is the increase in melt factor between winter and summer solstices in millimetres per degree Celcius per day The default value is 2 The sum of CMIN DC gives the snowmelt factor on the summer solstice the high point for the year MRF This is the ratio between the melt factor in forest to the melt factor in open areas The default value is 0 7 At a value of 1 0 snow will melt as easily in a forst as on open ground Typically this value will range between 0 6 and 1 0 depending on the forest type coverage and the age of the forest CRFR This controls the rate at which liquid water refreezes in snowpack in millimetres per degree Celsius per day The default value is 2 This represents the opposite of the process controlled by CMIN and DC WHC
177. e extracted 2 Draw a line or polyline see Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details or open a file containing a polyline which defines the xy location of the cross section Possible files include 12s 13s shp or mif 3 Select the line object in the WorkSpace e To increase the resolution of the polyline see the section Resampling Lines and LineSets under Editing Data Items on p 76 4 Select Tools Map Object See Mapping Objects under Tools on p 98 for more details 5 Select the grid or mesh from which the cross section is to be taken and select the OK button The value applied to each point on the cross section is interpolated from the surface of the grid or mesh The cross section will appear in the WorkSpace as a child of the line and will have this icon 8 The cross section will have the name of the grid or mesh from which the cross section was taken followed by XSection new OpenLine ban a DEMS Section Figure 1 84 This cross section was taken from a data item named DEM By default cross sections appear in the WorkSpace as 3D line objects 107 EnSim Core September 2007 io ENE a Fi igure 1 85 The view on the right is the cross section extracted from the black line in the view on the lefi 1 7 3 Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data Cross sections may be extracted from non gridded data points and lines
178. e first point of the polygon Each click will create a new point with lines connecting it to the previous point and to the first point producing a closed polygon 4 To end the closed line reselect the E button or press lt Esc gt The Closed Line button will appear raised Alternatively reselect File gt New Closed Line 5 A dialog will appear asking you to enter a name a value and units for the new closed line Hint Lock the view while drawing the line using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse click may pan the view instead of extending the Closed Line 1 6 1 3 Creating a New Regular Grid Create a new grid object by selecting File New Regular Grid The grid object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty 68 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 Open the Properties dialog of the grid object and choose the GridGen tab The fields will be empty Properties of new Regular Grid GndGen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Source Data Compute Erid Cancel Figure 1 46 The GridGen tab of a Rectangular Grid with sample data 0 Def Value 0 Reset Initialize If source data 1s being used drag the source object s into the empty grid object in the WorkSpace The source data can be one or more point set xyz parcel set pcl line set 12s triangular grid t3s or rectangular grid r2s objects Once they ar
179. e length of the selected section of the river as calculated by EnSim The LENGTH attribute displayed in the lower portion of the popup window 0 218560104757 was specified in the attributes of the shape file For an object being displayed in 1D such as a time series the data attributes displayed in popup windows are slightly different from those displayed for objects in 2D or 3D A sample popup for data point of a time series in 1D 1s shown below The time series was extracted from a T3 mesh 23 EnSim Core September 2007 D5 Time 71 00 00 000 Time 25656600 000 sec Value 2 18931 Figure 1 10 A 1D Time Series popup e The title bar the darker yellow bar at the top of the popup shows from where on the mesh the time series was extracted at node 424 and the location of this node e ID refers to the order of the data point in the time series This point was the 35th data point in the data series e Time There are two Time values in a ID pop up window The first is the time displayed in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds The second Time is the same time displayed in decimal seconds This data point was recorded at 71 hours or 255 600 seconds e Value This is the measured quantity as displayed on the y axis This time series was extracted see Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 92 from a model of water depth over time After 71 hours of simulated time the depth of the water was 2 18931 m 1 4
180. each time step of the data item The first numbers in each record comprise the record header as described in the section Binary Files under ASCII and Binary Files on p 240 279 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 After the record header are a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each cell of the grid for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n is the total number of cells in the grid Each value is a 4 byte floating point number The values for each cell are listed in order beginning at zero RHI vi of Al V2 of Al ma Vn of Al V1 of A2 V2 of A2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap Vn of Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap Tang viotai vzorat Vl of Al V2o0f Al Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e V Node value VI is the value of the first cell and Vn is the value of the last cell The order of these values corresponds to the order of the cells of the grid e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the last Note The number of attributes is determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header 280 Appendix B September 2007 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE TYPES ENSIM HYDROLOGIC EnSim Hydrologic supports all of the file types supported by EnSim Core In addition to those fil
181. ead of the Node Please specify new values for the Mode at mi Cancel Ka FE 654 Y 79 651 Lance Value Figure 1 49 This edit dialog is for a triangular mesh data item e Fora regular grid the position of the node is fixed and only the value of the current data attribute at the node may be edited The dialog for a regular grid object with only one data attribute is as follows Editing the Mode at 42 r000 7 4 99558006 Please specify the new value Cancel Figure 1 50 This edit dialog is for a rectangular grid data item e The dialog for a line set object with only one data attribute is similar to that of the regular grid since only the value of the selected line can be edited Like the query dialog for the regular grid see Figure 1 41 it has only one field e Objects with multiple attributes share a similar dialog window for editing An example is shown below I2 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 Edit Attributes x 45368140 5463344 000 Elevation 467 462 ID 1673 Type 0966 BSS 1 08 BSSC 014 BCDYM 035 NG bd Cancel Figure 1 51 This dialog box is used for objects with multiple attributes The column at the left of the dialog lists the names of all the attributes the object possesses The column at the right lists the values of the attributes All attributes can be edited from this dialog not just the current attribute or the one being displayed in a view Multi
182. eam Lines can also be saved and added to 2D Line Sets 12s To save stream lines While using the live stream lines cursor within the 2D view right click to open the shortcut menu and select Save StreamLine A dialog will appear which allows the user to choose a name for the 2D Line Set to which the new StreamLine iz to be added Cancel X Enter name of object Figure 1 63 Select a Line Set name for adding the stream line The saved stream line will be added to the StreamLine set and the set is automatically added to the 2D view Further stream lines may be added to this set assuming the name is not changed by repeating the above process 1 6 4 3 The Ruler The ruler is a simple tool that can be used to measure distances in a view The units of measurement are the same as those of the view For example if the distance being measured is on a 2D triangular mesh whose units are in metres the displayed value of the measurement will also be in metres The ruler tool can only be used in a 2D view 84 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 To use the ruler click on the anu button in the tool bar Click anywhere in the 2D view This is the starting point or zero of the distance display As the cursor is moved the distance is updated and displayed next to the cursor A mouse click will create a fixed point A black dot will appear in the display and a yellow line connects this new point with the previous This can be used to d
183. earing below the title The title text is not wrapped and the legend width is sized accordingly Decorations This determines the appearance of the colour scale legend Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can be changed Font This determines the font of the title numbers and labels The Font Name and Colour can be edited Insert Clicking on this button will add an item to the legend Alternatively clicking below the last item in the list will also add an item Delete Clicking on this button will delete the selected item from the legend Item Window Each item in the legend may be selected and the item s individual properties modified Colour point style line style line width and name for each individual item can be modified by clicking on the required cell in the item window The figure above shows a drop down list of potential line style The guick legend For data objects displayed in a ID view a quick legend is available The quick legend is actually an independent legend except the item list 1s populated with all objects currently displayed in the select 1D view 57 EnSim Core September 2007 To create the quick legend select the 1D view displaying the data objects and then select Quick Legend from the 1D view s shortcut menu 1 5 10 2 The Compass The compass 1s a decoration object that illustrates the direction of a view with a four arrow direction indicat
184. ecording cc eee ee eee 64 e o create a movie 1 Le ee ees 64 1 5 14 2 Copying to the Clipboard 0 0 cc ee 66 e To copy the image of a view window to the clipboard 66 lad PILING oy Ga ae EG ob eee een ee eee OS DEYN PABLO Gy Gy ew JA 66 1 5 15 Troubleshooting in Views aaa 66 oe AA AA 67 1 6 1 Creating New Data Items 0 00 cee 67 1 6 1 1 Drawing Points cc eee 67 To create a point set 0 0 eee 67 1 6 1 2 Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines 0 68 e To create a line or polyline 0 0 0 cc ee 68 e To create a closed line or polygon 0 0 cc eee 68 1 6 1 3 Creating a New Regular Grid 0 0 cee eee 68 1 6 1 4 Creating a New Triangular Mesh 0000008 70 1 6 1 5 Creating a New Table Object 2 0 0 0 2 eee 71 1 6 2 Editing Dataltems 0 0 00 ee 11 1 6 2 1 Editing Attributes 0 0 ee 72 1 6 2 2 Editing Points eee 73 1 6 2 3 Editing Time Series 0 0 aa 73 1 6 2 4 Resampling Lines and LineSets 2 0 0000 c eae 76 1 6 3 Resampling Time Series 0 0 0 0 cc eee 78 104 Probing Dala oes teees duces osteo eee ne oee Reco ee eee ue 80 1 6 4 1 Data Probes 0 aa 80 TOPIODe Gala sa kakaw AB eee tek ra pias E aran AREEN 80 1 6 4 2 The Live Cursor ccc ee ee eee 82 1 6 4 2 1 The Live Stream Lines Cursor
185. ect e Outlet area e X Coord x coordinate of the outlet node e Y Coord y coordinate of the outlet node e Elevation elevation of the outlet node in m e Basin e Area Total drainage area at the outlet node in km 129 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 e Strahler Order indicates the order of the highest order stream within the basin 2 1 3 4 1 Creating and Removing Basins More than one basin can be defined within a watershed object To add a basin 1 Ensure that the Channels object is displayed in a 2D view 2 Select the outlet node for the watershed The outlet can be any channel node Note To select an outlet node that is currently defined as a watershed node surrounded by a circle click anywhere within that circle To choose another channel node that is within the circle of a watershed outlet node uncheck the Target Outlets Visible box in the Display tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog before selecting the desired node 3 Select the Add Basin command from the shortcut menu A new watershed boundary will appear in the active view A new basin tab will appear in the watershed Properties dialog To remove a basin 1 Select the Remove command from the Basin object s shortcut menu or select the basin object in the WorkSpace and choose Edit 5Remove from the menu bar 130 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 2 2 HYDROLOGIC TOOLS 2 2 1 Watershed Tools There are a variety of watershed
186. ect that appears in the WorkSpace Arbitrary keyword values may be added using the button The new keywords will be written to the standard EnSim file header See File Headers on p 236 for more information about keywords and file headers Read only fields are greyed text 1 4 3 6 Applying Changes to an Object s Properties 1 When the parameters in the Properties dialog are satisfactory press 8 ppl to apply the new parameters to the object and keep the Properties dialog open or press OK to apply the parameters and close the Properties dialog 1 4 3 7 Copying Data Item Properties Display properties and colour scales of data items can be copied and applied to other data items The steps are as follows To copy data item properties 1 Select the data item with the desired display style and colour scale 2 Select the Copy Display Style command from the Edit menu 3 Select the data item to which the display style and colour scale are to be applied 30 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 4 Select the Paste Display Style command from the Edit menu All properties on the Display Style and Colour Scale tabs will be applied to the data item with the following exceptions e Style wireframe surface etc will not be copied if the objects are of different types and have different possible styles For example a 2D line set and a rectangular grid have no styles in common As a result styles cannot be copied from one
187. ed as radians per metre At the node a positive value indicates a convex shape a negative value indicates a concave shape and a zero value indicates a flat shape To extract curvature select the grid in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface Curvatures from the menu bar There are four methods available for computing curvature on regular grid e Profile Curvature a measure of the rate of change of slope in the direction of the slope Profile curvature describes the shape of the surface in the direction of the slope e Plan Curvature a measure of the rate of change of aspect along an elevation contour Plan curvature describes the shape of the surface perpendicular to the direction of the slope 89 EnSim Core September 2007 e Tangential Curvature the product of the Plan Curvature and the sine of the slope Tangential curvature describes the shape of the surface in a vertical plane perpendicular to the direction of the slope e Total Curvature a measure of the curvature of the surface in all directions Note a zero value may mean that a concave shape in one direction offsets a convex shape in another direction at that particular node Note There are no methods available for computing curvatures on a triangular meshes 2 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 69 Profile curvature shown in a 2Dview 1 6 5 2 Extracting Residuals The extract residuals tool calculates the resultant or residual vector from all vector
188. ed from a Digital Elevation Model DEM e At algorithm based on an algorithm used by Ehlschlaeger at the U S Army Construction Engineering Research Lab The At algorithm is a tree search algorithm The A algorithm does not modify the DEM which allows for more genuine channel delineation This algorithm is iterative and does not have to deal with deep recursion and the subsequent memory problems associated with large DEMs e Depressionless DEM algorithm developed by Susan Jenson The Jenson depressionless DEM algorithm delineates a watershed by lifting nodes within the DEM to remove all depressions A depressionless DEM allows for simple channel delineation as there is a down or zero slope at every node This algorithm has been implemented recursively which may lead to memory problems with very large DEMs The text box located below the flow algorithm options briefly describes the flow algorithm chosen If no DEM is linked to the watershed the box will inform you that a DEM is required To delineate a watershed 1 Select the desired flow algorithm from the Flow Algorithm list box 2 Select the Generate button Information on the modifications to the watershed and progress of the watershed delineation appear in the following dialog Generating flow data Using the AT Search algorithm Computing flow areas Identifying drainage channels Searching for default basin outlet Generating default basin Iden
189. eeeeeeeees 47 flight paths 62 ER E E 30 page setup ICPON VIEW sssrini tri 52 SAGE AA 24 LEDS aaa 25 coordinate systems 25 26 ellipsoids Zi VIC WINS samaan DARAANAN 5 R Rating Curve Analysis RCA 145 background and theory 145 polynomial curve 146 POWET CUTVE u m ana 145 CRC ANS airan e 146 303 EnSim Core file ii APA 283 format AG AA AA 284 DINA ANG 284 TING RCAUCE naaabot 283 keywords ccecceeeeeeees 283 OOO siare 146 manipulating ul 148 AA E E A 148 Manipulating u s 149 example umaasa 150 152 OPENING ice a eneaeeos 154 SA T 154 31 a E AE PA 149 RCA See Rating Curve Analysis Rectangular Grid u 1 1 242 acl AA 211 file format A TS 278 multiframe 279 BINAN GA 279 AN AA PAWI creating a sloping structure in 110 data organization 243 file format a 243 POGI pacer eee 244 DIARY PA AA 244 AA 6 hc ee rei 242 Se C2 aan ne ee 10 ICOM 5s2sditaseeeashencdoisasrsenseiaavaniocenes 4 NGCLOL asim E 10 KON AA a 4 Relief Potential 137 Report View Uu 49 ROT AA 84 S Selection Info Uu 81 Shortcut menu VIEN nA AANO 5 304 September 2007 Simultaneous Displays 108 Slope Analysis 1 144 Slopes Uu 87 Spherical View cccccceeeeeeees 46 SRTM Grid file 2 0 0 0 ee 271 Statu
190. egative or vice versa Pi 3 1415926535897932 abs absolute value sqrt square root log10 logarithm base 10 log natural logarithm exp exponential base e sin sine COS cosine tan tangent asin inverse sine arcsine acos inverse cosine arccosine atan inverse tangent arctangent sinh hyperbolic sine cosh hyperbolic cosine tanh hyperbolic tangent min returns the minimum value max returns the maximum value mean returns the arithmetic mean average of all values sigma returns the standard deviation of all values parentheses D2R convert degrees to radians R2D convert radian to degrees gt A gt B returns the greater of A and B lt A gt B returns the lesser of A and B September 2007 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 For any expression standard operator precedence applies Operands for trigonometric functions are in radians Examples of valid expressions include o A e 3 45 e A B C D e A exp B C log10 D e chs A pi A B e cos B sinh A e cos A pi 180 e A lt B 105 EnSim Core September 2007 1 7 How TO HINTS AND TRICKS This section is intended to provide you with a quick reference on how to accomplish some useful tasks with EnSim The items discussed here are based on the fundamental EnSim functions but may not be readily obvious 1 7 1 Draping a 3D Image Onto a DEM EnSim allows the draping of a georefere
191. enerate surface runoff These regions include both flat areas and areas with large contributing upstream drainage The wetness index of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed gt Extract Wetness Index from the menu bar If a basin is selected the wetness index value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The wetness index surface can be viewed ina 2D or 3D view 135 Figure 2 23 These images depict a Wetness Index map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 7 Extracting Stream Power The stream power index like the wetness index is a function of the drainage area and the slope Higher stream power values may indicate regions of the DEM that are more likely to generate surface runoff The stream power index of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Stream Power from the menu bar If a basin is selected the stream power value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The stream power surface can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view EE ial 30 view 2 Figure 2 24 These images depict a Stream Power map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 136 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 2 2 1 8 Extracting Relief Potential Relief Potential is the difference between the average upslope elev
192. ent Medium is Image the status bar shows the resolution of the image being created and the current mouse position in pixels from the top left corner as well as the current zoom level Ready Image 640x460 445 347 70 So a KI 49 EnSim Core September 2007 1 5 9 2 The Report View Window Tool Bar Each Report View window features a built in tool bar at the top These buttons allow access to drawing objects the zoom level of the view clipboard functions and the snap to grid ie Hd Eoo e 70 This menu lets you select the scale at which the report is displayed The minimum size is 10 1 10th of actual size and the maximum 1s 500 You can type ina value or select from the drop down box e This button allows you to insert a text label on the report Through the Properties dialog each label can be customized for colour background border font weight and justification To change the text of a label double click on it twice See Labels under View Decorations on p 59 for more information El This button allows you to draw an arrow on the report Click on the button then click on the report where you would like the tail of the arrow to be Click again to connect the two points with a line If you continue to click each point will extend the arrow To stop click on the button again or press lt Esc gt To turn an arrow into a line open up the Properties dialog of the arrow double click on it to select
193. ent allows you to describe the location and type of each model boundary as well as the location of internal channel junctions The boundary types allowed in the model include constant or time varying water elevation boundaries constant or time varying discharge boundaries and reflective boundaries Internal junctions can be either diverging or converging as defined by the direction of the computation The network permits even complex river topographies to be schematized and modelled 4 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 4 1 1 Basic Equations The basic equations used in GENID are the one dimensional shallow water equations Navier Stokes equations under the hydrostatic assumption for unsteady flow in open channels e The motion equation 2 BU BU 8H SU l ee UU TUN Ot Ox Ox CR Sou e The continuity equation OU oH eee E kaka ae Ba ta where e x longitudinal distance along the river 7n e f time s5 e H elevation of water surface above a specific datum m e U mean cross sectional velocity in the channel direction m s e g acceleration due to gravity m 7 e v viscosity coefficient 189 The GENID Model September 2007 e C Chezy friction coefficient e R hydraulic radius 7n e A channel area m B channel width m values between Bop and Bpr e dr tributary discharge per unit length m s In GENID the hydraulic radius R defined as the ratio between the channel area 4 and wetted perim
194. er EnSim time series with the addition of the Subset tab 181 HYDAT Database September 2007 Properties of CAMPBELLFORD Station MaxTemp MinT emp Hain Snow Precip SUG Display Data Subset Meta Data Include Records Start 1986706701 M Hanuam fY July M Febray M August End 199771 PEE fe March W September M April M October Deset M May November EE W June M December Figure 3 18 Each of the six time series has a Subset tab 3 2 5 1 Subset The Subset tab allows you to adjust the temporal range of data shown in the 1D view Initially the entire data set will be shown To create a temporal subset 1 Click on either the Start or End data boxes You can adjust the date by typing the new data or by clicking on the button If the 7 button is selected a calendar will appear Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 26 2 28 29 30 d 3 4 5 6 7 T10 11 T2 13 14 15 1 Figure 3 19 This calendar is used to change the start and end dates of a temporal subset 2 Click on the date to which you would like to change the start or end time e Click on _4 Jor to adjust the month backward or forward or click on the calendar title to select a specific month 182 Section 3 2 COCD DATABASE September 2007 e Click on the year and use the up and down arrows to change the year 3 To remove months from the data set click on the check box next to the month name on the Subset tab
195. er storage from glaciers within the watershed in mm over the simulated period The following results are shown as attributes of a time varying 2 dimensional triangular mesh They are best examined in a 2D view window and can be animated to see the changes of the 232 Section 5 3 The HBV EC Model September 2007 data over time For more information on examining time varying data see Animation on p 60 e Temperature This attribute shows the temperature of the air for each altitude band in degrees Celsius over the simulated period e Rainfall This attribute shows the rainfall in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period e Snowfall This attribute shows the snowfall in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period e Soil Moisture This attribute shows the soil moisture in millimetres for each area over the simulated period e Soil Infiltration This attribute shows the soil infiltration in millimetres for each area over the simulated period e Water Release This attribute shows the water release in millimetres for each area over the simulated period e Evaporation This attribute shows the evaporation rate in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period e Snow Water Equivalent This attribute shows the snow water equivalent in millimetres for each area over the simulated period e Glacier Ice Melt
196. ered to be an arbitrary time If the year and month are non zero the time stamp is a date The remaining content of a binary file depends on the data type 241 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 NATIVE FILE FORMATS 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v Two dimensional rectangular or regular grids have orthogonal evenly spaced data points connected by straight lines The grid may be georeferenced The surface created by the connected points lies in the xy plane of a Cartesian coordinate system The file extensions for 2D rectangular grids are r2s and r2v Their icons are gg and respectively The s in r2s indicates that the file contains scalar data and similarly the v in r2v indicates vector data Both r2s and r2v files may contain time varying data which is always stored in a binary format Non time varying files may be saved as ASCII or binary data The scalar rectangular grid r2s can have one or more data attributes File Headers r2s r2v The contents of the header is similar for each type of rectangular grid A sample header from a non time varying grid is shown below tit HHH HH HH HH HT EE HH HE HE EH EH EE HEE EE EE EE EEE EO EEE EH EE EO EEE EEE H FileType r2s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType 2D Rect Scalar it Application EnSimHydrologic Version Za WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM ma BO a NG a Ga AG AE PG a
197. erformance A Canadian version of the HBV model has been maintained by Dr Dan Moore UBC since the mid 1980s Moore 1993 developed and tested a glacier routine for the model In 2000 Dr Moore provided the source code for the model then written in Turbo Pascal to Environment Canada and current model development has since been co managed by Environment Canada and UBC The Canadian version 1s referred to as the HBV EC Environment Canada model 5 1 2 Algorithms Specific to the Model The HBV model was modified to match changes specified in the Lindstrom et al 1997 paper The HBV EC model represents the Canadian version of the HBV model There are slight differences between the Swedish and Canadian versions of the model which are discussed below The reader is directed to Bergstrom 1995 Lindstrom et al 1997 and Moore 1993 for descriptions of model routines This section describes the main components of HBV EC that are distinct from other available versions of the HBV model 211 The HBV EC Model September 2007 5 1 2 1 Climate Zones Climate zone representation was added to the HBV EC model to better represent the lateral climatic gradients which may occur across a basin Each climate zone 1s associated with a single climate station and unique parameter values for specifying the distribution of climate within the zone such as temperature and precipitation lapse rates Runoff from a climate zone is lumped through a series of f
198. ers 225 simulation 286 elevation band parameters 228 properties oe eee cece eees 193 land class parameters 228 channel anan 197 met tab paaa 229 creating ul 197 NEW PArAMGIETS ula mana nsasans 213 editing simulation panel 21 node u s 199 outlet elevation 224 Segment ila 198 routing iaaaaas 224 opening ul 198 simulation times 224 down boundary uma 200 watershed panel 213 Simulation oo cece eee eee 193 watershed creating 214 SSMS aako ANAN 194 watershed identifying basin 215 TUN type Laan 194 watershed importing 214 temporal umm 194 model up boundary sss 201 KEUS ungaa anda UG akan 232 301 EnSim Core running simulation 231 FETO DOOS waaa pa 212 snow melt factor variation 212 the HBV EC model 0 211 watershed routing ccccccceeee 212 Mp secede PAA 2 HIN e E 106 How AN 106 classify a GeoTIFF image 114 create a sloping structure 110 digitize from an imported image 112 display isoline outlined contours 109 display two features of an item 108 drape an image onto a DEM 106 extract a cross section from gridded data 107 from points and line data 108 extract a spatial subset 111 extract a temporal subset 111 georeference a GeoTIFF 113 HYDAT DEO SS E ea r TE E 171
199. es EnSim Hydrologic supports the following file types Watflood map file map Map files are displayed as r2c grids but the file format is quite different See your WATFLOOD documentation for the format of map files Map files may be created edited and saved with EnSim Hydrologic Watflood output file wfo Format designed for WATFLOOD by CHC This is the output file from a WATFLOOD hydrologic model The components of a Watflood output file are in binary r2c format Each component of the wfo file can be saved individually as either a single time frame ASCII r2c file or as a multiple time frame binary r2c file See the file format for 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c on p 277 for more information Watflood Met file met Distributed rain data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Rad file rad Radar data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Rag file rag Rain gauge data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Rel file rel Reservoir release data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Shd file shd WATFLOOD basin data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Snw file snw Snow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Spl Pit file plt Computed stream flow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Str file str Stre
200. es can be extracted from any object in the WorkSpace having data that varies with time The resulting time series can be viewed in a ID window To extract a time series 1 Select the data item in the WorkSpace from which the time series is to be extracted If you will be extracting a time series at multiple points you must create a point set before continuing See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 67 for more details 2 Select Tools Extract TimeSeries 3 Select At Selected Point At Multiple Points Constrained By or Along a Line e If At Selected Point is chosen a time series is extracted at the currently selected component s location Probe the data at one node See Probing Data under Tools on p 80 for more details e If At Multiple Points is chosen a point set must have been created See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 67 for more details Once the new point set is created select At Multiple Points A list of available point sets from which the time series may be extracted within the current object are shown in the dialog window that appears Once a point set is selected spatial interpolation is used to extract a time series for each point The series are then displayed in the WorkSpace e If Along a Line is chosen a line must have been created See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details Once the new l
201. escribe the table attributes columns File Format tb0 ASCII Table files are always stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n columns where n is the total number of data attributes The attribute values for each data index begins on a new line The first value on each line is the value for the first attribute the second value is the value for the second attribute and so on Each new line of data represents the next data index If the StartTime and DeltaT keywords are present in the header than each data index represents a time with the first index at startTime and the second at StartTime plus one DeltaT and so on If StartTime and DeltaT are not present than the data is associated with integer indexes only Binary There are no binary table file formats 264 Appendix A September 2007 Velocity Roses vr1 The Velocity Rose file object contains the probabilities of occurrence of velocities binned by magnitude and direction The global sum of the table is 1 The icon used to represent the velocity rose object in the WorkSpace is The file extension of a velocity rose object is vr1 File Headers vr1 An example velocity rose file is shown below HEE HH HH HH HH EE EH HH EH EE EH EH HH EH EEE EH EE HE EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EOE EEE EEE EE HH FileType vri ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType Velocity Rose it Application EnSimHydrologic Version HAPIS
202. eset Exponential _ Reset LT Digits Ee M Show Legend Options Lancel JE Apply Cancel Figure 1 33 The Colour Scale Legend Options dialog of a 2D view The Properties dialog is shown to its right The colour scale legend properties that can be edited are as follows e Title Subtitle Both titles are shown at the same font size with the subtitle appearing below the title The title text is not wrapped and the legend width is sized accordingly e Decorations This determines the appearance of the colour scale legend Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can be changed e Number Format This determines the appearance of the colour level numbers An option button selects between Default Floating Point or Exponential formats The number of Digits after the decimal place can be defined for floating point and exponential formats e Labels This determines the appearance of the colour level labels 55 EnSim Core September 2007 e Use Range Labels If this is toggled off only the number representing the colour level is displayed When it is toggled on two numbers of a range representing each colour level are displayed e Separator The separator between the two numbers of the range The default separator is the word to e Above The label of the top colour level indicating a range greater than a certain number The default above label is the word above e
203. eter is approximated to the ratio between the channel area 4 and the channel width B 4 1 2 Geometric Requirements The formulation of a model based on the finite difference method requires that discrete segments be used to represent physical topography or geomorphology The model consists of simulation parameters a channels object and the upstream and downstream boundary nodes The network object consists of both channel segments and nodes The nodes are a series of points that link the segments to one another Although the Z component of the node is usually set to the level of the channel bottom for a node this value is only used to assist in visualization The model uses the cross sections of the adjacent segments to determine the level of the channel bottom at a node The segment is defined as the channel reach between two nodes and is associated with a single cross section object The cross section associated with a segment applies to the entire length of the segment 2151 x KN Nodes F Segment hiz Cr055 5Eectons Figure 4 1 The network object is shown in black while the cross section object is shown in blue 190 Section 4 1 General Background September 2007 For additional information on cross sections see Channel under Setting Up Simulation Parameters on p 197 As shown in Figure 4 2 the cross section is used to determine the cross sectional parameters cross sectional area channel width and elevatio
204. evel Conc and Load For each time series linked to the station a tab will appear in the properties dialog These time series are similar to other EnSim time series with the addition of the Subset tab Properties of 07KF005 x Station How Level Cone Load Display Data Subset Meta Data Include Records Start 1960707701 M anuani fY July M February M August End 2000 1 27 W March MW September f2 April f October Deset M May M November Ba ff June M December Figure 3 9 Each of the four time series has a Subset tab 176 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2007 3 1 5 1 Subset The Subset tab allows you to adjust the temporal range of data shown in the ID view Initially the entire data set will be shown To create a temporal subset 1 Click on either the Start or End data boxes You can adjust the date by typing the new data or by clicking on the button If the 2 button is selected a calendar will appear 1 20 3 4 5 SB 7 8 9 EID 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 Figure 3 10 This calendar is used to change the start and end dates of a temporal subset 2 Click on the date to which you would like to change the start or end time e Clickon 4 Jor to adjust the month backward or forward or click on the calendar title to select a specific month e Click on the year and use the up and down arrows to change the year 3 To remove months
205. f d gn gt GE a il ly I Pe 5 m j E b Prk ae g 1 M Show Legend Apply Cancel Ka Pa E ig AA a L e TUT E e e a a Figure 1 93 Land Classification visualized from a GeoTIFF image kr ri 772000 116 2 ENSIM HYDROLOGIC EnSim Hydrologic is an EnSim application that provides an integrated numerical modelling environment for hydrological models such as WATFLOOD HBV EC or GENID EnSim Hydrologic consists of the core EnSim features common to all EnSim applications plus additional features that are specific to hydrological modelling This section describes the interface and tools specific to EnSim Hydrologic EnSim Hydrologic allows you to create much of the information required to run a hydrological model by creating a watershed object From the watershed object both the map file required by the hydrological model WATFLOOD and the HBV EC parameter file can be generated The tools available in EnSim Hydrologic are integrated with general EnSim tools allowing grids spatial GIS type information and model results to be viewed and analyzed 2 1 WATERSHED OBJECTS A watershed object 1s a very important data item in EnSim Hydrologic since it contains the basic geographical and geophysical data necessary to run a hydrologic model The watershed object is created in EnSim Hydrologic from a regular rectangular grid of georeferenced elevations This grid can be generated by EnSim from a
206. f data pertaining to a segment of the network e Node Identifies the list of segments that connect at a particular node File Formats n3s ASCII Data that does not vary with time is stored in ASCII format The file excerpt above is an example of an ASCII network file The data is divided into two sections The first lists the values of the data attributes associated with each segment as well as the x y and z coordinates ofeach point that makes up a segment The second part lists how many segments 267 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 of the network meet at each node which segments connect and the order in which they are connected In the first section of the file the start of information about a particular segment is marked by the keyword Segment The keyword is followed on the same line by the segment ID number the number of points in the segment and the values of any data attributes associated with the segment On the lines following the Segment keyword the x y and z coordinates of each point are listed in order from the head to the tail of the segment The first and last points given for each segment are the coordinates of the nodes to which it is connected The list of points for a particular segment ends with the EndSegment keyword In the second section of the file following the list of segments the nodes of the network are listed with each node marked by the keyword Node On the same line after the keyword t
207. f the file type 276 Appendix B September 2007 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c A 2 dimensional rectangular cell grid is similar to an ordinary 2D rectangular grid The primary difference is that the cell grid contains information about the area enclosed by the lines and vertices of the grid as opposed to information at the vertices The ordering of the cells in a 2D rectangular cell grid begins at the bottom left corner of the grid and proceeds to the right along the bottom row When the end of a row is reached the numbering resumes at the left end of the next row up Figure B 2 The cells in this grid are numbered from I to 40 Keywords in the header of the r2c file are used to indicate the coordinates of the origin of the erid the height and width of each cell the number of cells in the x and y directions of the grid and the angle of the grid From this information the coordinates of each cell of the grid are determined File Headers r2c An example of a header from an r2c grid is shown below HEE HH HH EH HH EE EH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EEE HE EO a EEE HOE EOE EEE EE EOE EE EEE EEE EE EE FileType r2c ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType 2D Rect Cell it Application EnSimHydrologic Version Ca oe WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM a AA AA AA AA AA E E Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown it AttributeName 1
208. ference method is used e Finite Difference 4 neighbour The slope is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s neighbours in the four cardinal directions only A 2nd order finite difference method is used e Steepest Descent The slope at each node is the steepest downhill slope found among the eight neighbours If a node has a lower elevation than it s neighbours a slope value of zero is set for that node There is one method available for computing slope on a triangular mesh e T3 Element Average The slope of each node of the mesh is computed as the average slope of all elements connected to the node The slope of each element is calculated using cross products Once the slope option has been chosen a Query dialog will appear Select the units for the extracted slope Degrees or Percent Cancel Select the UNITS for the Extracted SLOPE Grid Figure 1 66 This dialog asks for the units of the extracted slope The new slope surface will be created as a child of the original object and can be saved in the same format as the original grid 87 EnSim Core September 2007 2 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 67 Slopes extracted using the eight neighbour finite difference option shown in a 2Dview 1 6 5 1 3 Extracting Aspects The aspect of a regular grid or triangular mesh can be extracted as a surface The slope value is calculated at each node based on the elevation of the node and that of its ne
209. from the data set click on the check box next to the month name on the Subset tab 4 Click the Reset button to include the entire data set 5 Select the ppl button to apply your changes If you have selected any dates outside the range of data for the station the date will reset to the maximum for that parameter 177 HYDAT Database September 2007 3 2 CDCD DATABASE 3 2 1 Introduction The Canadian Daily Climate Data CDCD contains daily temperature precipitation and snow on the ground data for almost 8000 locations in Canada EnSim Hydrologic provides a graphical interface to the CDCD database with which you can query display and analyze the data associated with each station 3 2 2 Accessing the Database The CDCD data can be accessed directory from the DVD or the directories can be copied to a local hard drive or to a network drive EnSimHydrologic first looks for the CDCD 1 directory below the location of the EnSimHydrologic exe file e g C Program Files CHC EnSimHydrologic CDCD 1 then if not found the application searches all drive letters from C to Z and selects the first location containing the CDCD 1 directory as the locations of the database Note The files DATA 101 and INDEX 101 must be present in the a DCNIM directory To access the CDCD database 1 Select File Environmental Data Open CDCD from the menu bar 2 The CDCD stations can be accessed for all of Canada or by individual region
210. g the shortcut menu of the data item The isolines are added to the WorkSpace as children of the original object and can be saved as an 12s 13s xyz shp or mif file 1 6 5 4 Extracting Paths The extract path tool can be used only with time varying parcel data A set of lines is created following the path of a selected parcel from the beginning to the end of the dataset To extract a path 1 Select the object in the WorkSpace for which the path is to be extracted 2 Select the parcel in the object for which the path is to be extracted 3 Select Tools Extract Path A new path file will appear added to the WorkSpace as a child of the object 1 6 5 5 Extracting Points A point set can be extracted from any object that is composed of point data with z or attribute data including grids meshes point data xyz and cross sections 3D lines 91 EnSim Core September 2007 To extract points from a data item 1 Select the data item in the WorkSpace from which the points are to be extracted 2 Draw a closed polyline around the region of the data item from which the points are to be extracted See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more detalls 3 Select Tools gt Extract Points Choose the appropriate newly drawn polygon from the list A new point set will be added to the WorkSpace as a child of the data item 1 6 5 6 Extracting Time Series Time seri
211. georeferenced point set or digital elevation maps e g CDED DTED DEM etc may be used directly The elevation data of the grid is used by EnSim Hydrologic to generate the channels or flow paths of the water as it travels overland to the watershed outlet and the boundary of the watershed See Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details on grid generation Accordingly a watershed object contains three object types e aprocessed DEM digital elevation map grid in the format of a regular or rectangular grid that describes the topography of the land e a network that describes the path of the flow of surface water through the watershed e a watershed boundary or basin there may be more than one basin in a watershed object In the WorkSpace the watershed object will appear similar to the following example WorkSpace Ep Data Items GB TestWabershed kai BA DEM Bel Channels Stream Order a Basin 1 dl Basin 2 ee ee etn a Figure 2 1 An example of a watershed object 117 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 1 1 Opening an Existing Watershed Object To open an existing watershed object select File 53Open from the menu bar or click the button Watershed objects have the file extension wsd Once opened the watershed object will be listed under the Data Items category of the WorkSpace 2 1 2 Importing a Watershed from Topaz Watershed files created with the Topaz
212. get Outlets Visible checkbox in the Display tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog i Cae Figure 2 14 Watershed outlet nodes are indicated by circles on this image To select an outlet node 1 Double click anywhere within the watershed outlet node s circle To select a channel node near a watershed outlet node 1 On the Display tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog uncheck the Target Outlets Visible box The circles surrounding the outlet nodes will disappear 2 Double click on the channel node Channel nodes are located at the endpoints of each channel line segment 128 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 Figure 2 15 The arrows indicate nodes along this channel segment 2 1 3 4 Basin or Watershed Boundaries The watershed boundary is an 1soline that defines the watershed The watershed or basin consists of all the nodes of the DEM that drain towards a watershed outlet node Watershed boundaries can be saved independently of the watershed object Properties of New Watershed Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Display ata Spatial Meta Data Outlet 2 Coord 44h 40 Area 535 84000000 km t Coord FO 600 Flevation T77 4297 Strahler Order 3 Basin Figure 2 16 The properties of a basin object cannot be directly edited The following properties visible on the Data tab as read only fields cannot be edited without changing the watershed obj
213. gic September 2007 5 Select the Apply button To remove a known flow station 1 Click on the station on the Computed Flow tab of the Properties dialog 2 Click Remove 2 2 1 15 Slope Analysis The Slope Analysis tool allows for the estimation of average slope along a user selected section of the channel To launch the Slope Analysis Dialog 1 Click on the channel object in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Watershed Slope Analysis from the menu bar This will launch the dialog Ensuring the channel object is in either a 2D or 3D view 1 In the view click on a point that represents either the upstream or downstream boundary of a channel section of interest 2 Select the Point 1 button 3 In the view click on the other boundary point of the channel section of interest Make sure this point is either downstream or upstream of point 1 4 Select the Point 2 button 5 Select the 4pply button The average slope along the selected channel section will automatically be computed and displayed within the dialog An example is shown below 144 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools ka Y Foint 1 434100 5001 000 Point 2 423200 4383600 Average Slope 0 001450 mm Selected Paint 1 4 SS i j pod 4 NEAN d MI j ff E Fl Figure 2 34 The Slope Analysis dialog and selected channel points within a view 2 2 2 Rating Curve Analysis RCA 2 2 2 1 Background and Theo
214. ginning frame for the subset and under End enter the last frame for the subset 5 Enter the variable letter as the expression in the Expression box For example if you selected the variable A in step 3 enter A in the Expression box See The Calculator for Gridded Objects under Calculators on p 100 for more information 6 Click on the Evaluate button to create the new temporal subset Ensure that the new subset has a name and units Calculator x Varnables Start End Value 1 33 Result Mame Temporal Subset Units Mm Cancel Figure 1 89 This calculator is being used to extract a temporal subset of time varying data 1 7 9 Digitizing from an Imported Image Digitizing from a georeferenced image is useful for creating or defining roads landmarks or contour lines that may affect a model or help in the visualization of a spatial domain To digitize from an imported image 1 Import a GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 112 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2007 2 Drag the image into the 2D view 3 Create a new line set following the path of the viewed object in the image See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details For each line drawn define its value as something representative of the object viewed For example you might define secondary roads as 2 and main roads as 1
215. grid in a 3D view to see the effect of the addition of the triangulation Es Slope Example i Figure 1 88 A regular grid with a sloping structure as well as the point set and triangulation used to create the structure shown in a 3D view 1 7 7 Extracting a Spatial Subset From a Larger Grid It may be necessary for you to define a spatial subset of a larger grid To define a spatial subset from a rectangular grid 1 Open a 2D rectangular grid into the WorkSpace 2 Create a new regular grid by selecting File 5New See Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details 3 Ensure that the spatial domain of the new rectangular grid is within the already opened rectangular grid 4 Map the original rectangular grid to the new rectangular grid See Mapping Objects under Tools on p 98 for more details 1 7 8 Extracting a Temporal Subset of Time Varying Gridded Data The calculator can be used to extract a temporal subset of time varying gridded data 111 EnSim Core September 2007 To extract a temporal subset 1 Open a time varying gridded data item in the WorkSpace Ensure that the object is highlighted 2 Select Tools Calculator When the Calculator appears click the list box for a variable 3 Select the time varying data items from the options available An edit box will appear below Start and End 4 Enter the range for the temporal subset Under Start enter the be
216. ha aa bA AT ANA cued 1 1 1 1 The EnSim Simulation Environment 005 1 lah GEN Sand aNG WAGE AA NG abi 1 1 1 3 Getting Help with EnSim aaa 2 1 1 3 1 Conventions in EnSim Help aaa 2 1 2 THE WORKSPACE nangaaigbI ka ERANO EBE DAANAN eae owas ANDY 3 1 2 1 Managing Objects in the WorkSpace 3 1 2 2 Saving and Loading The WorkSpace 6 e To Save a WorkSpace 0 ene 6 To Load a WorkSpace cnx beds be ew deed bod aw ee Bie ea 6 1 3 THE ENSIM INTERFACE 22222 25 ees 7 kot Da AA Dee od we Eb Woe ats ko WAG NOOLBAN earner at kUNG w arr a BALL Be SE ae 8 13o SMOPCUTIVIGNUS 35 ae Scat Ka ns sp aia cordate eB iy doit 2 8 Gee eae ed AA 8 ia IDATAITEMO aaa a ae are AA ae ee alee Beals 9 1 4 1 Loading and Importing Data Items 10 1 4 1 1 Native Data Items a 10 1 4 1 2 Foreign Data Items 2 cesses on Shae LYN a KI Da eee we 11 1 4 2 Saving and Exporting Data Items 005 11 1 4 3 Properties of Data Items 0 0 AA 16 1 4 3 1 Display Properties aa 17 1 4 3 1 1 Rendering Options en 17 1 4 3 1 2 Vertical Display Options 0 0 aaa 18 1 4 3 1 3 Other Display Options 0 aaa 19 LAS Z COOU SCA haaa a NANA han Nah hon EL BAN GAAN 19 e To edit the colour scale aaa 20 e To apply a previously created colour scale
217. he node ID number the number of segments that meet at the node and the ID numbers of each segment are listed If a segment ID 1s preceded by a minus sign the node is located at the tail of the segment After the list of segment IDs the values of any data attributes associated with the node are listed Binary Networks containing data that varies over time is stored in binary format The geometry of the network does not vary over time Fach segment described in the file consists of the same points listed in the same order although the attributes associated with the segments may change The header of the file and the section describing the geometry of the network are stored in ASCII format so that they can be examined with a text editor The remainder of the file containing the time varying data is in binary format This section contains the data attributes possessed by both the segments and nodes of the network Essentially a binary network file is similar to an ASCII network file with time varying binary data appended The binary portion of the network file contains a record of attribute values for each time step The record header for these records follows the same format as the general record header for binary files described in the section Binary Files under ASCII and Binary Files on p 240 After the record header is a 4 byte integer that states the number of data attributes Following that value is another 4 byte integer whi
218. he coordinates of the nodes and the connectivity of the nodes forming the elements There are five records which contain this data The first two records contain the x and y coordinates of the nodes Each of these contains n floating point values where n is the total number of nodes in the mesh as indicated by the NodeCount keyword The first position in the record refers to node 1 the second to node 2 and so on The next three records specify the node connectivity There are m integer values in each of these records where m 1s the total number of elements or triangles in the mesh as indicated by the ElementCount keyword The first record contains the values for the first node in each element The next two hold the values for the second and third nodes in each element respectively e X X coordinate 4 byte floating point e Y Y coordinate 4 byte floating point e N1 Node 1 of the mesh 4 byte integer e Nn Node n of the mesh the last node 4 byte integer e E1 Element 1 of the mesh 4 byte integer e Em Element m of the mesh the last element 4 byte integer 248 Appendix A September 2007 Following the description of the mesh which does not vary with time are the values of the data attributes which may vary with time Since the values at each mesh point may change with time each time step must list a new set of mesh values Fach data record begins with a record header See Binary Files under ASCII and Bi
219. he shortcut menu the Edit menu or the Display tab of the object s Properties dialog box A data item can only be displayed in one view window at a time To display the data item in multiple windows a copy of the file must be opened for each view window For example if a regular grid is to be displayed in three view windows there must be three copies of the regular grid displayed in the WorkSpace under Data Items Each copy of the grid is then dropped into one of the appropriate view windows e Removing an object from another Data items can be removed from the Data Items hierarchy by selecting the data item in the WorkSpace and using the lt Delete gt key or the Remove command in the shortcut menu or the Edit menu Removing a data item from Data Items has the effect of removing or closing the object from the application e Removing data items from a view Data items can be removed from a view by selecting the data item within the list of views and using the lt Delete gt key by selecting Remove in the data item s shortcut menu or by selecting Edit Remove from the menu bar e Viewing an Object s properties Double clicking on an object opens its Properties dialog The Properties dialog of a selected object can also be accessed from the Edit menu or the object s shortcut menu e Viewing an object s shortcut menu Right clicking on an object displays its shortcut menu EnSim Core September 2007 e Renaming an object After open
220. he surface is to be extracted Select Tools Extract Surface Then choose the option for the type of value to be extracted from each node Temporal Maximums Temporal Minimums Temporal Ranges Temporal Sums Temporal Mean or Temporal StdDev 3 A Range Query dialog will appear Enter the range of frames to be scanned for the specified values The default is the total number of frames in the time series Range Query x The object FREE SURFACE has 133 data frames Please select the START and END frames Lancel for this operation Start End 133 Figure 1 65 This dialog asks for the range of frames to be scanned 86 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 The new surface will be created as a child of the original object and can be saved in the same format as the original grid or mesh file 1 6 5 1 2 Extracting Slopes The slope of a regular grid or triangular mesh can be extracted as a surface The slope value 1s calculated at each node based on the elevation of that node and that of its neighbours The units for slope may be either degrees or percent To extract the slopes select the grid or mesh in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface Slopes from the menu bar There are three methods available for computing slope on regular grid e Finite Difference 8 neighbour The slope is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s eight neighbours A 3rd order finite dif
221. he view window size Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here 1s 8 As the number of divisions is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter is used as a guideline for the number of divisions 5 7 The 3D View Window The 3D view window displays data in a perspective view The default view shows a perspective from the negative x negative y and positive z octant The 3D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the 3D view A new 3D View window can be opened by pressing the button in the Tool bar The sample 3D view shown below displays the same objects as the sample of the 2D view 42 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 Figure 1 24 This 3D view shows the same data item as the 2D view on p 35 1 5 7 1 The 3D Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window For the active 3D window the view s current coordinate system and the location of the crosshairs 1s displayed as well as the active type of view manipulation ROT for rotation TRN for translation Ready LL GR580 0 360 123 127 49 376 0 007 ROT KA 1 5 7 2 Manipulating the 3D View In EnSim 3D space there are two ways in which the view can be manipulated e By dragging with the mouse the view can be rotated or translated Rotation and translation oc
222. here will only be a single panel If the simulation contains multiple climate zones the variables for each will be shown on a separate tab named Climate Zone 1 Climate Zone 2 and so on Properties of New HB EC Parameter Set x w aterShed Basin Simulation Climate Zone 1 Parameters blet Climate one Parameters Elevation Band Parameters Elevation Band 1 236 6m Number of Land Class 4 Band Elevation 236 6 i oe Land Class Parameters Open slope 72 1 aspect N Initial Snow Liquid Initial Soil Moisture OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 17 These variables are specific to a particular Climate Zone 5 2 4 1 The Parameters Tab The variables listed on this panel are specific to a single climate zone as defined on the Climate tab of the Basin panel and identified on the Climate Zones mesh e Climate Zone Parameters These variables apply to all land classes within a particular climate zone e Atmosphere variables RFCF This is the rainfall correction factor This parameter allows you to account for potential error in the recorded rainfall values due to gauge undercatch or known differences between the location of the measuring station and the location of the simulated area This must be a positive number and the default value is 1 e SFCF This is the snowfall correction factor It s essentially the same as RFCF above but applies to snowfall measurements instea
223. hich can be recognized by newer versions of the WATFLOOD model To add a Watflood file select File 3Import sWatflood Files Another menu will appear showing the Watflood files structure Flood Files ArcINPO Grid ASCII WeatFlood Met Orcview Shape File DTED or CDED DEM MapInfo Interchange File Surfer Grid i5e0TIFF URF EI RADAR Meta File EIC OMNE O Results WatFlood Rad watflood Rag WatFlood Rel WiatFlood Shd WatFlood Smiw WatFlood Spl Plt wWw atflood Str w atflood Tag WatFlood Term Figure 2 57 This menu is used to import a WATFLOOD file Once you have selected one of the file types the Open dialog will appear Locate and select the desired file and click Open 167 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 3 2 1 Watflood Event File Properties Upon opening a Watflood Event file evt all associated data files will be loaded into the WorkSpace Currently an Event file can only be edited but not created within EnSim Unlike most data objects Event files have only one tab in their Properties dialog Data Properties of 9707 x Data Event Parameters Event Name 9707 evt Event Flags Date yy mm dd hh 37 07 01 OO Hours of Rain Data 44 false aptly true Hours of Flow Data 44 Smrflg false Resintlg false Rain Cony Factor 1 Theflg false Resumflg false Rain Scale Factor 1 Contflq false Foutetl falze Snow Scale Factor
224. ht a term or concept being defined or described e g Categories are elements defined by EnSim to organise the workspace Angle brackets gt indicate key presses e g lt Ctrl gt key An gt indicates a sequence of menu selections e g File Open Section 1 2 The WorkSpace September 2007 1 2 THE WORKSPACE The WorkSpace provides an organizational structure for the data files and view windows being used in EnSim In a window on the left hand side of the screen the WorkSpace 1s displayed as a tree consisting of a hierarchical display of categories organizational headings for objects and objects data or view objects similar to the file hierarchy structure of Windows Explorer Unlike Windows Explorer the hierarchy does not represent the physical location of files rather 1t represents the relationship between the objects and between objects and views The top of the tree 1s always the WorkSpace represented by the H icon The workspace can be toggled on or off using the WorkSpace command in the View menu WorkSpace a ga Data Items Eli Capilano2 07 5lf Gris ma ipobo bee Al VELOCITY UY pwd kr AG FREE SURFACE x COURANT NUMBER 5 A TRACER han fra N 669 431525 35469206 0 CELERITY i VISCOSITY 8 Tiews El O 2D View 1 FE TRACER L 1D View 2 ie vol Pd M 669497 625 3 5469706 0 ee E 3D View 3 al at PU PA PA SY AA weal Figure 1 1 The EnSim oe Pam Dai Items and Vie
225. icient for a channel if only the discharge is known Calibrate to Discharge This value represents the discharge rate of the channel in m s Minimum Strickler This is a lower calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel Maximum Strickler This is the upper calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel Steady State Discharge Accuracy See the Run to Steady State Run Type Courant See Run Type Run above Viscosity See Run Type Run above e Generate Rating Curve This type of simulation generates a list of results that can be used to produce a rating curve comparing water level to discharge Rating Curve Node ID This determines the node of the channel for which the table of results will be generated Discharge Start This is the initial discharge value used to generate the rating curve Discharge Delta This is the interval between discharge values when generating a rating curve Number of Trials This represents the number of simulations that are to be run in determining the list of results The greater this number is the smoother the curve will be but the longer the simulation will take Steady State Discharge Accuracy See Run Type Run to Steady State above Courant See Run Type Run above Viscosity See Run Type Run above The lower section Results determines how output from the simulation will be stored e Output Name This is the name that will be used for
226. icit data and time extracted from an x and y location Networks A set of interconnected polylines or segments Each segment is made up of a series of 3D vertices and may have multiple attributes e g roads channels Tables A set of data values organized into rows and columns Columns represent the attributes and rows represent the values at each attribute index Velocity Roses Represents probabilities of vector quantities tabulated by magnitude and direction 1 4 1 2 Foreign Data Items Please refer to Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 270 for further details 1 4 2 Saving and Exporting Data Items To save a data item to a file select the object in the WorkSpace To save the current object choose the Save command from the File menu or use the GH button A copy of the object may be saved with the Save Copy As command from the File menu When the Save Copy As command is used a copy of the current object is saved This command is used to save a back up copy of an object and then to continue to edit the original object or to export the object to another file format All data items regardless of their source can be saved in at least one of the native EnSim file formats The format in which the object may be saved depends on the type of data Click on the button or choose Save or Save Copy As option from the File menu Use the Save as type box at the bottom of the dialog window to view the various file f
227. ighbours The units for aspect is degrees North facing aspect 1s zero degrees with aspect increasing from 0 to 360 degrees in the clockwise direction i e east facing is 90 degrees south facing is 180 degrees and west facing is 270 degrees To extract the aspects select the grid or mesh in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface Aspects from the menu bar There are two methods available for computing aspect on regular grid They are as follows e Finite Difference 8 neighbour The aspect is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s eight neighbours A 3rd order finite difference method is used e Finite Difference 4 neighbour The aspect is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s neighbours in the four cardinal directions only A 2nd order finite difference method is used There is one method available for computing aspect on a triangular mesh 88 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 e T3 Element Average The aspect of each node of the mesh is computed as the average aspect of all elements connected to the node The aspect of each element is calculated using cross products 2 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 68 Aspects extracted using the eight neighbour finite difference option shown in a 2Dview 1 6 5 1 4 Extracting Curvatures The curvature of a regular grid can be extracted as a surface Curvature values are calculated based on the slope and aspect and it s units are express
228. igher the number the finer the grid will be The snap to grid can also be turned on and off by using the report s shortcut menu or the button on the report tool bar 52 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 1 5 9 5 Report View Templates One of the unique abilities of the Report view 1s its ability to use templates to prepare reports If you need to prepare multiple reports or pages with a similar appearance this feature can save a great deal of time To create a report template 1 Create a new report and add objects and views that will be common to all of the reports you need to create Note that data items will not be saved with the template although legends based on data items will be saved 2 Under the Meta Data tab of the report s Properties window change the report s title to something indicative of its purpose 3 On the menu bar select Window gt Save Template To use a report template 1 On the menu bar select Window gt Load Template 2 From the dialog box select the template that you would like to use The template will be loaded as a Report view with the same titles views and objects with which it was saved 3 Since all reports created from a template have the same titles it s a good idea to change the titles of the Report and its views on the Meta Data tab of the respective Properties dialogs 1 5 10 View Decorations Decoration objects are non data items that are added to the vie
229. igure 2 42 Restricting the temporal subset to a single year results in a correlation coefficient of 0 9987 153 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 2 2 3 Opening an Existing RCA To open an RCA 1 Select File 30pen from the menu bar 2 Locate and select the RCA in the dialog box 3 Click Ok 2 2 2 4 Saving an RCA To save an RCA 1 Select the RCA in the WorkSpace 2 Select File Save from the menu bar The file will be saved as an rca file 154 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 2 3 WATFLOOD 2 3 1 WATFLOOD Map Files The Watflood Map file is an input data file required by the WATFLOOD hydrologic model The file consists of a regular grid of cells with data values for several physiographic attributes assigned to each cell The Watflood Map object uses information in the watershed object to calculate most of the data attributes for each grid cell The land use data attributes are calculated using other data information and tools The Watflood Map will be stored in map format See Supported Foreign File Types EnSim Hydrologic on p 281 for more information about this type of file It can be viewed by dragging the map object into a view For WATFLOOD to use the map file it must contain at minimum the information provided by the watershed object in addition to land use information 2 3 1 1 Opening an Existing Watflood Map File To open an existing map file select File 530pen from the menu bar or the
230. imilar to the subset tab from the HYDAT Properties dialog It can be used to restrict the calculations performed in the RCA to a temporal subset of the data Any data not included in the subset will be shown in grey After you have made changes to the RCA criteria click Apply to adjust the data 2 2 2 2 Working With Rating Curves There are several ways to improve the fit of the rating curves These methods include creating a subset inactivating individual points or directly adjusting the rating curve coefficients To adjust the rating curve by creating a subset 1 Set the colour display so that the data is distinguished By Month or By Year 2 Select an appropriate temporal subset to be examined See Subset under HY DAT DATABASE on p 177 for more information on creating a subset of data 3 Click pply The rating curve and correlation coefficient values will be updated and any data outside the subset will now be displayed in grey To inactivate an individual data point 1 Double click on a point to be removed from the view The selected point will appear highlighted in magenta in all four views A popup will appear showing the attributes of the selected point in the selected view 2 Right click on the point and select the checkmark next to Active on the shortcut menu The point will now be grey and the rating curve and correlation coefficient will be recalculated 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you are satisfied with
231. imulation File Header g1d The header of a GENID parameter file consists of only the general EnSim Header shown below For an explanation of the keywords used see File Headers on p 236 EH HH Ht EH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HE EEE EH EE EH EEE EE HOE EOE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EHHH FileType gld ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType GENID Parameter Set it Application EnSimHydrologic Version AD WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 157 2005 11420 AM a AA AA AA AA AA P EE E EE E E File Format g1d The contents of an example GENID parameter file are shown below Simulation NAME GENIDSIM RUN TYPE RUN DEITA T 0200210 000 SIMULATION TIME 32093800 VARY DELTA I TRUE COURANT 1 000000 S VISCOSI TY TODO Input Files CHANNEL NETWORK FILE GENI1D Example n3s DOWN BOUNDARY NODE ID 1 DOWN BOUNDARY TYPE FREE FLOW DOWN BOUNDARY VALUE 0 000000 UP BOUNDARY NODE ID 18 UP BOUNDARY TYPE LEVEL CONGTANI UP BOUNDARY VALUE 0 000000 285 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 STEADY STATE DISCHARGE ACCURACY 0 0001 CAL FRICTION NODE ID 1 CAL FRICTION WATER LEVEL 0 000000 CAL FRICTION MIN STRICKLER 10 000000 CAL FRICTION MAX STRICKLER 50 000000 RATING CURVE NODE ID i RATING CURVE DISCHARGE START 2 000000 RATING CURVE DISCHARGE DELTA 1 000000 RATING CURVE STEP COUNT 10 Output R
232. in Outlet Nodes on p 127 for more information Since the channels are just lines delineating the flow path of water along the DEM and data attributes of channels are based on the information contained in the DEM 122 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 information regarding the drainage area can be extracted from the DEM See Extracting Drainage Area under Hydrologic Tools on p 132 for more information 2 1 3 3 2 Displaying Channels Channels can be viewed by dragging the Channels object into a 2D or 3D view The colour scale of the flow paths describes either stream order or drainage area The Data tab of the Channels Properties dialog allows you to select the attribute being displayed as indicated by a green check mark In addition to the flow path the Channels object can optionally display watershed outlet nodes A circle around a node identifies a watershed outlet node that meets the outlet node search criteria parameters See the section Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes on p 127 for more information Watershed outlet nodes are not marked in the figure below The green line 1s the watershed boundary Figure 2 8 These examples indicate the stream order and drainage areas of the watershed bounded by the green line The extent of definition of the channels determining whether minor channels will be displayed can be adjusted in the Criteria tab of the Channel s Properties dialog 123 EnSim Hydrologic Septe
233. in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description identifies the start time of the simulation if it has an absolute time Constants e COURANT Optional Type floating point Valid Values between 0 and 1 Default 1 000000 Description Records the Courant number in the case of a variable time step The Courant number is the ratio of the physical speed of the model to its calculation speed e VISCOSITY Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 1 000000 Description Records the viscosity value of the water in the simulation Water is considered to have a viscosity of 1 e STEADY STATE DISCHARGE ACCURACY Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 and less than 1 Invalid values are considered to be 1e 07 287 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Default 0 0001 Description Records the accuracy to which the simulation will be run if the run type 1s RUN TO STEADY STATE e CAL FRICTION NODE ID Optional Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the measured node for a run type of RUN CAL FRICTION e CAL FRICTION NODE LEVEL Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default none Description Records the water level of the node identified in CAL_FRICTION NODE_ID for a RUN
234. in the assigned coordinate system e Max This is the location of the most extreme top right point Northeast of the object e Min This is the location of the most extreme bottom left point Southwest of the object Extent Under the X column this is the distance in the x direction between the Min and Max points of the object Under the Y column this is the distance in the y direction between the Min and Max points of the object e Nodes This is the number of nodes in the X amp Y directions e Delta This is the distance between each node For a Geo TIFF the attributes shown represent the X and Y coordinates of each corner of the object 1 4 3 4 2 Coordinate Systems All spatial EnSim Objects have a sense of coordinate system Keywords identifying the coordinate system are found in the file header The coordinate systems recognized by EnSim are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal Albers and Cartesian The default coordinate system for any object is Cartesian Some imported objects contain coordinate system information e g DEM MapInfo mif 25 EnSim Core September 2007 1 4 3 4 3 Coordinate System Converting Projections To change the projection of the object Coordinate System Projector Assign UTM UTM Zone 18 Ellipsoid WG Sog Figure 1 12 The Coordinate System projection can be changed within the Spatial tab 1 Select the projection from the Projectio
235. ine is created select Along a Line A list of available line sets from which the time series may be extracted within the current object are shown in the dialog window that appears Once a line set is selected spatial interpolation is used to generate time series for each point along the line These series are used to create a surface which is a special time series known as a time grid ts5 See Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts3 on p 258 for more information on this file type 92 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 velocity a Cc fh CI CI CI DJ Figure 1 71 This time grid visualized in a ID view The above figure illustrates the time grid The y axis measures the distance along the line and the x axis denotes the time The colours as defined in the legend represent the velocities along the line as they span through time e If Constrained By is chosen the following dialog will appear Rect DCell Analyser Generate a imezerez of l ol Grid Duflow From Grid Outflow To Grid Outflow Counts E cells are within the polygon HU spar Cancel Figure 1 72 This dialog gathers criteria for the constraint 93 EnSim Core September 2007 A constrained time series allows the use of Boolean operators and Aggregation for extracting time series from parcel files Generate a Timeseries of This option must be chosen from Count Sum Min Max and
236. ing the Properties dialog select the Meta Data tab and change the text in the Title or Name fields The Title field will change the name of the object at the top of the Properties dialog box while the Name field will change the name of the object in the WorkSpace data probes and the automatic title of the colour scale legend 1 2 2 Saving and Loading The WorkSpace EnSim allows you to save the current state of the WorkSpace to an EnSim WorkSpace File ews The EnSim WorkSpace File contains all the data item settings including colour scales legend options scaling rendering options line width point size and so on for all currently opened objects As well as saving data item settings it also saves the settings for all the views and the object view relationships This ASCII file should not be edited directly To Save a WorkSpace 1 On the menu bar select File gt Save WorkSpace 2 When the Save Current WorkSpace As dialog appears enter an appropriate name and click OK 3 The WorkSpace can only be saved 1f all objects have a file association Extracted isolines time series new Point Sets new Line Sets etc do not have such an association when first created Ifany ofthe objects within the WorkSpace need to be saved you will be prompted to do so Click Yes to save the objects or No to cancel the Save WorkSpace operation 1 Give each of the objects an appropriate name and click OK to save them If you Click Cancel
237. ink dot 2 Right click the node to show its shortcut menu and select Add Basin A new Basin object will be added to the WaterShed object Within the WaterShed panel there are four or more tabs e Watershed This tab lets you select the flow algorithm to be used to generate the Channels and Basin objects enable or disable the Predefined Channels tab and change the watershed s metadata If you ve imported an existing WATFLOOD watershed this tab will be disabled except for the metadata area e DEM This tab contains the standard EnSim tabs for a rectangular grid e Channels This tab allows you to select the criteria used to identify the channel locations on the DEM It also contains the standard EnSim data item tabs e Basin There is one Basin tab for each basin contained within the watershed object named Basin 1 Basin 2 and so on This tab allows you to control the appearance of the basin object by means of the standard EnSim data item tabs The extent of the basin is determined by the algorithm selected on the Watershed tab If the Enable Predefined Channels option has been selected on the Watershed tab a fifth tab becomes available on the WaterShed panel e Channels def This tab allows you to enter information on pre existing channels within the watershed See Using Predefined Channels under Watershed Objects on p 125 for details on using this option 215 The HBV EC Model September 2007 5 2 2 The Basin
238. into the channel flowing south and 65 of the cell area drains into the channel flowing east The drainage direction 1s assigned as east so the 35 of the green cell that drains south is added to the red cell which is south of the green cell This results in the drainage area of the green cell being 65 and the red cell 135 See Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes on p 163 for information on changing the drainage area of a cell Figure 2 50 The sum of the two cells drainage proportion is 200 This technique can also be applied in the case of modelling multiple watersheds when a cell is split between two basins e Drainage direction S This value indicates the direction of the majority of flow out of the cell Possible directions include North North East East South East South South West West North West or N A not applicable Not applicable is only applied to the cell containing the watershed outlet node By selecting the drainage direction as the current attribute the direction will be represented by an arrow in both the 2D and the 3D views The direction can also be viewed when drainage direction is not the current attribute by checking the Directions Visible check box on the Display tab of the Watflood Map s Properties dialog 160 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 Figure 2 51 Each cell is assigned a single drainage direction value e River class IBN This attribute defines the river roughness classes
239. ints are automatically sorted by time on the click of the DE button The NoData page allows the user several options for replacing NoData values NoData values are points in the time series that have an associated time but no valid value In this case a user specified NoData value is set for that point An example of a NoData page is illustrated below Data Points MoData MoD ata Value 99 MoD ata Values Detected Count Replacement Method Leading 3 JE xtrapolate Interior 7 Interpolate Trailing 3 Enter Value 1 1 Total 1 3 Figure 1 54 The time series NoData page The NoData page allows for setting or the editing of the NoData value as well as the detection and tools for NoData value replacement The replacement tools are as follows Leading NoData values are NoData values found at the beginning of the time series Replacement methods for leading NoData values include e None Selected Do nothing e Extrapolate Extrapolate linearly from the first valid point values found e First Valid Value Replace with the first valid point value found e Enter Value ts1 amp ts3 only The user enters the replacement value e Enter Mag amp Dir Value ts2 amp ts4 only The user enters the replacement magnitude and direction values Interior NoData values are NoData values found anywhere in a time series as long as they follow and precede a valid values Replacement methods for interior NoData values inc
240. ion component of the selected time series will be used in the expression e Expression This box allows you to enter a mathematical expression to calculate a new data item This can include the data items chosen in the Variable boxes as well as constants The mathematical operators available are listed in The Calculator Expressions on p 104 The Expression box also stores previously used expressions from the current session of EnSim Once the expression has been evaluated the parsed expression will appear in the text box below the Expression box e Result The name of the resulting time series can be entered in the Name box and its units may be entered in the Units box Note that changing the units of a time series will not perform a conversion The Units entry is for reference purposes only 103 EnSim Core Once the parameters are chosen and the expression is completed click on the Evaluate button to create the new time series The new data object will appear in the WorkSpace and the expression will be displayed in the text box If the calculation is valid and a name has been provided the calculator dialog will close 1 6 9 4 Both the gridded object calculator and the time series calculator use the same mathematical The Calculator Expressions expression set The mathematical operators are 104 arithmetic operators plus minus multiply divide exponentiation chs change sign from positive to n
241. ion designated in the Print dialog A title block will be given to the printed image displaying the view window title and the date and time at which the view was printed To change the title of the printed image open the Properties dialog of the View window Choose the Meta Data tab and edit the Title and Subtitle fields The Subtitle will be placed under the Title on the printed image 1 5 15 Troubleshooting in Views If the object is not displayed after it is dropped into a view try the following e Choose Default View from the View s shortcut menu to centre the view on the object e If there is more than one object displayed in the view make sure that their coordinates are compatible e In ID Polar or 2D views try zooming out In 3D views open the Properties dialog of the data item and choose the Display tab Set the Scale and Shift parameters of all objects to 1 66 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 1 6 TOOLS Tools in EnSim are functions that allow you to manipulate data retrieve information and create data items They help you to analyze data and to understand model output results These tools include e Creating New Data Items e Editing Data Items e Probing Data e Data Extractions e Mapping Objects e Calculators Following the descriptions of the tools is the How To Hints and Tricks section which describes how these tools can be used for completing tasks that may not be readily apparent 1 6 1 Cre
242. isplay distances along polylines lines with multiple segments The distance displayed will be the total distance from the starting point along the defined line To turn off the ruler press the button or press the lt Esc gt key a 2D Yiew 2 Figure 1 64 The ruler can be used to measure a polyline by creating fixed points 1 6 5 Extracting Data Data extraction tools allow you to retrieve all data satisfying a particular criterion from an object in the WorkSpace Take for example a triangular mesh object that has time varying data There is a new value at each node of the mesh for each time step To retrieve the maximum value at each of these nodes the Extract Surfaces tool can be used By choosing the Temporal Maximums option the maximum value in the time series at each node of the mesh is extracted Data extraction tools also allow you to define isolines to extract point values from a defined area within an object or to calculate the residual vector from a mesh of time varying vectors There are seven data extraction tools available on the Tools menu each of which is described below e Extract Surface e Extract Residuals e Extract IsoLines e Extract Path e Extract Points e Extract TimeSeries 85 EnSim Core September 2007 Extract Velocity Rose 1 6 5 1 Extracting Surfaces The extract surface tool can be used only with data that is in regular grid or triangular mesh format Some of the sub functions also req
243. it and change the Head Style to none O Click on this button to create a rectangle in the top left corner of the report To move the rectangle click anywhere inside it and drag it to the new position To resize the rectangle click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open the Properties dialog Oo This button creates a rounded rectangle in the top left corner of the report To move the rounded rectangle click anywhere inside it and drag it to the new position To resize the rounded rectangle click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open the Properties dialog e O Much like the Rectangle and Rounded Rectangle buttons this button creates an ellipse in the top left corner of the report To move the ellipse click anywhere inside and drag it to the new position To reshape or resize the ellipse click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open its Properties dialog e This button opens a dialog box that lets you select a bitmap image to insert into the report Like the shape objects you can move or resize the image by clicking and dragging On the Properties dialog you can give the image a border or unlock its aspect ratio to resize its height and width independently e Clicking this button creates a legend in the report If you have any data items loaded in the Workspace a dialog box will appear
244. ivers can be imported into EnSim Hydrologic and displayed in a view along with the channels generated by EnSim DEMs with low resolution may introduce significant errors during the removal of depressions and flat areas For these reasons it 1s a good idea to examine the DEM closely For significant errors edit the DEM ideally based on accurate field data and regenerate the watershed object After the DEM has been edited create a new watershed object This will ensure that the Channels and the Basin are compatible with the edited DEM For information on how to edit a grid see the section Editing Data Items under Tools on p 71 2 1 3 3 Channels and Flow Paths The channels or flow paths of the watershed object delineate the drainage path of surface water through the watershed In nature channels are only formed if water flows over the land s 121 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 surface for a relatively long distance Since EnSim Hydrologic refers to all paths of the flow of surface water through the watershed as channels regardless of their upstream drainage area the term channels does not necessarily refer to the delineation of existing streams rivers Or Waterways Properties of New Watershed x Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Criteria Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Generate Channels Maximum drainage area on grid Channel headwater drainage area Outlet Node Search
245. k may pan the view instead of creating a point 1 6 1 2 Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines EnSim has the ability to define new Line Sets These lines may be used be used in conjunction with other tools such as Map Objects Points and Lines have a location as well as values or attributes Lines or closed lines may be saved in 12s 13s xyz mif or shp format To create a line or polyline 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the a button or File gt New Open Line The button will appear depressed 2r In the File gt New menu Open Line will appear with a checkmark 3 Click within the 2D view to create the first point of the line Each click will create a new point with a line connecting it to the previous point 4 To end the line reselect the ey button or press lt Esc gt The Line button will appear raised Alternatively reselect File gt New Open Line 5 A dialog will appear asking you to enter a name a value and units for the new line Hint Lock the view while drawing a line using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse click may pan the view instead of extending the Line Set To create a closed line or polygon 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the gl button or File New gt Closed Line The button will appear depressed lez In the File New menu Closed Line will appear with a checkmark 3 Click within the 2D view to create th
246. kSpace and choose the DE button The 8 files most recently opened in EnSim are shown at the bottom of the File menu 2 For foreign data items choose the Import command from the File menu When the Open dialog appears select the file and choose the OK button 1 4 1 1 Native Data Items The data items that are recognized by all EnSim applications are 2D Rectangular Scalar Grids Two dimensional rectangular or regular grid having evenly spaced nodes in both dimensions X spacing may differ from y spacing The node values of the grid are scalar quantities e g Elevation concentration etc associated with each node May be time varying 2D Rectangular Vector Grid Two dimensional rectangular or regular grid having evenly spaced nodes in both dimensions X spacing may differ from y spacing The node values of the grid are vector quantities e g velocity May be time varying 2D Triangular Scalar Mesh Two dimensional triangular mesh The node values of the mesh are scalar quantities e g elevation concentration etc associated with each node May be time varying 2D Triangular Vector Mesh Two dimensional triangular mesh The node values of the mesh are vector quantities e g velocity associated with each node May be time varying 2D Line Sets Open or closed collection of lines defined by two dimensional nodes Each line may have multiple associated attributes For example if the lines are contour lines it may include elev
247. key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up if that option is available Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view is being manipulated a hand cursor W will appear 37 EnSim Core September 2007 The view can also be manipulated by adjusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box These will be the minimum and maximum values displayed on the X and Y axes An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the shortcut menu of the view object The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view which centres the entire object in the view window 1 5 5 4 Display Properties of the Polar View Window The display properties of the polar window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box A sample Display tab for a polar window is shown below Properties of Polar Yiew kd Display Meta Data Options Background Colour T Lock View Min Max ka 0 2599686 0 25996860 y fo 549691 0 1 5496911 f2 Show Grid 30 0 bd Grid Awes deg ft Show Labels F Grid amp Label Colour Label Size Divisions Hint 44 E Cancel Figure 1 20 The Display Properties dialog of a polar view 38 Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour select
248. l Scale Parameters These parameters are used to define the colour levels e Colour Interpolation Determines the type of colour spectrum interpolation e RGB Linear Red Green and Blue interpolation e HSV Linear Hue Saturation and Value interpolation e Style Determines the type of level interval e Linear sets a linear scale This style is the default e Nlog sets a natural logarithmic scale e Quadratic sets a quadratic scale e Levels Determines the number of levels The maximum number of levels available is 40 When more than 10 levels are used the additional levels will initially appear black They should be customized before bring used e Max Determines the value of the highest level When the style is Linear this value is shaded and cannot be edited It is calculated automatically from the Min and Interval parameters e Min Determines the value of the lowest level e Interval Determines the interval value between levels When Nlog or Quadratic styles are applied this value 1s shaded and cannot be edited Under those conditions it will be calculated based on the Max and Min parameters e Reset This button will return all values in the dialog to their original defaults e Show Legend Shows the object s colour scale as a legend in the current view window For more information see the section Legends under View Decorations on p 54 e Options Opens a dialog box for colour scale legend options To app
249. l bar and the menu option in the Tools menu will be unavailable 1 6 9 3 The Calculator for Time Series Objects A calculator is also available for time series The appearance and functionality of the time series calculator 1s almost identical to that of the gridded data calculators To use the calculator 1 Select a time series object in the WorkSpace This is an important step as only time series of the same type scalar or vector timestep or explicit times and same temporal parameters start time deltaT explicit times etc as the selected object will be available in the calculator 2 Choose Tools gt Calculator A dialog window will open 102 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 xi Variables mo cps opo 9 Expression SORT A cancel Figure 1 82 The calculator for time series objects e Variable Use this box to assign variable names A B C or D to time series currently in the WorkSpace These variable names are then used to form the equation in the Expression box In the list box next to the variable name a list of the available objects which match the temporal geometry of the selected time series will appear For scalar time series the Value component is automatically selected For vector time series there are two components to choose from Mag and Dir If Mag is chosen the magnitude or value component of the selected time series will be used in the expression If Dir is chosen the direct
250. l hard drive or to a network drive EnSimHydrologic first looks for the HSIS6 Data and H YDAT 6 directories below the location of the EnSimHydrologic exe file e g C Program Files CHC EnSimHydrologic HSIS6 then if not found the application searches all drive letters from C to Z and selects the first location containing the HSIS6 DATA and HYDAT6 directories as the locations of the database To access the HY DAT database 1 Select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT from the menu bar 2 The HYDAT stations can be accessed for all of Canada or by individual province Select one of the choices shown in Figure 3 1 171 HYDAT Database September 2007 Environmental Data Open HYDAT ma Open OCD b Alberta Import MARR Subset British Columbia Manitoba Mew Brunswick Mewfoundland Nova Scotia Munawut PT Ontario Prince Edward Island Quebec Saskatchewan Yukon Load Selected Search by Mh Figure 3 1 This menu is used to access the HYDAT database Once the selected data has been loaded the corresponding province becomes greyed out Additional selections including the Canada option add stations to the HYDAT object The HYDAT object is a multi attribute point set which can be displayed in a 2D view WorkSpace a i Data Items ely HYDAT StnID ma ma a a a om PU Figure 3 2 The HYDAT object appears in the WorkSpace 3 1 3 Accessing Station Details Once the HYDAT object is in the WorkSpace
251. lar format The table columns represent data attributes and the rows represent the values at each attribute index Table objects display the table icon 7 in the WorkSpace The data of a table may or may not vary over time and is stored in an ASCII format using the file extension tb0 If the table data is associated with a start time and time step then each data attribute represents a time series and the table object as a whole can be seen as a collection of time series all with the same start time deltaT and point count The individual attributes can be extracted as time series objects by selecting Extract TimeSeries from the shortcut menu of the table object Select table data attributes may viewed in thelD View window Tables may be saved as table tb0 or comma delimited csv files When the file is saved as a comma delimited file only the column names and tabular data is written File Headers tb0 An example header from a table file is shown below EHH HH Ht EH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HH EH EE EE HE EH EE EEE EE HOE EOE HE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE FileType ts0 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType EnSim Table Data it Application EnSimHydrologic Version 2x3 glad WrittenBy Username CreationDate Wed Feb 28 2007 11 20 AM a AA AA AA AA CA AA AA AA AA AA AA AA StartTime 2008701701 12200 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 ColumnMetaData ColumnName Temperature
252. layed or hidden in the workspace by clicking on the or signs respectively located to the left of the object In many cases only the children of an object can be dragged into a view If a child was created from a viewable parent object such as a time series extraction from a triangular mesh then both the child and parent can be displayed Objects in the WorkSpace are represented by icons which indicate the object s type and therefore some of the object s properties Icons for some common data items are detailed below Details concerning each type of data file can be found in the Appendices a file usually a container file for other objects rectangular grid scalar data rectangular grid vector data A 2 BO triangular mesh scalar data A triangular mesh vector data 2 dimensional line set for example 1solines or GIS data 2 3 dimensional line set 5 network file describes a network of segments and nodes xy data item time series scalar time series vector si point set 3 ceoTIFF image table There are a few icon decorations that indicate the status of an object e a black square indicates that a data item is in a view window e a red square l4 indicates that animation is activated on an object in a view window a red circle indicates an empty object which contains no data Section 1 2 The WorkSpace September 2007 e a yellow star in the bottom left hand corner of an icon indic
253. layer In the WorkSpace drag the data item back onto the view object as shown in the following figure 40 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 WorkSpace a ga Data Items H DEM200mJock27Hydra Jockaoc Channels Stream Order Basin 1 Ki Basin 1 io dl Channels Stream Order E DEM2DOmJock 7Hydro AM Basin 1 pra AA ae ae Figure 1 22 To move an object to the top layer drag it back onto the view object Pe te TA 1 5 6 4 Display Properties of the 2D Window The display properties of the 2D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of 7D Yiew 1 X Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Uptions Background Colour l Show Compass Min Max E Persistent Popups 2 29 2 125 2 Extended Popup Info O 10o M Show Probes Y i cl jw Use Display Lists Grid Options M Show Grid I Labels Colour 33 Label Size Po Orvisions Hint Cancel T Lock View Figure 1 23 The Display Properties dialog ofa 2D view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section The Compass under
254. le node 1 has coordinates of 7 855000 57 107000 and has a single value of 14 this is a single attribute file 247 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Scalar data has one or more values following the coordinates Fach value represents an attribute Vector data has two data values following the coordinates The first 1s the x component of the vector and the second is the y component The connectivity of the mesh is listed below the coordinate and value data Each line in the connectivity section lists the node numbers of the nodes that comprise the vertices of a single triangular element Each element is listed on a separate line In the example there are 24 elements and hence 24 lines of data The format of a triangular mesh file is slightly stricter than that of a rectangular grid The information for each node or element must begin on a new line and there cannot be any blank lines between nodes or elements Optionally there may be a blank line between the list of coordinates and the list of element nodes All of the information for a particular line or element must appear on the same line but there may be any number of spaces between values on a particular line Binary Both time varying and non time varying meshes may be recorded in binary format However the header of the binary file is left in ASCII characters so that it can be examined in a text editor The binary file begins with a section that describes the mesh including t
255. le to be edited The three font styles available are Italics Bold and Underline e Justify Select left justified centred or right justified e Decorations Determines the appearance of the label s Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can also be changed e Sample Text Box This shows a sample of text with the current settings 1 5 11 Animation Time varying data can be animated by toggling on the lv Animate check box in the Display tab of the data item s Properties dialog box or in the object s shortcut menu Data that does not vary over time will not have this checkbox When the data item is toggled on to animate the animation tool bar appears The animation tool bar can also be removed or reinstated by selecting the view window and selecting View Animation Bar The position of the animation tool bar can be moved The default position of the animation bar is docked at the top of the view window Note that each view window has its own animation bar That is the animation bar from view window 1 is used to animate the data in view window 1 it is not used to animate the data in view window 2 60 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 The animation tool bar looks like this da J ia mb gt gt _1 Day 09 00 00 000 Day 09 00 00 000 The tool bar buttons from left to right are 4d jump to the first frame 4d play in reverse dd step backwards one frame m st
256. lected object like the Map Object or Extract Time Series tools only modify or use the current data attribute of the object If an object has multiple attributes the name of the current data attribute is shown in parentheses to the right of the object name in the WorkSpace as shown below WorkSpace I By Data Items O B Example SE Bathumetry me F Depth vee A Currents fed Example State Tat sae a amp ie On n em Behn Figure 1 8 The current attribute of the Example object is State In the figure above the Point Set object entitled Example is the only object in the WorkSpace possessing multiple attributes The current data attribute State 1s shown beside the object s name in the WorkSpace 21 EnSim Core September 2007 To change the current attribute open the object s Properties dialog and select the Data tab Choose the desired attribute and click the Apply button Alternatively you can double click on the attribute name in the list The attribute will be highlighted and there will be a green checkmark to the left of it This green checkmark identifies the current data attribute Pop up windows are used to display the value of the current attribute at a particular point or section of an object see Data Probes under Tools on p 80 for information about pop ups By default the pop ups display only the current attribute The value associated with the current attribute is located to the
257. line segment from a shape file line set object or network For objects with time varying data time series can be extracted from a particular component See Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 92 for more information To probe data e Select a data item in a view so that it is highlighted in the Workspace If no object is selected in the WorkSpace EnSim scans the list of objects in the view and selects and returns the data from the first object encountered under the mouse If only one object is displayed in the view it will be automatically selected e Double click on a component node point cell etc of an object in the view window The object component selected for the data probe will be highlighted in magenta and a popup window will appear The popup window will display information about the node such as the x and y coordinates and the node value The node value is the current data attribute see Data Attributes under Properties of Data Items on p 20 80 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 When a new object component is probed the previous popup window disappears unless Persistent Popups is specified in the view window s Properties All popup windows disappear when the view display is altered 1 e when the object is moved in the view Properties of data probes may be edited in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are three properties e Persistent Popups When this has been
258. lipsoids For example overlaying NAD27 and NAD83 spatial data may produce an offset of up to 200 metres If the projection and or the ellipsoid are undefined EnSim assumes that the data will use the default Cartesian coordinate system With respect to LatLong projected data there may be some confusion with regards to the defined ellipsoid EnSim expects the LatLong data object 2 EnSim Core September 2007 to have an ellipsoid datum assigned The sphere is a valid ellipsoid Software packages such as MapInfo and ESRI s ArcInfo Arc View act differently when loading LatLong data with undefined ellipsoids ESRI assumes the data is mapped to a sphere while MapInfo leaves it undefined With MapInfo you should be aware that reprojecting LatLong data with an undefined ellipsoid to a coordinate system with a known ellipsoid simply assigns the ellipsoid 1 e LatLong data with an undefined ellipsoid projected to LatLong with the NAD83 ellipsoid assigns the ellipsoid to NAD83 It is important to know the source ellipsoid of your imported data even 1f it is not identified in the header of the file and assign it within EnSim Note EnSim does NOT perform datum conversion e g from NAD27 to NAD83 1 4 3 4 6 Selecting a Coordinate System It is important to understand the connection between an object s coordinate system and the view in which the object has been placed All objects that have not had a coordinate system assigned to them are a
259. lt in a large number of areas to be modelled To activate this panel click the Generate Model from Spatial Basin Data button This will create a Climate Zone panel for each climate zone defined on the Basin panel Properties ofNew HBV EC Parameter Set Simulation Times Start 2000 01 01 00 00 Generate Model From asin Data Runoff Perc Runoff KF Runoff Apha Runoff KS Initial Fast Reservoir Discharge Initial Slow Reservoir Discharge OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 16 This Simulation panel has not been activated and contains no information Note If you use the Basin panel to add or remove any areas later on you will need to regenerate the model This will overwrite any existing information on the Simulation panel Any of the variables on this panel can be edited by clicking on the value and entering a new value with the exception of the Outlet Elevation which is obtained from the Watershed e Run Name This contains the name of the watershed and of the model The default value is New HBVEC Watershed 223 The HBV EC Model September 2007 e Simulation Times Start This is the start date and time of the simulation In most cases the start and end dates will be limited by the dates for which you have weather data available Enter the date and time of the start of the simulation in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM The default is 2000 01 01 00 00 midnight January 1st 2000 If your weather data doesn t contain
260. lude e None Selected Do nothing e Interpolate Interpolate linearly using the last and next valid point values found e Last Valid Value Replace with the last valid point value found 75 EnSim Core September 2007 e Next Valid Value Replace with the next valid point value found e Enter Value ts1 amp ts3 only The user enters the replacement value e Enter Mag amp Dir Value ts2 4 ts4 only The user enters the replacement magnitude and direction values Trailing NoData values are NoData values found at the end of the time series Replacement methods for trailing NoData values include e None Selected Do nothing e Extrapolate Extrapolate linearly from the last valid point values found e Last Valid Value Replace with the last valid point value found e Enter Value ts1 amp ts3 only The user enters the replacement value e Enter Mag amp Dir Value ts2 4 ts4 only The user enters the replacement magnitude and direction values Once the edits have been completed press DE If the Create New TimeSeries box is checked a new time series will be created and added as a child under the source time series in the workspace The source time series will remain unmodified Ifthe Create New TimeSeries box is unchecked the source time series will be overwritten with the changes 1 6 2 4 Resampling Lines and LineSets Select an individual line from within a view or a lineset object from the workspace and select the Resample
261. lues FalseNorthing Required if the Projection 1s LambertConformal or Albers The false northing is the value added to the y coordinate It is usually used to remove negative coordinate values AttributeName Required or Optional depending on file type Together with AttributeUnits and AttributeType this keyword identifies data attributes associated with the data in the file The data following this keyword is in two parts The first part is an integer number It refers to the order of the attribute with respect to the other attributes in the file If there is one attribute the number is 1 If there are three attributes the first to be read is 1 the second is 2 and so on The second part of the keyword is a name used to identify the data attribute For example AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeUnits Optional Together with AttributeName and AttributeType this keyword identifies data pertaining to data attributes associated with data points The data following this keyword is in two parts The first part is an integer number If there 1s a single attribute this number is 1 If there are three attributes the first to be read is numbered 1 the second 2 and so on The second part of this keyword is a text entry to identify the units of the data attribute such as m g L km 2 and so on For example AttributelUnits 1 m AttributeType Required or Optional depending on file type Together with AttributeName an
262. ly a previously created colour scale See the section Copying Data Item Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 30 1 4 3 3 Data Attributes 20 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 The Data tab provides information on the data contained in the object A data item may have multiple attributes A typical data tab is shown below Properties of Example Object x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Hodes 730 Frames 133 Elements 1266 Times tep Variable a Attribute Mame 1 Example Object 0 018573 OK Apply Cancel Figure 1 7 The Data tab of the Properties dialog box The various data attributes associated with the object are listed under Attribute Name Attributes may be numeric values such as elevations or text such as the name of a river If the attribute is a number the minimum and maximum values are displayed If the attribute is text zero is entered under the Min and Max headings If there are units associated with an attribute and if they are appropriately specified in the data file they are displayed under Units The current attribute 1s the active attribute of an object It is the data that is displayed edited or modified when using EnSim s tools Each data attribute has its own colour scale When the colour scale 1s edited it modifies the colour scheme for the current attribute only When editing an object only the data of the current attribute 1s modified Tools used on a se
263. m Hydrologic September 2007 Networks n3s A network is a connected set of polylines or segments Each segment of the network 1s made up of a series of 3 dimensional vertices When displayed in a view the points in each segment are connected to form a polyline The interconnected polylines form the network Each segment may have multiple attributes Networks have the file extension n3s and are represented in the WorkSpace with the icon Networks may be saved in any of the following formats e EnSim Network ASCII Single Frame n3s e EnSim Network Binary Single Frame n3s e EnSim Network Binary Multiframe n3s e 3D Line Set 13s e 2D Line Set 12s e Point Set xyz e MapInfo Interchange format mif e ArcView Shape file shp File Headers n3s An excerpt from an ASCII network file 1s shown below Hit HHH HH HH HHH EE EH HH EH EEE EH OH EH EEE EH EOE aE a EEE EE EOE EO EEE OEE EE EEE EEE FileType n3s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType EnSim Network it Application EnSimHydrologic Version Aga WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 20 2007 Lie20 AM it i ec a a a EEE E E E E E E E Name Channels Title Network it Projection UTM Zone 17 Ellipsoid GRS80 it SegmentAttributeName 1 Velocity SegmentAttributeUnits 1 m s it SegmentAttributeName 2 Strickler Friction it NodeAttributeName 1 Surface Elevation NodeAttri
264. m before proceeding to the section which is specific to the EnSim application The sections of this manual that are specific to a particular application illustrate how to perform only the functions that are specific to that application e g EnSim Telemac and assume that you are familiar with core EnSim functions EnSim Core September 2007 1 1 3 Getting Help with EnSim EnSim is a Windows based application All EnSim documentation assumes that you are familiar with Windows based applications That is it assumes you know how to use a mouse open a menu choose menu and dialog options and other Windows based functions EnSim documentation also assumes familiarity with standard Windows menus and buttons such as the Open document command which can be found in the File menu or by clicking the button Consult your Windows documentation for help in using Windows based applications EnSim documentation consists of a manual and an online help system The online help system is accessed through the EnSim Help menu The manual and the online help system of EnSim documentation are intended to be independent All information contained in the manual can also be found in the online help system Version and copyright information about EnSim can be obtained using the command About in the Help menu 1 1 3 1 Conventions in EnSim Help Bold designates the name of a menu menu choice dialog dialog option or workspace Category e g File Italics highlig
265. may have multiple attributes MapInfo files can possess multiple children up to one per type of data When a MapInfo Interchange file is opened in EnSim it may be treated as a line set point set XYZ point set or parcel set depending on the type of data it contains F ShoreLine gi ShoreLine HYSHORE ID Figure A 4 A MapInfo Interchange file in the WorkSpace e Surfer Grid files grd Surfer grids are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grids In the WorkSpace they appear with the gq icon They may be treated as native r2s files e Binary Rasters ARC BIL GTOPO hdr dem bil ArcInfo rasters GTOPO30 s and BIL files are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grid files They are represented in the WorkSpace by the gg icon They may be treated as native r2s files 270 Appendix A September 2007 e SRTM Grid file hgt Shuttle Radar Topography Mission files both one arc second SRTM1 and three arc second SRTM3 are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grid files They are represented in the WorkSpace by the g5 icon They may be treated as native r2s files e GeoTIFFs tif GeoTIFFs are georeferenced images and may be displayed in 2D or 3D views Non georeferenced tiffs may also be loaded and can be manually georeferenced in that the corners of the image can be assigned coordinates They are represented in the WorkSpace by the icon GeoTIFF Theme files thm EnSim provides an ASCII theme file
266. mber 2007 Properties of Test Water5hed x Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Criteria Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Generate Channels Masimum drainage area on grid Outlet Node Search Criteria Minimum watershed area 376 ba Minimum adjoining watershed area 26 bre OK Apply Cancel Figure 2 9 The Criteria tab determines which channels and outlets are displayed The extent to which flow paths are displayed depends on the parameter Channel headwater drainage area This parameter is the area upstream of a particular channel Only channels that conduct flow from areas greater than the specified channel headwater drainage area will be displayed These results will also be used in calculating the number of channels in each cell a parameter required by the Watflood Map file To help you with the selection of this drainage area parameter the maximum drainage area of the grid is displayed as a non editable parameter Maximum drainage area on grid As well the drainage areas for each node of the watershed can be extracted by selecting the DEM object in the WorkSpace and selecting Tools Watershed Drainage Areas from the menu bar The drainage area grid object can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view To view more or fewer channels 1 Ensure that the Channels object is being displayed in a view 2 Double click the Channels object The Properties dialog will appear Select the Criteria tab
267. metres 12 to 10 Below 12 F Figure 1 87 A triangular mesh displayed in 3D as a surface of filled contours with multiple extracted isolines displayed in monochrome black 1 7 6 Creating a Sloping Structure in a Rectangular Grid When modelling hydrodynamics sometimes it is desirable to create a simple sloping structure in a regular grid to represent a physical object in the model domain To create a sloping structure in a regular grid 1 Open the regular grid file and display it in a 2D view Use this grid as a guideline when creating the structure 2 Create a new point set or open a saved set which outlines the shape of the lower and upper bounds of the sloping structure 3 Edit the points to set their values Double click on each point and then right click to open the shortcut menu Select Edit from the shortcut menu 4 Create a new Triangulation from the File menu Drag the point set into the new Triangulation object in the WorkSpace Click the Triangulate button on the Properties dialog of the new Triangulation which will have opened automatically when the new Triangulation was created Drag the new Triangulation into a 2D or 3D view to ensure that it is satisfactory in shape 110 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2007 1 Click on the regular grid object to highlight it in the WorkSpace Select Tools Map Object Choose the new Triangulation and click DE Display the modified regular
268. metres StartTime Required This keyword 1s followed by the time of the first measurement listed in the body of the file in the format yyyY MM DD HH mm DeltaT Required This keyword is followed by the interval between the measurements listed in the body of the file in the format HH mm ss sss File Format met MET files are always stored in ASCII format The body of the file consists of columns of data The columns are as described by the columnMetaData keywords and each row represents a single measurement at a particular weather station seperated by the time interval given by the DeltaT keyword 298 Index Index A Animation ul 60 COOK mean nA kan 58 fight pA 61 OONO Cana AANO mGA 64 ArcInfo ASCII grid file 270 ArcView Shape File 270 SAYING r A 16 NA NA 88 B Basin Network 0 139 Basins aee ee 129 ee a E 130 outlet nodes n 127 POVIE arn ANA 130 Binary Rasters 2 0 0 0 270 C Calculators 11111111 1 100 data ENIS saaan nan NAA 100 EXPTESSIONS u s 104 extract a temporal subset 111 gridded objects cceccccceeeeeees 100 Mme Series erasian 102 CDCD PCCCSS MNS ea vtec 178 file locations 178 loading a station 179 stations ACCESSING sraa ren 179 details 180 AGA maban GOYANG 181 Properties aska awa cini 180 MINE SEN saat 181 SUOS CUS mamasa NTN ANA 182 September 2007 IL KAP 121
269. n The average water elevation between end nodes of a segment is the elevation used to calculate the cross section parameters for that segment Maximum Channel Width Water Elevation Minimum Fleyaton Figure 4 2 The parameters of the channel at the cross section are applied to the entire segment The terms used in Figure 4 2 may require some clarification e Area The cross sectional area of the channel 1 e the area encompassed by the water surface and the wetted perimeter e Wetted Perimeter The portion of the cross section that is in contact with the water e Water Elevation The average elevation between end nodes of the segment e Maximum Elevation The maximum elevation of the cross section If the elevation exceeds the maximum elevation the additional cross sectional area is assumed to be rectangular So the additional area is equal to the maximum channel width multiplied by the height above the maximum elevation e Minimum Elevation The minimum elevation of the cross section This is the point at which the cross sectional area is equal to zero e Conveying Channel Width The width of the channel at the current water elevation e Maximum Channel Width The width of the channel at the maximum water elevation Each segment of the network is linked to two attributes e Velocity The mean water velocity through the segment e Strickler Friction A coefficient used to
270. n the magnitude of the selected vector data item will be used in the expression If U is chosen the U component of the selected data item will be used in the expression IfV is chosen the V component of the selected data item will be used in the expression 101 EnSim Core September 2007 e Expression This box allows you to enter a mathematical expression to calculate a new data item This can include the data items chosen in the Variable boxes as well as constants The mathematical operators available are listed in The Calculator Expressions on p 104 The Expression box also stores previously used expressions from the current session of EnSim Once the expression has been evaluated the parsed expression will appear in the text box below the Expression box e Result The name of the resulting data item can be entered in the Name box and its units may be entered in the Units box Note that changing the units of a data item will not perform a conversion The Units entry is for reference purposes only Once the data item s parameters are chosen and the expression is completed click on the Evaluate button to create the new data item The new data item will appear in the WorkSpace and the expression will be displayed in the text box If the calculation is valid and a name has been provided the calculator dialog will close The new data item will be scalar If the data item cannot be used with the calculator the icon on the too
271. n 3 3 NARR DATABASE September 2007 e curl exe The perl script files may have to be edited manually to ensure that the directory paths are correct For example the following lines at the top of the get httpsubset pl file may have to be edited if get inv pl and get grib pl are not in the specified directory Sget iny C NARR get_inv pl Sget grib C NARR get grib p1 Another edit may have to be made in both the get gfs pl and get inv pl files Scurl C NARR curl The main script get httpsubset pl is invoked with a number of parameters perl get httpsubset pl startDate endDate parameter level dir database For example the following script Perl Ger neepsubsees 0 1919010100 2006125121 TIMP AM aJ TMP 2 narra downloads the variable TMP temperature for 2m AGL between midnight Jan 1 1979 and 2100hrs Dec 31 2006 into the local subdirectory TMP 2 The directory TMP 2 will be further subdivided into directories for every month named using the format YYYYMM e g directory ATMP 2m1197901 for January 1979 e g filename narr a_221 20061231 2100 000 sub grb for Dec 12 2006 at 2100 hours The downloaded files are in GRIB format 3 3 3 Accessing the NARR Variables EnSim Hydrologic provides an import tool for this dataset This tool allows the user to create r2s or r2c files from a directory containing a single NARR variable To import the NARR data 1 Select File Environmental Data Import NARR Subset
272. n GA ee an a Name Jock River Grid Title Jock River Grid Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown XOrigin 407778 859400 VOrigin 4975883 000000 AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeUnits 1 m xCount 100 VOOUDT 100 xDelta 400 000000 yDelta 400 000000 Angle 0 000000 EndHeader Note The header for a binary file such as one containing data that varies over time is similar except that the third field in the Filetype record is BINARY instead of Ascr1 If the file 242 Appendix A September 2007 contains vector data the Fi1eType will be listed as r2v and the DataType as 2D Rect Vector For more information on header keywords see File Headers on p 236 e xOrigin Optional This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid The default value is 0 e yOrigin Optional This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid The default value is 0 e xCount Required The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount Required The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along the y direction e xDelta Required The distance between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta Required The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle Optional The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left corner The defaul
273. n details and associated time series will be shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station as shown in Figure 3 4 3 1 4 Properties of a HYDAT Station The HYDAT station properties are e Details e HYDEX e Meta Data 3 1 4 1 Details The Details tab displayed most of the pertinent data linked with this station There are three sections to this tab Properties of 07KF005 x station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDEX Meta Data Mi Lat Long 45 365 75 805 Prov ON OTTAWA RIVER AT BRITANNIA D ata Collection Period 1915 to 2000 Drainage Area Effective 0 km Gross 90900 km Figure 3 6 The details ofa HYDAT station cannot be edited directly e Identification This section details the location and ID number of the station e ID This is the HYDAT ID number There is a unique ID number for each station e Lat Long This is the latitude and longitude of the station in decimal degrees e Prov This is the province in which the station is located e Name not labelled This is the official name of the station e Data Collection e Period This details the years during which data was collected at this station e Drainage Area 174 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2007 e Effective This is the effective drainage area of the watershed in kn e Gross This is the gross drainage area of the watershed in km 3 1 4 2 HYDEX This tab displays H
274. n list box in the Spatial tab The projections available are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal and Albers e If LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal or Albers has been selected the central edit box will become active Enter the appropriate details e The Ellipsoid Datum list box will appear greyed out as Datum shifts are not allowed 2 Select the Apply button The object will now appear in the view with the new projection 1 4 3 4 4 Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections To assign a coordinate system to an object 1 Select the sign button 2 The following dialog box will appear Assign Coordinate System l x Assign Coordinate System Parameters to Object NOTE No transformation i performed here Frojection Central Herdian Latitude of Origin at Standard Parallel 2nd Standard Parallel False Easting False Northing Ellipsoid Datum WG 584 Cancel Figure 1 13 The Assign Coordinate System dialog box allows for seven possible projections 26 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 As noted at the top of this dialog this option is used strictly to assign a coordinate system to the data item It does not perform transformations from one system to another 3 Select the projection from the Projection list box The projections available are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal Albers and Cartesian 4 If LatLong UTM MTM Polar
275. nary Files on p 240 for more information on record headers After the header each record contains the values of the data attribute at that particular time step For Scalar data each record header is followed by a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each node of the mesh for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n 1s the total number of nodes in the mesh Each value is a 4 byte floating point number Vl of Al V2ofAl1 Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 of A2 VnofA2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap ViofAl V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 Vnof A2 VI of An V2 of An Vnof Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2o0f A2 VnofA2 V1 of An V2 of An Vnof Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e V Node value VI is the value of the first node and Vn is the value of the last node e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the last Note The number of attributes is determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header The above table illustrates the layout of a binary triangular mesh containing n nodes p attributes and data varying over m frames For vector data there are two records 1n the file each sufficient to hold n 4 byte floating point values where n is the total number of nodes in the mesh The first record holds all of the x components of the vector The seco
276. nced GeoTIFF image over a rectangular grid or triangular mesh for visualization of a 3 dimensional image This capability allows you to e Locate structures roads waterways or other obstacles that might affect or be affected by the model e Observe the limitations of the model e More realistically visualize the spatial domain of the model To drape an image 1 Import a GeoTIFF tiff into the WorkSpace 2 Create or load a rectangular grid r2s with the identical spatial extent as that of the image The resolutions of the grid and the image do not have to be identical See the sections on Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 68 and Mapping Objects under Tools on p 98 for more details Alternatively load a triangular mesh t3s with a spatial extent that overlaps that of the image 3 Drag the rectangular grid or triangular mesh onto the image so that the grid or mesh becomes a child of the image 4 Drag the image into a 3D view 106 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2007 88 Draping Example b j bh Lagi a A a aa a G a T M Figure 1 83 This image has been draped onto an elevation model to produce a landscape 1 7 2 Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data Cross sections may be extracted from data that is in the form of a grid or mesh To create a cross section or 3D polyline 1 Display in a 2D view the object from which the cross section will b
277. nd are enclosed by the Basin and EndBasin keywords e Outlet x The x coordinate of the outlet of this watershed basin e Outlet y The y coordinate of the outlet of this watershed basin File Format wsd ASCII The watershed object file contains three different types of information e The Depressionless DEM in the form of a 2D rectangular grid e A flow direction grid also in the form of a 2D rectangular grid e Basin data which 1s written in the file header The data section of the file is divided into two section both similar to 2D rectangular grids For information on these sections see 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v on p 242 The values of the data in the first section of the watershed object are elevations derived from the DEM The second section pertains to the flow of water in the watershed For each vertex there is an integer between 1 and 8 The integer values correspond with a compass direction which indicates the direction of flow Figure B 1 These values are found in the second section of the watershed object Binary In a binary watershed all header information remains in ASCII format The data sections are written in binary format The first section the Depressionless DEM is stored as a series of 4 byte floating point values each representing an elevation The second section the flow directions 1s stored as a series of 1 byte characters Both sections use the same data order as the ASCII version o
278. nd holds all of the y components The values in the records are stored in the sequence of the nodes The first value refers to the first node the second value to the second node and so on fer Rant Kang Ran van fim Rant Kan Kana ant The above table illustrates the node values for a mesh containing n vector nodes varying over m time frames Each value is a 4 byte floating point number 249 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Line Sets i2s i3s Line set files consist of one or more 2D or 3D lines and may have additional attributes associated with each line Line sets include lines opened polylines and closed polylines File extensions for line sets are i2s and i3s for 2 dimensional and 3 dimensional line sets respectively e A 2 dimensional line set has vertex geometry that is defined by x and y coordinates Its icon in the WorkSpace is gt e A 3 dimensional line set has vertex geometry defined by x y and z coordinates Its icon in the WorkSpace is 48 In many cases the z coordinate is elevation Both 12s and 13s files may also include data attributes but each attribute must be equal at all vertices within a single line set Both 2D and 3D line sets may be saved 1n the following formats e 2D lines 12s e 3D lines 13s e Point data xyz e ArcView Shape file shp e MapInfo Interchange file mif File Headers i2s i3s An example of a 2D line set file is shown below tit HH HH HH
279. ne The first value on a line is the x coordinate and the second is the y coordinate Data attributes follow on the same line in the same order as they appear in the header Binary Parcel files containing data that varies over time are stored in binary format Each time step 1s contained in a separate record that describes the location and attributes of each point at that particular time step The first item in each record is the record header See Binary Files on p 240 for more information on record headers After the record header is an integer indicating the number of points or parcels present at the particular time step That number is followed by the x coordinates of all of the points which is followed by the y coordinates for all of the points After the coordinates the data attributes are listed Each attribute 1s contained within a subrecord which contains all of the values for that attribute at that time step The listing of attribute values is followed by a repetition of the number of points in the time step which ends the record Points or parcels can appear in any order as long as that order 1s maintained throughout the file e RH Record Header RHI indicates the header for time step 1 RHn indicates the header for the last time step recorded in the file e X X coordinate of a point e Y Y coordinate of a point P Point P1 indicates the first point in a file Pn indicates the last point P indicates
280. ng data from a mesh or rectangular grid to a line creates a3D Line Data can be mapped to objects such as triangular meshes rectangular grids lines or polylines or point sets The values will be mapped from one object to the other where there is an overlap For example e All nodes of a grid or mesh located within a closed line will be given the value of the closed line Note that only one value can be applied within a polygon Ro AH 2 O FE SIS ES x F Ni NE HE GA PAT Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 e The values from a grid or mesh can be mapped to a point set In the figure on the left the grid has not yet been mapped to the points In this example the points all have the same value In the figure at the right the values from the grid have been mapped to the points by spatially interpolating the values on the grid at the location of each point IER RSE EEE TERRE EEE a E L BERBER A OP Ieee EEE ERR BERR GG RRR REEL ALL a REE BCE REE ERP RR SRR lad HUL EGL LI SLUT LAG LAU a ELLA EENEN Bara AG EGG GA TUNA TINANTANAN LI TU Pes el lr LULU EERE EEE Lie TAGATALA d LALL BOL EERE BREESE LER RRL eee eee ERR EELS W ULAT Jak PAN GG PU EPAL UGALI UTANG HULA LULULE ALALA UU UAE ELENA LILULELLLLL ILL E LL LEE EEE EEE EEE EEE pA LININ ENNA NANU PENE EHE NUN PUNA LENA Figure 1 78 The points have been given values interpolated from the dat
281. ns section at the bottom The Source TimeSeries section contains data associated with the time series object Greyed text is read only The user can specify resampling parameters within the Resample Options section There are several resampling methods to choose from e Subset Any time series points found between and including the resample StartTime and EndTime values will be subsetted 78 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 e Temporal Shift All time series points will be shifted to match the new resample StartTime value For example if the source StartTime is at 12 00 00 000 12 hours and the user enters a resample StartTime of 18 00 00 000 18 hours then all time series points will be shifted forward by 6 00 00 000 6 hours e Linear Interpolation A new time series is generated by linearly interpolating the source time series using the resample DeltaT The timespan of this interpolated time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan e Cubic Spline ts only A new time series is generated by the cubic spline method using the resample DeltaT The timespan of this splined time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan Note the cubic spline method requires a source time series with a constant DeltaT e Interval Sums ts amp ts3 only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each resample DeltaT
282. nt legend that can be constructed and modified but is not dependent on any one data attribute 1 5 10 1 1 Colour Scale Legends A colour scale legend 1s a colour scale drawn in a view window The colour scale describes one of the data items in the view The colour scale legend is a decoration object that is accessed through the Colour Scale tab of a data item s Properties menu See the Colour Scale under Properties of Data Items on p 19 for more details The colour scale legend can be toggled on or off using the Show check box The options dialog of a colour scale legend is accessed through the Options button 54 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 0 x 2EnsimTelemac 2D Yiew 1 File Edit View Tools Window Help Dil S H ele Bl Halad 2 WorkSpace Data Items SHA capilano2 07 AN St ipabo JRE VELOCITY UV FREE SURFACE E BOTTOM sie COURANT NUMBER 0 05 to 0 1 0 06 to 0 06 0 04 to 0 06 0 02 to 0 04 Below 0 07 ColourScale Legend Options Decorations MW Border B Colour 5 of TRACER SE width W Colour Italics Colors cale Data Spatial Meta Data M Background Bold Colour Labels M Use Range Labels to Separator Above Above Below Below Underline Scale Parameters O12 Colour Interpolation Hoy oF 0 1 O na Linear Levels 0 06 Rad 014 Interval 0 04 0 02 Default a alt s Floating Point R
283. nts than this example Possible components include Temperature Precipitation Grid Runoff Grid Outflow and Lower Zone Storage as well as Depression Storage Depression Storage Snow Snow Water Equivalent Snow Covered Area and Upper Zone Storage for each land use class Each component of the Watflood output file can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view Multiple components may be overlaid in a view Components of the output file such as Grid Outflow can be saved independently as single frame ASCII 2D rectangular cell files or as multi frame binary 2D rectangular cell files The single frame option will save only the current frame of the component file The multi frame option will save all the frames in the time series See 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c on p 277 for more information about 2D rectangular cell and Supported Foreign File Types EnSim Hydrologic on p 281 for more information on Watflood Binary Output files 2 3 4 Bankfull Animation Bankfull animation allows you to visualise the streams and their potential for flooding during a particular event Based on the modelled flow the network of streams and the bankfull capacities of the main stream in each cell of the Watflood Map the percentage flows of the streams are displayed at each time step A percentage greater than 100 indicates potential flooding of the stream When viewing the bankfull animation you can change the colour scale to display flooding in an alternate col
284. o the file name of the object Title Optional The default for this keyword is the full file path of the file The entry for this keyword is displayed in the title bar of the object s Properties dialog Projection Optional The coordinate system of the data Valid values are e Cartesian Cartesian coordinates e LatLong Latitude Longitude coordinates Must appear with the Ellipsoid keyword e utmM UTM coordinates Must appear with the Zone and Ellipsoid keywords e MTM MTM coordinates Must appear with the zone and Ellipsoid keywords e PolarStereographic Polar Stereographic coordinates Followed by CentreLongitude CentreLatitude and Ellipsoid keywords e LambertConformal Lambert Conformal coordinates Followed by CentralMeridian FirstStandardParallel SecondStandardParallel LatitudeOfOrigin FalseEasting and FalseNorthing keywords e Albers Albers coordinates Followed by centralMeridian FirstStandardParallel SecondStandardParallel LatitudeOfOrigin FalseEasting and FalseNorthing keywords The default value is Cartesian A data item with no Projection keyword may be opened but it will be assigned the cartesian coordinate system when it 1s saved Zone Required if the Projection is UTM or MTM This keyword contains an integer from 1 to 60 for UTM coordinates or from 1 to 32 for MTM coordinates Ellipsoid Required if Projection Is present and is not Cartesian The ellipsoid
285. of the 2D or 3D Line Equal Distance If this method is chosen the 2D or 3D Line or Lines will be redrawn with the equal Delta distance between each points Note The greater the Delta value the greater the change in the shape will be from that of the original line TI EnSim Core September 2007 Once the resample options have been chosen press OK If the Create New LineSet box is checked a new lineset will be created and added as a child under the source lineset in the workspace The source lineset will remain unmodified If the Create New LineSet box is unchecked the source lineset will be overwritten with the changes 1 6 3 Resampling Time Series Select a time series from within a view or a time series object from the workspace and select the Resample command from the shortcut menu The following resample dialog will appear Resample TimeSeries x Source TimeSeries Name Example Time Series 0 00 00 000 End ime 624 00 00 000 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 Point Count Ar Min alue oe fos Mas Value O ie Mata Mean Value 4 94569 Std Dey 1 73365 Resample Options Method Subset StartT ime 0 00 00 000 EndT ime E24 00 00 000 W Create New TimeSeries Ner Name Resampled Example Time Seres cence Figure 1 56 This dialog box is used to resample time series The Resample TimeSeries dialog is divided into two parts a Source TimeSeries section at the top and a Resample Optio
286. of the HBV EC model are shown as 1 dimensional time series and attributes of a single 2 dimensional time varying triangular mesh All of these result data objects are shown in the WorkSpace as children of the HBV EC Parameter Set The following results are shown as I dimensional time series They are best examined in a 1 D view window e Total Discharge This object shows the rate of total discharge in thousands of litres per second from the watershed over the simulated period e Fast Reservoir Storage This object shows the level of storage in the fast reservoir of the watershed in millimetres over the simulated period e Slow Reservoir Storage This object shows the level of storage in the slow reservoir of the watershed in millimetres over the simulated period e Fast Reservoir Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from the fast reservoir of the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Slow Reservoir Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from the slow reservoir of the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Glacier Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from glaciers within the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Glacier Ice Melt This object shows the ice melt from glaciers within the watershed in mm over the simulated period e Glacier Water Storage This object shows the wat
287. ollowed by the Names Units and Types respectively of each of the columns that appear in the body of the file The values must be listed in the same order as the columns appear Note The units for measurement of snow fall is given in millimetres of water equivalent not centimetres of snowfall In general the water equivalent 1s considered to be one tenth of the measured depth of fresh snow EndColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the end of the metadata information StationName Optional This keyword 1s followed by the name of the weather station Elevation Required This keyword is followed by the elevation of the weather station at which the data was recorded in metres LocationX and LocationY Required These values give the location of the weather station in the units of the source material Since these values are not actually used by the HBV EC model they are included for reference purposes only to help you locate a weather station within or near a watershed If they are not included in the MET file they re assumed to be 0 the default value MonthlyTemperature Required This keyword is followed by the average monthly temperatures recorded for the weather station for each month of the year in order in degrees Celsius MonthlyEvaporation Required This keyword is followed by the average monthly evaporation amount recorded for the weather station for each month of the year in order in milli
288. on ROT for rotation TRN for translation Ready LL w584 4 180 0 000 0 000 0 000 ROT A 1 5 8 2 Manipulating the Spherical View In EnSim spherical space there are two ways in which the view can be manipulated e By dragging with the mouse the view can be rotated or translated Rotation and translation occur from the surface of the object using the lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the mouse Using the mouse wheel rotation and translation can occur in the z or vertical direction The options of Rotate or Translate can be chosen using commands in the shortcut menu or in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box During rotation manipulations a hand with an arrow cursor W will appear During translation manipulations a hand cursor wW will Pa appear An unlimited number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view e Changing the view parameters in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are several types of controls to the view parameters e X Y and Z Camera Camera indicates the location in 3D space from which you are viewing the scene e X Y and Z View Centre View centre refers to the location of the centre of the point of interest within a view It is the centre of the view window Note that the crosshair is always drawn at the centre of the view e Field of
289. ond dialog Video Compression will appear once the movie when this dialog is closed 7 Quality allows you to adjust the quality of the recording and as a result the size of the file produced File size and quality are not linearly related That is decreasing the quality to 50 will not reduce the file size by half but will produce a smaller file 85 is the recommended quality level Figure 1 45 This button is used to start recording 8 When you are ready to begin record click the Record button If you selected Advanced encoding the Video Compression dialog will appear next While recording the view window may not update to show the animation in progress 65 EnSim Core September 2007 1 5 14 2 Copying to the Clipboard A bitmap image of a view may be copied to the clipboard and pasted into other applications The number of pixels in the image stored in the clipboard will have twice the number of pixels as the original view window To copy the image of a view window to the clipboard 1 Arrange the view as you wish to record the image Ensure that the view window is the currently selected view 2 Click on the Copy to Clipboard button 3 in the tool bar or select View gt Copy to Clipboard The image may then be pasted by using lt Ctrl v gt or selecting File Paste 1 5 14 3 Printing Selecting the Print command from the File menu will send the image in the currently selected view window to the printer destinat
290. op gt I step forwards one frame gt play bp jump to the last frame The animation tool bar has a text box 1n which the frame step or time counter can be displayed The counter can be switched from frame step or time counter by clicking on the time Below the text box is an animation progress meter The animation scroll feature displays the progress of the animation The progress meter can be moved to a specific point within the animation by clicking the left mouse button on the bar and dragging the bar to the desired position To save an animation as an avi file see Recording under Saving and Copying Images on p 64 1 5 12 Flight Paths A flight path consists of a series of viewpoints within a 3D or Spherical view The flight path can be viewed and recorded as an animation allowing you to emphasize certain locations or perspectives within the view or to provide a visual summary of a data item To create a new flight path 1 On the menu bar select View New Flight Path A new flight path object called new Flight Path will appear in the Workspace and its Properties window will open Click and drag the flight path into the appropriate view Note that flight paths can only be added to 3D or Spherical views 2 Within the view window move the view into the perspective and location from which you would like to start the flight path 3 Click Add 4 Move the viewpoint within the view window to the next con
291. operties section for the type of view you re changing for more information 1 5 9 4 Report View Window Page Setup Properties The page setup properties of the Report View window can be changed in the PageSetup tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of Report Yiew 7 gy l x Pages etup Recording Temporal Meta Data Medium Paper te Paper Printing Image f Portrait Landscape Size Letter Printer Snapping 40 Apply Cancel Figure 1 31 This dialog lets you choose the format that the report will take The page setup properties that can be edited include Medium This can be either Paper Printing or Image If Paper Printing is active the Paper properties will be accessible If Image is active the Paper properties will be greyed out You can change the image resolution on the Recording tab of the Report s Properties dialog Paper This option is only available if the Medium is Paper Printing In this area you can select the orientation and paper size of the report The orientation can be either Portrait or Landscape The paper size depends on the capabilities of the active printer which you can select with the Printer button Snapping This area controls the snap to grid If the snap to grid is active objects being drawn or resized will automatically snap to the nearest point on the grid The value next to the checkbox determines the number of points on the grid The h
292. or The red arrow indicates North O45 Figure 1 35 This compass indicates that the top of the view is Northeast The compass also shows the bearing or viewing direction in compass degrees At zero degrees rotation the north arrow points up at 90 degrees rotation the north arrow points to the left Compass properties include a border background colour and bearing appearance B Colour Colour lal ne Italics Background Bold l Colour F Underline M Show Bearing Figure 1 36 These compass properties can be customized 1 5 10 3 The Simulation Clock The simulation clock 1s a decoration object which illustrates the progression of time during an animation using a digital counter 2 Days 17 00 00 000 Figure 1 37 This simulation has been running for almost 3 days Clock properties include number format border background colour and font The properties are accessed in the Temporal tab of the view properties The Options button on the Temporal tab provides an additional dialog with properties controls 58 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 Properties of 7D Yiew 1 ki Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Objects Frame Step DateTime Display W Show Clock Pormat 2 Days 17 00 00 000 bd Options Interactive View Playback Figure 1 38 The Properties tab for the Simulation Clock Clock Options x Decorations Font Older Ari
293. or Open or Forest terrain The default value is 0 9 2 4 2 The Met Tab This tab describes the MET file associated with a particular climate zone The MET file contains meteorological information for a period of time including monthly average temperature and evaporation rate and daily rainfall snowfall and temperature measurements For more information on MET files see The HBV EC MET file on p 297 The Met tab is broken down into five sections e Display The MET file data may be displayed as a ID time series This panel controls the display settings of the data See Display Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 17 for more details 229 The HBV EC Model September 2007 Properties of New HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation Climate Zone 1 Parameters Met FileName Sample met E Display Station Data Monthly Data Meta Data Name Sample MET File Elevation m 2 Location X 119231 location Y 52 221 OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 20 The Station data can be edited e Station This tab shows data from the header of the MET file This data may all be edited on this panel Name This is the name of the climate station Elevation m This is the elevation of the climate station in metres This value is taken into account when calculating variations in rainfall snowfall or temperature as a result of altitude changes as determined by the Atmosphere parameters on the
294. or distinguishing rain from snow in degrees Celsius The default value is 0 This value represents the midpoint of the range determined by TTI below TTI This is the temperature interval for mixed rain and snow in degrees Celsius The default value is 2 Temperatures less than TTI degrees on either side of TT will experience mixed precipitation while temperatures below TT TTI will be entirely snow and above TT TTI will be entirely rain EPGRAD This is the fractional rate of decrease of potential evaporation with elevation per metre The default value is 0 0005 ETF This is the temperature anomaly correction of potential evapotranspiration The default value is 0 5 The model determines daily evaporation rates by looking at the monthly rate and taking into account the difference between the recorded daily temperature and the normal monthly temperature An increase in this value will increase the effect of a temperature variance on the evaporation rate The value must fall between 0 and 1 Forest variables TFRAIN This is the fraction of rainfall reaching ground surface below the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 8 TFSNOW This is the fraction of snowfall reaching ground surface below the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 8 Canopy Factor This is the proportion of sunlight blocked by the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 Th
295. or example a Parameter Set dialog has the Standards Tabs along with other meta data such as variable names and values 1 4 3 1 Display Properties The display tab allows you to change the rendering style of the object as well as the vertical position Vertical position only applies to objects being displayed ina 3D window The display tab also allows you to change the display style of lines and or points Display options are similar for objects that have similar characteristics For example an ArcView shape file and an EnSim isoline will have similar display properties because both are line sets Recall that similar objects have the same icon displayed in the WorkSpace The following figure is an example of a Display properties tab Properties of Example Object ki Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Rendering wireframe bd Style Wisible Transparent Monochrome B MW Clip Contours Animate id Line width 3 Point Size Scale OU 2 Shift 0 Show Node Labels Show Element Labels gal Label Size Figure 1 5 The Display tab of the Properties dialog box 1 4 3 1 1 Rendering Options e Style Changes the way a data item is represented There are many different display styles The availability of styles in the pull down menu depends on the type of object Not all styles are available for a data item type These style types may be applied to objects whose icon rep
296. or indicating the colour to be applied to the background of the Polar View window Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected Show Grid When the check box is turned off the grid lines are removed The axes coordinates remain visible Grid Axes deg This defines the spacing of radial axes displayed in the view Axes may be drawn at 22 5 30 45 or 90 degree intervals Show Labels This check box toggles the axes coordinate labels Grid amp Label Colour This is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the grid and the axis interval labels When the box is selected a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of the view window size Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here is 8 As the number of divisions Section 1 5 Views September 2007 is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter 1s used as a guideline for the number of divisions e Lock View When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock sj in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim
297. or may not be available The Display tabs differ considerably for each view type and are discussed in the sections pertaining to the specific view type The other tabs are the same for each view type and are discussed briefly below in this section e Display This tab varies according to the type of view See the chapters specific to each view type e 1D View Window Display Properties p 35 e Polar View Window Display Properties p 38 e 2D View Window Display Properties p 41 e 3D View Window Display Properties p 45 e Spherical View Window Display Properties p 47 e Report View Window Page Setup Properties p 52 e Recording Interface for creating recordings of animated data For more information see the section Recording under Saving and Copying Images on p 64 e Spatial Displays the x y and z spatial extent of the window The extents are automatically determined from the data items currently in view e Temporal Allows you to create a clock decoration object and to adjust the target frame rate for interactive playback of an animation The frame rate is the number of frames per second fps See the section The Simulation Clock under View Decorations on p 58 and the section Animation under Views on p 60 for more information e Tools Currently only available for the 2D view This tab allows the user to modify live stream line cursor settings see section The Live Stream Lines Cursor under Tools on p 83 for mo
298. ormats in which the object may be saved See Appendix A for a complete description of the native file formats The data items and the file formats in which they may be saved are as follows Object Type eee Be Saved As a Poms BR ASCITE Sim oma 11 EnSim Core September 2007 o xy2 ASCm EnSimformad ArsView Sap Cap Meno Fterchange Format i9 a XYZ Point Set xyz ASCII EnSim format pf AreView Shape ah __ Mein Interchange Format mif Parcel Set pel Lagrangian parcel set nim format a ee Sc Mino Tnterchange Format aid Meta Miia Pa XY Data Items xy or dat ASCII EnSim format 8 Binsry Single Frame EnSimn format P 8 Binary ui Fra Sim tma 88 ASCTT Single Frame Sim format oo 8 Binary Multi Frame EnSim format ptf ye SCT Sim format a ee O O eee o 2 Binary Single Frame EnSim forma a vBinary Mi Bra Bs ee 8 A8CIT Magnitude asim format 8 Binary Magnitude BS format v ASCITSingloFeame Bai form HAH 43v Binary Multi Frame EnSim format Qu 2D Triangular Scalar Mesh 43s ASCII EnSim format Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 CO ng Sing Fame Ein oma O ny a Fame Sin mma O nido sim amag SA 20 angular Nacor Mes bv ASCII Sin mad Fv iy sina rae in oat ny at Fame Sin oma Feast agn nt in fd Fs nn mie ony Ein oma OT AG agn ony Sin Fo pT n5a Binary Single Brame Si format pT 8 Binary Mi Frame Sic p88 ASC Ensim format
299. orrect flow path of surface water must be lowered to encourage water to flow in that direction Also nodes of the DEM can be raised to prevent water from flowing in a certain direction Take care when altering areas of the DEM that are within the watershed boundary Usually the elevation does not need to be increased or decreased by much to redirect the flow path of water See Checking for Errors and Editing the DEM on p 121 and Editing Data Items under Tools on p 71 for more information 2 1 3 3 4 Using Predefined Channels Although the channel delineation algorithms used by EnSim Hydrologic are powerful there may be cases in which the predicted channel paths differ from the observed placement of the channels or simply watersheds for which you have accurate data available showing the path of 125 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 an existing channel In these cases it s possible to use the Predefined Channels tab to include information about actual channel paths in the watershed object Properties of New WaterShed New Water5hed ype Water5hed Directory Filename Cancel Figure 2 11 The Enable Predefined Channels box makes the Channels def tab available The Predefined Channels tab abbreviated as Channels def within the dialog lists one or more lines that have been added to the Watershed object in the form of a 2D Line set object Properties of New Water5hed i x Watershed DEM Channels Channels
300. ottom 296 Appendix E September 2007 The HBV EC MET file File Header met The header of an HBV EC Met file consists of EHH HH Ht HH HH EE HH HH EH EEE HH HH EH EE EH OE HF EEE EE HOE EH EEE EE OE EE EEE EEE OE HEH FileType met ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType HBV EC Met it Application EnSimHydrologic Version 2 2 14 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Wed Jan 25 2005 03 23 PM mani EE EE AA E E EE AA AA AA E E E E E AA AA EEE EEE E EEEE ColumnMetaData ColumnName Rainfall Snowfall Temperature ColumnUnits mm mm degC ColumnType float float float EndColumnMetaData StationName Sample Weather Station Elevation 430 000000 LocationX 49 57 LOCationyY gii 28 i MonthlyTemperature 750 Z571 3x8 Tes 122 6 14 7 19 3 19 6 14 4 Gis 3 9 1 0 MonthlyEvaporatlon 8 4 10 25 19 32 34 16 18 23 19 21 it StartTime 1988 10 01 00 00 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 EndHeader O lss 14 3 14 5 Ch saa 11 Lle 11 12 15 14 jn 128 0 12 8 3 012 N H N O OD DO DO DO DO O I O O O OOO O O DO O O N O O UI Ul 8 9 For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 236 e ColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the start of the metadata information for the body of the file 297 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 ColumnName ColumnUnits ColumnType Required These keywords are f
301. our Over the course of the animation the stream segment within a cell changes colour according to the percentage bankfull flow at each time step Time series can be extracted from a selected stream segment showing the changes in bankfull flow over time Time series are displayed in a ID view To create a bankfull animation Note A bankfull animation can only be created after a watershed has been modelled with WATFLOOD 1 Open the watershed object wsd 169 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 Change the display of the channels to the desired density That is show as many of the minor channels as desired 3 Save the channels as an independent network file n3s 4 Open the Watflood Output file wfo and save the grid outflow component as a binary multi frame file 5 Select File New Watflood Bankfull The New Bankfull Animation dialog will appear New Bankfull Animation x Network File Grid Outflow File ret Wi atflood SHO File cl LE Cancel Figure 2 60 This dialog is used to set up a Bankfull animation 6 Specify the network grid outflow and shed files in the dialog Click w to browse When you re finished click Ok 7 A Save As dialog will prompt you to save the bankfull animation file as a binary multi frame file 8 When you click Save the bankfull values will be calculated saved and loaded into the WorkSpace Bankfull animation files can be displayed and anima
302. output the StartDate and EndDate can be edited 187 HYDAT Database September 2007 Spatial Subset para 3as 277 payal 1f 1 Temporal Subset StartD ate 1979 01 01 12 00 00 EndD ate 1973701 08 12 00 00 Figure 3 24 Subsetting the NARR data 5 Select the path and filename for the output grid clicking on the browse button E or by typing the path and filename directly into the window The output can be save as a Rectangular grid r2s or a Rectangular Cell grid r2c Select the Apply button to estimate the output file size and display the output frame count Destination Filename D AData4NARRAT emperature_week1 T23 E File Size 044 KBytes Framez Hy Figure 3 25 Setting the output destination for NARR data 6 Click on the Ok button to save the output file 188 4 THE GEN1D MODEL The theoretical basis upon which GENID was formulated 1s described by Prandle and Crookshank 1972 Incorporated into the model are ideas that originated earlier with Kamphuis 1968 and Crookshank 1971 Briefly the one dimensional shallow water wave equations of motion and continuity are solved by an explicit finite difference scheme using central differences in a staggered grid system Water elevations and velocities are solved at alternating grid points in both the spatial and temporal domains A multi attribute EnSim Network object is used to carry all the information for the model The EnSim environm
303. ow flow data occurred in the months of January and February Remove the data from the months by clicking on the check boxes 150 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2007 adjacent to the months in the subset box Data points are not removed from the view but will appear greyed out In this example January and February have been removed as shown in Figure Figure 2 38 CO RatingCurvesAnalysis O2FEDOT Name Discharge O Flow02FE00 Level H Leveld2FE00 Ratinglurvesnalysis Ba ema a Hating Curve a cH Eal degree 1 Cor Coeff 0 5842 Logt 33 392 M 17 9355 H O Aug Sen M Oct F Noy er Start 1998 01 01 End 18938704701 Figure 2 38 The data from the months of January and February have been removed from the calculations By removing the selected months a new rating curve has been calculated and the correlation coefficient has improved to 0 9842 As shown in Figure Figure 2 38 several low flow points are skewing the upper section of the curve An additional temporal subset can be created but the low flow points may be in the middle of the data set In that case creating a temporal subset would not solve the problem The remaining low flow data points can be removed by inactivating the points Removing the few remaining points by selecting them and making them inactive results in a rating curve with a correlation coefficient of 0 9966 as shown in Figure Figure 2 39 151 EnSim
304. own with a dashed magenta outline 2 Double click on the view again or select Activate from its shortcut menu An activated view will appear with a raised outline and can be manipulated as 1f it were a regular view window See the section for the type of view you re manipulating for more information To change the order of objects in the report Objects in the report window are shown with the most recently added objects on top To reorder them select the object you would like to move and select Order from its shortcut menu e Bring to Front The object will appear on top of any other objects in the report e Send to Back The object will appear beneath any other objects in the report e Bring Forward The object will be raised one position e Send Backward The object will be lowered one position To change the border around an object in the report Any object in the report view can be displayed with or without a border To remove or change an object s border select Properties from its shortcut menu S1 EnSim Core September 2007 Note If you remove the border from a rectangle rounded rectangle or ellipse its outline will disappear If you haven t given it a background colour you may have a hard time finding it again Note To change a view s background colour use the Display menu in its Properties dialog You can access that dialog through the Workspace or by activating the view within the report See the Display Pr
305. port The 1D button is Fal the polar button is FF the 2D button is Bl the 3D button is Hl the spherical button is KA and the report button is Hl Views are automatically numbered according to the order in which they are created The numbers are not related to view type and can be changed by editing the title or subtitle in the Meta Data tab of the view s Properties dialog box Multiple view windows may be opened and displayed simultaneously There are three options for fitting the windows automatically to the available space Cascade Tile Horizontally and Tile Vertically These are found in the Windows menu 1 5 2 Removing a View Window View windows are deleted from the screen by using the 3 button in the top right hand corner of the view window Data items can be removed from a view by selecting the data item and using the Delete key selecting Remove from its shortcut menu or by selecting Edit 5Remove from the menu bar 1 5 3 Properties Shared by all View Types The view window s Properties dialog box can be accessed in three ways e With the view window selected choose the Properties command from the Edit menu e With the view window selected choose the Properties command from the shortcut menu 32 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 e Double click on the view window object in the WorkSpace AN The Properties Dialog A view window s Properties dialog has as a minimum a Display and Meta Data tab Other tabs may
306. r a ID view window To extract a velocity rose 1 Select the vector time series object from the WorkSpace for which the velocity rose is to be extracted 2 Select Tools Extract Velocity Rose 94 The following dialog will appear Section 1 6 Tools Enter Yelocity Rose Parameters x Source Times eres Example Wind Data Miri DD Mas ika Direction Sector Width 900 F Speed Bing Min 2 5 Count Hr Interval 35 Constant Interval Figure 1 73 The Velocity Rose Parameters dialog The velocity rose dialog parameters are described below September 2007 e Source TimeSeries The name of the source time series as well as the Min and Max values are shown e Direction Select a Sector Width 22 5 30 45 or 90 degrees This value defines the number of directional sectors For example a Sector Width of 90 degrees will define four 90 degree sectors for computing the velocity rose Note The first sector is always centred on 0 degrees For example with a sector width of 90 degrees the first sector will span from NorthWest to NorthEast 45 degrees to 45 degrees e Speed Bins Set up the bins using the following parameters e Min Specify the upper limit used by the first bin e Count Specify the number of bins e Interval Specify the width of the bins Clicking onthe Apply button will update the list containing bin and values based on the selected the Min Count and Interval
307. ra SweteeGwid sso ArertoASM Gee 28 Binary Single Frame nS format pt Binary Mut Frame nim format 8 s ASCTT Single Frame Si format pT 8 Binary tee Gsto pf ye SCT abi format a ee Ee ee ee pT Binary Single Frame Sim format o 8s Binary Multi Frame EnSim format 88 ASCTT Single Frame Sim format oo ee pf ye ASCH BaSim format oU Ec ee 15 EnSim Core September 2007 Object Type May Be Saved As fF tse Aref ASO Grid Note ArcView Shape File objects cannot be saved The child objects can be saved if they are of type xyz 12s or 13s ArcView Shape File objects can contain multiple objects but all these children must be the same file type MapInfo Interchange Format objects cannot be saved The child objects can be saved if they are of type xyz 12s or 13s MapInfo Interchange Format objects can contain multiple objects and these children can be different file types t GeoTIFFS although not considered a native EnSim file format can be saved within EnSim Any changes made to the GeoTIFF s legend or colours will be preserved within the file Opening a GeoTIFF that has been saved in EnSim with another application may remove this data Hint To save the contour lines of a gridded data item refer to the section on Extracting Isolines under Extracting Data on p 91 Extract the isolines and save them as a line set 12s 13s 1 4 3 Properties of Data Items All object
308. re however very useful for comparing two data attributes The icon used to represent an XY data item in the WorkSpace is The file extension of an XY data item may be xy or dat File Headers xy dat An example XY data file 1s shown below HEE HE HH Ht EH HH TEE EH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EEE HE EH EEE EE HE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE OE EE FileType xy ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType XY DataObject Application EnSimHydrologic Version 2g kee 9D WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pei ADE 15 2005 11420 AM AA AA AA AA AA AA AA E AttributeName 1 AttributeUnits 1 AttributeName 2 AttributeUnits 2 EndHeader ZO ale 2099 55 2906 79 1861446 25015241 1861 46 2l 25T LosT La 29224 200 eso 45124255 1831 00 4313503 1891B6 43 LI a03 025 Lobs T Ale dbo leto LIO Like point sets XY data objects have no unique keywords See File Headers on p 236 for more information on general keywords File Format xy dat XY data objects have a very simple layout Data is always stored in ASCII format organized into two columns Each column represents a single attribute such as discharge level width and so on EnSim is capable of reading files without a header as long as the data portion of the file is properly formatted that is with two values per line If the file is then saved from within EnSim a header will be added This format is particul
309. re information e Meta Data Provides information regarding the type of window By clicking in the title field you may change the title of the view in the WorkSpace and the title block of the view window s Properties dialog This also changes the title of the view when it is printed See the section Printing under Saving and Copying Images Press ppl to update changes made to the controls in the tabs and keep the Properties dialog box open Press OK to update the changes and close the dialog Either selection will update changes made on all tabs 1 5 4 The 1D View Window The ID view window can display either time series XY data items or a 3D Line Set in a graph format The 1D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the ID view A new ID view window can be opened by pressing the zal button in the tool bar 33 EnSim Core September 2007 A typical 1D view window 1s displayed below 1D Yiew 2 E iol x 294 000 241 600 Figure 1 17 A typical 1D view window displays changes in value over time 1 5 4 1 Labels of Axes ina 1D View For a time series with an explicit date the date will appear on the axis See Time Series ts ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 on p 258 for details concerning time step formatting For a 3D line set in the 1D view the units are distance along the line from the starting point of the line set For an XY data item the axes take on the units of each attribute rep
310. re the attributes associated with the line The number name and type of attributes are specified by the AttributeName and AttributeType keywords in the file header The following lines of data contain the x and y coordinates and the z coordinate in the case of a 3D line set of each vertex in the order in which they are connected If the data represents a closed polyline or polygon the coordinates on the first and last lines must be identical The first number in each line is the x coordinate the second number is the y coordinate and the third number if present is the z coordinate Binary Because EnSim does not support time varying line sets there 1s no binary format for 12s or 13s files 251 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 XYZ Point Sets xyz XYZ Point sets are stored in a relatively simple format They contain data describing points that are not connected and may not follow any particular pattern Their data does not vary over time and contains only a single attribute The icon representing point sets in the WorkSpace is i The file extension of a point set file is xyz File Headers xyz An example of a point set file is shown below Hit HH HH HH HH EE HH HH HH EE EH EO EEE EH EOE HE aE EEE EEO EEE EOE OE EE EEE EEE FileType xyz ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType XYZ Point Set it Application EnSimTelemac Version 2 4 18 WrittenBy Username
311. ream lines cursor 83 POPUD pa AA AA 80 TUCO EE E tans eee 84 selection INfO irere e 81 Data Extracting See Extracting Data Datums See Ellipsoids DC COR AA AA 53 Ce daanan ana 58 COMPASS paa E 58 TC OM AA 4 NAD GIG aee S 59 legends cassis csesedcanbaamiwnescantactus 54 56 DEN ree eer en ree ae 270 checking and editing 121 in watersheds u mmmamamasasasasasaasasaaan 121 Depression Fill L11 133 Downstream Reach 138 Drainage Area 132 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis 141 computed flow a 143 Drainage Directions 131 300 September 2007 E Ellipsoids 1111 1 11 a 2l EnSim ADONE prea aa 2 APPHCAHONS maana l COnVentIoOnS aaa 2 Hydrologic ceeeeeees 117 273 Equations CONNIE EA tecessocbessnceets 189 MONON a AAAH 189 Navier Stokes ccccceeeeeees 189 Extracting Data eee 85 SONG saa 91 D 91 points ua 91 EU sense LANGAN 90 SU ACCS agn ada 86 E E A 88 CULV ALUECS enar na 89 SONGS een 87 temporal statistics 86 time Series a 92 velocity TOSC cccveancssnasatevavee tssceeaes 94 F File Headers Uu 236 File Menu u 1111111 a 2 File Types TELS NOMMOUS secasses 240 PS CIN AA APA 240 BINAN aa 240 ME NGATETI aka ONE 236 KEYWOTOS senine e 236 SUPPONE AA PA 235 Flight Paths 00 0 0 eeeeeees 61 LODGE UIC ANAN 62 G GENID ana adn 117
312. reated Watflood Map when the watershed object is dropped into the Watflood Map object To reset the data attributes to their default values make sure that the appropriate watershed object is associated with i e is a child of the Watflood Map Select the command Collect Data From Watershed from the shortcut menu of the Watflood Map Note Changes to the data attributes will be lost except for land use class attributes 2 3 1 4 3 Displaying Different Data Attributes in the Watflood Map To display the same data attributes for all cells 1 Ensure that the Watflood Map is displayed in a 2D or 3D view 2D is preferable 2 Double click on the Watflood Map in the WorkSpace A Properties dialog will appear 3 In the Data tab select an attribute in the list and click ___ APPI A green check mark will appear next to the selected attribute The Watflood Map will be updated in the view Properties of new Watflood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta mang Edit Land Cover Attributes Options Add Date Bere Gear Gear Land Cover oe Contour Interval Attribute Min Mas Units Channel Elevation EL U 158 m 2 Drainage Area FRAL 0 Tif Z 3 Drainage direction 5 0 o 4 River Class IBM 0 U U 5 Contour Density ROUGH 40 b Channel Density CHNL F w H OK Apply Cancel Figure 2 52 This tab determines which data attributes are displayed 162 Section 2 3 WATFL
313. regardless of the type of simulation run The output file produced is a time varying network file which 1s displayed in the WorkSpace as a child of the parameter object The Out Network object has the same geometry as the channel object that was used as input to the simulation 208 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 WorkSpace a paka Items ban br Channels Velocity AG Down Boundary fees AG Up Boundary Si E Sut aad Surface eer rent ae et ha go TF Figure 4 23 The Out NCEE object is the output a a simulation If the simulation run was a normal Run a Run To Steady State or a Generate Rating Curve Run Type the Out Network object will have three data attributes e Velocity This is the velocity of water within a channel segment in m s e Discharge This is the total discharge from a channel segment in m s e Surface Elevation This is the elevation of the surface of the water in a channel segment in metres If the simulation was a Calibrate Friction to Water Level or a Calibrate Friction to Discharge Run Type then the Out Network object will have a fourth data attribute e Strickler Friction This is the calculated Strickler Friction coefficient for a channel segment If a simulation has already been run for a particular GEN1D Parameter object you can load the results by selecting Run Load Results from the menu bar The Out Network object can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view and can be animated The
314. resented in the graph The x axis and y axis the value axis are not labelled automatically as multiple time series that are not expressed in the same units may be displayed in the same 1D View A label can be created by clicking the button in the tool bar see Labels under View Decorations on p 59 for details The units of the data may be found in a popup window see Data Probes under Tools on p 80 or on the Data tab of the Properties dialog 1 5 4 2 The 1D View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim application window provides information on the current window For an active 1D window with a time series the location of the cursor is displayed with respect to the time axis T and the value axis or y axis V For an active 1D window with a line set the location of the cursor is displayed with respect to the distance axis D and the value axis or y axis V Ready Date vs Value 1979 08 17 22 05 Wal 6 74155 FI ZA 34 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 1 5 4 3 Manipulating the 1D View The view can be panned by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button depressed Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up if that option is available Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view is being manipulated a hand cursor W will appear The view can also be manipulated by a
315. resents grid data such as a regular grid or triangular mesh These objects have the following icons E XA E e Wireframe Shows the lines comprising the grid without shading e Surface Shaded surface representation of a grid object e Isolines Isolines are line contours in which the levels are determines by the object s colour scale 17 EnSim Core September 2007 Filled contours Filled contours are isolines or contours with the areas between the lines filled in with the colour of the contour level As with isolines filled contour levels are determined by the object s colour scale e Points Shows the nodes of a grid e Arrows Only applicable to vector objects arrows represent the vector at each node The size and colour of the arrow represent the magnitude of the vector These style types may be applied to objects whose icon represents a line set or time series Icons for these objects include 8 e Lines Shows only the lines or polylines of the object Points are hidden e Lines and Points Shows the lines or polylines and points of the object e Points Only Shows only the points or nodes of the lines or polylines Lines are hidden These style types may be applied to objects whose icon represents point data line sets and time series displayed as lines and points or points only For the line sets and time series these styles are available in the lower right portion of the window e Lin
316. right of the word Value in the popup window To view the value of all attributes for an object in the pop up windows choose Extended Popup Info from the Display tab of the Properties dialog of the view object An example of a view window displaying an ArcView shape file an extended popup window the properties dialog for the shape file data item and the properties dialog for the 2D View object is shown below 22 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 a 2D Yiew 1 Properties of 2D View 1 Display Recording Spatial Temporal Meta Data Options E Background Colour eee Show Compass t blax Persistent Popups a 78 467121 75 608248 Extended Popup Into T Seen yale 43 5542225 46 767 0 T Use Display Lists Grid Options I Labels F Colour 3 2 Label Size B Divisions Hint If Show Grid Properties of OntarioDrainag Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data a 5 04 O 46 327 Lines 40120 Length 0 219 2 9 LATER Unclassified Line Feature FHODEH 28736 TNODER 28639 aa LPOLYH 5375 PAHPOLTH 12164 NLENGTH 0 218560104757 NG Attribute Name Max 1 LAYER 2 FNODE 2 29551 3 TNODE 29551 4 LPOLY l b43 5 RPOLYH 12643 6 LENGTH U O0007 0347 5 49685 oe E a a ma AA a AE P T a E a OF Apply Cancel Ko ba Figure 1 9 The popup window displays useful data about the current attribute Note The Length displayed in the upper portion of the popup window 0 219 is th
317. rshed co Collect physioagraphical data from the watershed E C Calculate FRAC from Contibuting Areas Collect Cancel Figure 2 44 This Map Gen tab has had data entered manually 2 Click the ppl button To set map file specifications automatically Properties of Watflood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Specification Pa ij Origin 414000 4983000 Count 1 15 Delta 200i 000 te Default Settings User Settings Fitto User specified deltas Source Watershed fT est atershed Collect physiographical data from the watershed C Calculate FRAC from Contributing Areas Collect Cancel Figure 2 45 This Map Gen tab has been given values from a source watershed 1 Setting the specifications manually requires that a watershed be associated with the map file Select the amp Default Settings Option The specifications will be determined by fitting the basin to the associated watershed The map file will be created from all the watershed data contained within the Watflood Map specifications Selecting Collect will cause all of the watershed data contained within the WATFLOOD specifications to be extracted and applied to the Watflood Map objects 156 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 WorkSpace B pago Items k a EB DEM beeen ban Wa Channels Stream Order i Basin 1 Figure 2 46 A Watflood Map associated wi
318. rst list box 4 Select the level object from the available time series in the second list box 5 Click OF Note Although the time series in Figure Figure 2 35 are labelled as discharge and level any two time series can be used to perform the RCA So any two parameters can be examined to determine their relationship Note also that it s also possible to select the same series for both parameters Whatever the source of the parameters the RCA will appear in its own window as shown in Figure Figure 2 36 147 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 ie RatingCurveAnalysis O2Z2KFO05 Mame Discharge Q Howl EF005 Level H Level02KF005 Frarctineinass mag LI m OO Hating Curve fo C H H0 N Poli degree 4 Corr Coeff 0 9759 f Logi 272 033 M Gio cet H O seem Display Colour Default bel Subset M Jan ff Jul W Feb fe Aug IW Mar fw Sep Iw tp fw Oct M May Iw Nov IY Jun ft Dec Start 1960 07 01 End 1996412421 Reset Figure 2 36 This RCA examines the flow vs discharge relationship of the Ottawa River at Britannia from 1960 to 1996 For each RCA four 1 dimensional views appear in the dialog 1 Discharge Q time series 2 Level H time series 3 Discharge vs Level 4 LOG Discharge vs LOG Level H for power curves or SQRT Level H for polynomial curves The panel on the left hand edge of the RCA window allows you to control the appearance and
319. rticular view the view s coordinate system will change only when all of the data items have been changed to a new coordinate system For example if two data items both with the Polar Stereographic coordinate system are displayed in a Polar Stereographic view the view s coordinate system will remain the same if one of the data items 1s changed to the Lat Long coordinate system Only when the second data item is also changed to the Lat Long coordinate system will the view s coordinate system change to match 29 EnSim Core September 2007 1 4 3 5 Meta Data The Meta Data tab displays the information documented for the data e g source file type obtained from the file header see File Headers on p 236 for information on file headers A sample Meta Data tab is shown below Properties of EnSimExampleObject x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data En5imE sample0 bject D Rect Scalar D Projects data 5E nSimD ata En5imE sample bject rs Application En5im5 ample5pp Version 204 WnttenBy Example User LreationDate Fri Jan 11 2005 10 08 Ah Apply Cancel Figure 1 16 The Meta Data tab shows information about the object file Some meta data fields may be changed depending on the object For example the name and title of an object may be changed from this tab Changing the Title field alters the title appearing in the header of the Properties dialog Changing the Name field alters the name of the obj
320. ry September 2007 A rating curve is a fitted curve that approximates a discharge or flow versus stage or level relationship at a location of a particular river or stream EnSim Hydrologic provides two curve fitting schemes for performing a rating curve analysis Power and Polynomial 2 2 2 1 1 Power Curve Fit The power curve is described by the following power equation O C H H where Q discharge C discharge when H H 1 0 H stage Hy stage when discharge equals 0 0 and n slope of the rating curve 1 145 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 2 2 1 2 Polynomial Curve Fit The polynomial curve 1s described by the following equation 1 O ILAN se kd 4G 2 where Q discharge H stage C polynomial coefficient and n polynomial order 2 2 2 2 The Rating Curve Analysis Interface A rating curve analysis can be performed on any pair of level and discharge time series For the sake of convenience if a HYDAT station with both flow and level time series 1s selected an RCA can be created The HYDAT database contains discrete values daily weekly monthly and so on and EnSim does not interpolate between data records So a rating curve analysis can only be performed for time periods when both flow and discharge records exist Note If a time series has been restricted to a subset the RCA will only be performed on the data included in the subset If the subsets of the level and discharge
321. s 247 PAO CUI AA 247 DINA re 248 TING CAC C0 aaa AN 246 SCO EE E E E 10 AA 4 NEO a AA AO 10 AA PN 4 ky CA AA 106 U Upslope Elevation 134 Upslope Slope cee 135 Upstream Network 137 URP Metafiles 00 00 00 281 y Vector Field create AA 96 September 2007 Velocity Rose 11 94 265 file format AGING aata 265 EDCA NA 265 VIEWS aanak 32 1 dimensional ccccceeeeeeeeees 33 AG ee 34 display properties 35 Manipulating 35 Stats DAL aan A ANS 34 2 dimensional 39 coordinate systems 39 display properties 41 Manipulating 40 status bar aaa 40 3 dimensional a 42 display properties 45 Manipulating 43 SAS AA 43 adding data items to 5 ON a 60 CAT naa NAA a2 CIE COMAUIONS saesrrrer enaar 53 PO naa AN 36 coordinates issccsarersntecsnsietecen 37 display properties 38 Manipulating 37 SPAS DAL aaa aai 37 properties re 32 properties dialog aaaaaaaaaasasaaa 33 IMO aNG 32 removing data items from 5 PODOLU PG 49 manipulating S1 page setup properties S2 1 21100 DAT Gee eee eee See 49 KENT a Na 53 LOOM DAY kaaa aa 50 Jolalg sl CAP 46 display properties 47 Manipulating
322. s Bar 1 dimensional view 34 2 dimensional View 66666 40 3 dimensional VIEW c66606 43 POLAR VIEW seision 37 PODOVI ON opra 49 spherical VIEW eesssseseeensssssseee 46 Stream Strahler Order 122 Stream Power Uu 136 Surfer Grid file 00000000000000000a 270 Synchronizing ua 62 I Tables 0 1 3a aa aaa 11 263 file format As NG 264 ISMAIL aigecauseene PE 264 P DEEE 263 O e AA AA AA 4 Telemac EnSim cccccceccceecce ees l Time Series 92 258 computing distribution 97 file format ASG maana 260 UG AA 260 DE daa 260 TYG 3 AA 261 1A AA 261 DEO ana 262 Da a 262 file header 258 259 Kas RING erreren 78 scalar EXPE aera s 11 LEON apan Nana sA 4 AN 11 Index vector ali AN 11 ICON aaa ana ee GA 4 DINO NCH cernar 11 Tips u aaa 106 Tool Bar aaa AN 8 AA soescasanateeeostianucecaoees 61 report VIEW mmm aasa 50 Toob sete ese eee 67 era 610 BANGA APA 100 create vector field 96 creating data items 67 data probes a 80 extracting data seereis 85 mapping data items 98 resampling time series 78 time series compute distribution 97 Topaz watershed file 281 Triangular Mesh 246 file format 0 0 0 eeeeceeceeeeeeeee
323. s have properties that can be viewed and edited from the Properties dialog box An object s Properties dialog box can be accessed in three ways 1 With the object selected choose the Properties command from the Edit menu An object is selected using the workspace or by double clicking on the object in a view window 2 With the object selected choose the Properties command from the shortcut menu right click An object is selected using the workspace or by double clicking on the object in a View Window 3 Double click on the object in the workspace The tabs contained in a properties dialog are specific to the object s data type e g point data line set triangular mesh Objects that can be displayed in 1D usually have three tabs Display Data and Meta Data Objects that can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view window commonly have five tabs Display Colour Scale Data Spatial and Meta Data Some objects will have none of the tabs described below For example some objects that are specific to one application are designed to guide you through a specific set of tasks These details are described in the section of the manual that is specific to the particular application Some Properties tabs may be quite different for some objects especially those that are specific to one EnSim application 16 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007 The Properties tabs may also be embedded 1n dialogs that are specific to a particular application F
324. s occurring at a grid or mesh point over time for each node of a grid or mesh To extract residuals 1 Select the object for which the residuals are to be calculated The object must be a rectangular grid or triangular mesh and the data must be vector data Appropriate objects in the WorkSpace will have one of these two icons or Al 2 Select Tools Extract Residuals 90 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 The residual vectors will be created as a child of the original grid or mesh and can be saved in the same format as the parent file 1 6 5 3 Extracting Isolines The extract isolines tool creates one or more lines connecting nodes of specific values To extract an isoline 1 Select the object in the WorkSpace for which the isolines are to be extracted 2 Select Tools Extract Isolines and then select Single Isoline or Multiple Isolines e For the Multiple Isolines option the isolines will be created using the levels specified under the data item s Colour Scale tab in its Properties dialog e For the Single Isolines option a Query Dialog will appear Enter the value for which the isoline is to be extracted The range of possible values will be provided in the dialog FREE SURFACE has limits Min 144 26 Man 148 568 Please specify the desired lsolevel value Cancel r Figure 1 70 The limits of the range of values for a single isoline are provided A single isoline can also be extracted usin
325. s to the Channels def object The Number of Channels value on the Channels def tab of the Watershed properties dialog will increase by one for each set of channels added and the new channels will be listed and enabled 4 Go back to the Watershed tab of the properties dialog change the Flow Algorithm to AT_Search if it isn t already and click Perede lol x ve E Figure 2 13 These channel objects are shown before left and after right the predefined channels black were added 2 1 3 3 5 Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes A watershed outlet node marks the drainage outlet of a basin that meets user defined criteria This node if present occurs at a point on the channel just before the channel joins with one or more other channels 127 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 On the Criteria tab of the Channels Properties dialog watershed outlet nodes are defined by two parameters e Minimum Watershed Area All outlet nodes with an upstream drainage area greater than this value will be potential watershed outlets e Minimum Adjoining Watershed Area Watersheds adjacent to the potential watershed outlets must have upstream drainage areas greater than this value To display more watershed outlet nodes decrease these parameters This will cause smaller drainage areas to qualify as watersheds To display fewer watershed outlet nodes increase the parameters The display of watershed outlet nodes is controlled by the Tar
326. software can be imported into EnSim Hydrologic to create a watershed object The Topaz files must be in ArcInfo ASCII grid file arc format An ArcInfo grid file from Topaz may be added to the EnSim WorkSpace and displayed in a 2D or 3D view To create a new watershed object from Topaz files select File New Watershed from Topaz files from the menu bar A dialog will appear requesting the paths of the Topaz DEM watershed boundary drainage directions and upstream drainage area files Load Watershed From Topaz x DEM fildep relef or smooth E Boundary File bound Drainage Directions File Hovec A Upstream Drainage Area File uparea Cancel Figure 2 2 This dialog box loads a watershed from Topaz files Click Ha to browse for the files Once a file has been specified EnSim Hydrologic will look within the same directory for the associated files If any of the file suggestions are incorrect simply use the browse button to change any of the automatically specified files 2 1 3 Creating a New Watershed Object To create a new watershed object select File gt New Watershed from the menu bar or click on the Oo button on the Tool bar A watershed object will be created and listed under the Data Items category with the component files empty 118 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 WorkSpace E Data Items EEE Frew Watershed Ta d an Figure 2 3 A new wa
327. software packages 235 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 File Headers All EnSim native file formats have similar headers The first portion of the header is identical for all of these files An example from an xyz file 1s shown below Hit HH HH HH HHH EE HH HH HH EE OE HH EO EH EE EEE EOE EE EEE EHO EE EEE OE OE EE EEE EEE H FileType xyz ASCII EnSim 1 0 Copyright c Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council 1998 2005 DataType XYZ Point Set it Application EnSimHydrologic Version APAN NGPA WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 157 2005 1120 AM e Keywords begin with the colon character Keywords may have specific meanings within the context of the application file type such as the origin count and delta of a rectangular grid When EnSim recognizes one of the keywords it will look for the proper information immediately following Keywords that have no direct meaning within the context of a particular file type are treated as Meta Data Keywords can be added to the file in the MetaData tab of the Properties dialog by using the button or can be added directly into the file by using a text editor Note The EndHeader keyword must be the last line of the header Other keywords can appear in any order but if a given keyword appears more than once in a header the last listed appearance will replace any earlier occurrences Standard keywords appearing in the top section of the header like those
328. spaces tabs or line returns may separate the data The formats of ASCII files vary and depend on the type of data Binary Files In binary files the values or attributes associated with the object geometry may change at each time step Each step therefore follows a similar format that is repeated for the total number of steps The data at each time step is referred to as a record Each record has a header that specifies the time in the simulation at which the data was recorded All record headers have the same format regardless of the file type The format of a record header is as follows The first numbers in the record header specify the time step data and time Nine 4 byte integer variables are allocated for these numbers Time Stamp ABA AA ee Record Header Figure A 1 The record header can record both placement within an animation and absolute time of a record 1 Frame number Increases sequentially with each record The first record must have a value of 1 the second a value of 2 and so on 2 Simulation time step number Increases sequentially with each record The values may increase at any increment and may vary by more than one increment through the file The remaining bytes contain the time stamp which records the simulation date and time 3 Year 4 Month 240 Appendix A September 2007 Day Hour Minute Second Millisecond If the year and month are zero the time stamp is consid
329. ssumed to use the Cartesian coordinate system with an unknown ellipsoid Refer to the previous section on assigning a coordinate system to an object for further details The following section outlines the criteria for keeping track of a coordinate system for an object and a view e Data Item Coordinate System Unknown View Coordinate System Unknown The data item can be dragged onto the view e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Unknown If the data item has a known coordinate system once the object has been placed in the view the view will be assigned the coordinate system of the data item e Data Item Coordinate System Unknown View Coordinate System Known If a view already has a coordinate system from another object the view will give a warning when you attempt to view an object with an unknown coordinate system An error message similar to the dialog shown below will appear To avoid this problem assign a coordinate system to the object Refer to the previous section for further details EnSimHydrologic x Warning Coordinate systems do not match object Example Object Coord5ys Cartesian Unknown View Coordsys LatLong R580 180 VIEW anyway 7 Figure 1 14 This error message is shown when viewing an object with an unknown coordinate system in a view with a known coordinate system e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Identical 28 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2007
330. st downstream of each outlet are of the same colour showing that each watershed outlet has a similar elevation 16000 Figure 2 48 Because they do not overlap or touch these watersheds are independent If the watersheds being modelled are nested with smaller watersheds lying within larger watersheds then they are not independent and will appear in the Watflood Map as a single watershed as shown in Figure 2 49 below 158 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2007 a 2D Yiew 1 kn E ia a a F i FF FEE T HC a pama UA E 3 a oo 2 Fa a tat k L nN E E f 7 g E k a re T mm a nag Figure 2 49 Because these watersheds are contiguous they are treated as a single watershed This is not a problem since WATFLOOD models the outflow runoff and other parameters for each cell within the grid Parameters should be edited for cells that are crossed by a watershed boundary shared between two basins See the Drainage Area parameter under Description of Data Attributes on p 159 for an example of this 2 3 1 4 Watflood Map Data Attributes WATFLOOD data attributes are listed in the Data tab of the Watflood Map s Properties dialog Once the Watflood Map file is associated with a watershed object see Creating a New Watflood Map File on p 155 EnSim Hydrologic automatically calculates most of the data attributes based on the watershed object Land use data 1s not calculated automatically and must be added manu
331. sting channel object AA 198 4 2 1 2 3 Changing a Segment Attribute Value 198 e To change a segment attribute value 2 000008 198 4 2 1 2 4 Changing a Node Attribute Value 199 e To change a node s attribute values 0 0 00 eee eee 199 e To change a node s location or value 0 000 eee ee eee 199 4 2 1 3 Down Boundary 0 0 eee 200 4 2 1 4 Up Boundary 0 a 201 4 2 1 5 Cross Sections ee eee 202 4 2 1 5 1 Associating a Cross Section with a Segment 202 e To associate a cross section with a segment 202 4 2 1 5 2 Scaling a Cross Section Aa 203 e To scale a cross section aaa 203 4 2 1 5 3 Copying a Cross section to a Segment 203 e To copy a cross section to a segment 0 00002 eee eee 203 4 2 1 5 4 Orthogonally Positioning a Cross Section 204 e To orthogonally position a cross section 00 00000 ee 204 4 2 1 5 5 Resampling a Cross Section 0 000 cee 204 e To resample a cross section 0 0 0 eee 204 4 2 1 5 6 Interpolating a Cross Section 00000 c eee 205 e To interpolate data from two cross sections 205 4 2 1 5 7 Vertically Offsetting a Cross Section 206 e To vertically offset a cross section 2 0 0
332. t is 0 Data Organization r2s r2v The ordering of points on a rectangular grid begins at the bottom left southwest corner of the grid and proceeds to the right along the bottom row When the end of the row is reached the numbering resumes at the left end of the next row up The diagram below shows a simple r2s grid Figure A 2 The points of this grid are numbered sequentially left to right and bottom to top Keywords in the header are used to indicate the coordinates of the origin of the grid the spacing between the vertices the number of points in the x and y directions of the grid and the angle of the grid From this information the coordinates of each point on the grid are determined File Formats r2s r2v The file format refers to the organization of data that is contained in the file after the EndHeader keyword that is after the entire file header 243 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 ASCII Only non time varying data can be stored in ASCII format Data values are recorded in free format This means that any number of spaces tabs or line returns may separate individual values The first value in the data set corresponds to the first point of the grid the second value to the second point and so on The data is read until a value 1s obtained for each grid point so the number of values in the file must correspond to the total number of vertices in the grid xCount yCount If there are more values than gri
333. t object has the same number of frames as the U Component object the All Frames check box will be enabled Checking this box 96 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 causes all frames of the scalar objects to be used in the creation of the Vector object If unchecked the current frames of each scalar object will be used By clicking on the Ok button the vector grid or mesh object will be created and added to the WorkSpace 1 6 7 Computing a Distribution A probability density distribution curve can be computed from a time series This curve displays the distribution of data for a record set Only the records included in a temporal subset will be used for computing the distribution To create a distribution 1 Right click on a time series in the WorkSpace 2 Select Compute Distribution from the shortcut menu The distribution will appear as a child of the selected time series A distribution object is represented by the amp icon WorkSpace op Data Items Figure 1 75 The distribution appears as a child of the time series The Data tab from the Properties dialog of the distribution displays some useful information about the time series Properties of Flow Distribution i x Display Data Meta Data Abscissa 8 Intervals 1000 Masimum 21 29 Minimum 0 Units ae sec Ordinate Mr Masimum 0 5905 Minimum T Units Probability Mean 0 632126 Std Dev 1 35137 Cancel
334. t the Recording tab 64 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 x Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Filename D Projects data New avi Bi Encoding Cinepak ia Quality B5 Frame Hate pl mage Size 530 ed Custom Size Figure 1 44 The Recording tab is found in the Properties dialog of the view 2 Provide a Filename for the recording Use the A button to browse 3 In the Movie box select the number of Frames to be recorded The movie will begin at the current frame in the view window For example 1f you want to avoid recording the first 10 frames of an animation begin record when the counter is on frame 11 If more frames are indicated than remain in the animation the final frame will be repeated 4 The Frame Rate is the number of frames per second of playback A frame rate of 15 is generally good 5 Image Size refers to the size of the view window for the recording Choose a standard window size from the menu or create a custom size by entering the width and height respectively in pixels Note that the NTSC and PAL standards are provided 6 Encoding is the type of compression used in creating the avi record Different types of encoding will produce different quality recordings The standard Windows encoding methods are provided in the menu Cinepak is the most widely used method Other choices are available under the Advanced option With the Advanced option a sec
335. tation Details 0 0 eee ees 179 e To access a selected station 0 0 cc aaa 179 e To access a station by ID aaa 180 3 2 4 Properties of aCDCD Station 00 180 3 2 4 1 Details costeneetogcn sy che asner ens PAMANANG NAO KE BANA 180 3 2 4 2 MetaData 00 aaa 181 3 2 5 Properties of Associated Time Series 181 3291 SUDSER 222 amaaha HDD ink KAN AD AO ABA AG MAYA md ia 182 3 3 NARR DATABASE 22246 KB NA BAM AA BBL Kana 184 3 3 1 Introduction a 184 3 3 2 Downloading the NARR Data 0 00005 184 3 3 3 Accessing the NARR Variables 0005 185 e To import the NARR data 0 0 0 0 cc ees 185 4 THE GEN1D MODEL 000 cee 189 4 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 22222 cece eee eee eee 189 41 1 iBASIGEQUALIONS 6 s446 25 54 PAR ae Ps ee sea ae WG KA KA 189 4 1 2 Geometric Requirements anaa ee 190 4 2 THE GEN1D INTERFACE 2 e eee eee 193 4 2 1 Setting Up Simulation Parameters 193 421 1 SIMUNO cans poe eres DANI aeee cdsevenueces ane ME 193 421 2 Chanel 222 evwcechecngeses conde 546545059 600055 5056 197 4 2 1 2 1 Creating a Channel Object 0 000000 0 8 197 e To create a new channel object 4 197 xiii EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 4 2 1 2 2 Opening an Existing Channel Object 198 e To open an exi
336. te guia das cehweadee 284 DDA 2ncacanbec machen su A eeuauhe eubaneeegeneas 284 APPENDIX D FILE TYPES OF GEN1D 285 The GEN1D Parameter File 000005 285 File Header g1d 0 0 aaa 285 File Format gid 0 0 0 cc ee ee eee 285 Simulation Parameters naana cee eee eee 286 General Parameters 0 0 cee eee ee eee eee 286 Simulation Parameters aa 286 Constants naana anaana a ee ee eee 287 lala ga AA AY 289 Boundaries aa 289 OUMU AP AA 291 APPENDIX E FILE TYPES OF HBV EC 293 The HBV EC Parameter Set File 293 File Header hby aaa 293 File Format hbv aaa 296 The HBV EC MET file 0 297 File Header met aaa 297 File Format met 0 0 00 ee eee 298 xvii EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 XVIII 1 ENSIM CORE 1 1 A QUICK OVERVIEW 1 1 1 The EnSim Simulation Environment Developed at the Canadian Hydraulics Centre CHC EnSim was created to meet the needs of a wide range of environmental prediction and decision support systems EnSim is designed as an advanced numerical modelling environment as well as a general purpose data handling and visualisation system that can easily be adapted for any class of environmental data EnSim provides an ideal framework for the integration of environmental data GIS information
337. ted in EnSim Hydrologic in the same manner as other time varying data objects 170 3 ENVIRONMENTAL DATABASES 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE 3 1 1 Introduction Surface water quality data has been collected and archived in Canada since the middle of the last century Beginning in 1908 this data has been published in a variety of printed formats Since 1991 the meteorological Service of Canada has published most of this data on CD ROM This National HY DAT CD ROM produced each year provides rapid access to a stand alone version of the National Water Data Archive This large database contains daily monthly and or instantaneous information for streamflow water level suspended sediment concentration sediment particle size and sediment load data for over 2900 active stations and some 5100 discontinued sites across Canada EnSim Hydrologic provides a graphical interface to the HY DAT database with which you can query display and analyze the data associated with each station 3 1 2 Accessing the Database The database resides in two separate directories on the CD These directories are e CD HSIS6 DATA This directory contains subdirectories organized by province which in turn contain HYDAT station index files arranged by major watersheds e CD HYDAT6 This directory contains 100 subdirectories which in turn contain the station data files The HYDAT data can be accessed directory from the CD or the directories can be copied to a loca
338. tershed contains empty component files Load a regular grid of elevations or a DEM using the button The grid file may be in r2s format or dem format See Loading and Importing Data Items under Data Items on p 10 for more information To create a new grid from another data type use the grid generation tools described in the section Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 68 The elevation grid DEM is the most important feature in the watershed object as all other components the channels and the basin outline are based on the information it contains Care should be taken to create a quality grid Drag the grid file onto the watershed object s empty DEM component within the workspace Select a flow algorithm and press the generate button EnSim will create a default channel network and a default basin 2 1 3 1 Watersheds The watershed object is the parent object for the three children The watershed properties tab describes the methods for watershed delineation and its associated component objects Properties of New Watershed q Hi Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Flow Algorithm AT Search DEM i required poe AG Enable Predefined Channels New Watershed Water5hed Cancel Figure 2 4 This newly created watershed object does not yet containa DEM Flow Algorithms 119 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 There are two algorithms available for delineating a watersh
339. th a watershed in the WorkSpace Note A Watflood Map cannot be created from a watershed object that has a rotated grid Open the Properties dialog of the watershed object s DEM and ensure that the Angle field of the Spatial tab has a value of zero When you drag a watershed object into the Watflood Map a default grid is automatically created that conforms to the following WATFLOOD grid rules e Each watershed outlet must be a square outside the watershed e There should be a border of blank grid squares around all sides of the watershed boundary The watershed outlet may be within this border e The maximum grid size is 99 cells by 99 cells lox Figure 2 47 A Watflood Map grid can be displayed in either a 2D left or 3D right view To return to the default grid e In the Watflood Map s shortcut menu select Set Spatial Default From Watershed Note All changes made to data attributes will be lost including land class data 157 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 2 3 1 3 Modelling Multiple Watersheds Creating a Watflood Map for multiple watersheds that are independent of each other i e their boundaries do not overlap is straightforward The Watflood Map will have two or more separate watersheds based on the Basins defined in the Watershed Object In the following image each separate watershed or basin is outlined in black Black dots indicate the locations of each watershed outlet Also note that the map cells ju
340. that allows you to select from which object the legend will be created If you choose an object as the source of the legend the Colour Scale properties will be used to determine the colours used If you choose to create a default legend a simple legend will be inserted 50 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 E3 Clicking this button copies the selected object to the clipboard and removes it from the report Clicking this button copies the selected object to the clipboard but leaves the original behind Clicking this button pastes the object in the clipboard into the report If there is no object available to be pasted this button will be greyed out This button toggles the snap to grid on and off See Report View Window Page Setup Properties on p 52 for more details 1 5 9 3 Manipulating the Report View The EnSim Report view represents a sheet of paper on which the report is displayed Instead of manipulating the report itself you change its appearance and contents by manipulating the objects it contains To add a view to a report In the Workspace click on the view that you would like to add Drag the view down to the title of the report just as if you were adding a data item to a regular view Note that the view will now be contained only within the report To manipulate a view that has been added to a report 1 Select the view within the report window by double clicking on it The report will be sh
341. the total number of points recorded e A Attribute Al indicates the first attribute in a file An indicates the last attribute 255 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 Point Sets pt2 Point sets like parcel sets contain point data possessing multiple attributes Their contents are displayed as a series of multi attribute points represented by the point set icon in the WorkSpace They use the file extension pt2 The data of a point set does not vary over time and is stored in ASCII Points are only referenced in two dimensions x and y However elevation may be added as an attribute Point sets may be saved as MapInfo Interchange mif files ArcView Shape shp files or as XYZ point sets When the file is saved as a MapInfo Interchange or ArcView Shape file all attributes are retained When it is saved as an XYZ point set file only the attribute that is being currently selected when the file 1s saved will be recorded Multi attribute MapInfo Interchange and ArcView Shape files are treated as point set files within EnSim File Headers pt2 An example point set file 1s shown below it aE He at at ae AE E E TE AE aE AE FE AP E TE a APE AE AE FE aE aE aE aE aE aE ae PEE aaa FileType pt2 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType Point Set Application EnSimHydrologic Version Sts lara AG WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Oct 15 2005 11 20 AM E
342. the Swedish Meteorological and Hydrological Institute The HBV EC model was adapted by Environment Canada and UBC to simulate watershed response in mountainous terrain as well as other environments EnSim Hydrologic provides the model with a two dimensional interface allowing you to relate the output of the model back to the maps from which it was derived 5 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 5 1 1 Background and History of the Model HBV is a conceptual hydrological model designed for use in mountainous environments It was originally developed by Sten Bergstrom in the early 1970s while working at the Swedish Meteorological and Hydrological Institute SMHI Over the past 35 years the model has been used extensively for hydrological forecasting engineering design and climate change studies Bergstrom 1995 provides a complete description of the history and application of the model as well as details on the basic internal routines A comprehensive evaluation of current and proposed new routines within the HBV hydrological model was carried out by SMHI in the mid 1990s Lindstrom et al 1997 One of the primary tenets of developers of the HBV model is to add complexity to the model only when it shows an improvement in the simulation of hydrological process The review of the HBV model by Lindstrom et al 1997 updated routines for watershed runoff However several proposed new algorithms proved to provide little or no significant improvement in model p
343. the generated output file e Attributes to Save to Output Network File This area determines which possible output will be saved in the network file Surface Elevation Velocity and Discharge will be automatically recorded while Conveying Width and Cross Sectional Area are optional Click on the checkbox next to the attribute name to include it The optional choices are not recorded by default 196 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 421 2 Channel Use this tab to specify the channel network that will be used for the simulation Properties of GEN1D x Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Channel FileName Sample GENID Network S1 n3q EE Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Rendering fan Style Visible Monochrome Mi Styles Lines Solid bi Pointz Point OF Apply Cancel Figure 4 6 The Channel tab controls the appearance of the channel network e FileName Click the E button to select the network file that describes the channel This file must be present to run a simulation See Appendix A on p 266 for more information on network n3s files For more information on the property tabs for the channel object see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 16 2a Line Width 34 Point Size 4 2 1 2 1 Creating a Channel Object To create a new channel object 1 Click on in the Channel tab of the G
344. the resulting curve 149 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 To adjust the rating curve directly 1 Choose either E C1H H0 TN or eqno func H from the rating curve options e Ifthe function has been selected adjust the Poly Degree option as well 2 Click on any of the equation coefficients listed in the text box in the left hand panel 3 Adjust the coefficients until an appropriate curve is determined 4 Click App The rating curve and correlation coefficient will be updated The following examples illustrate how an improved rating curve can be obtained Example 1 ea RatingCurveAnalysis O2FEOO07 Name PatingCurweAnalusiz Hating Curve O C H HO N Pole degree 1 Cor Coeff 0 9913 Logt 328 5371 Pd 20 4539 HO O Discharge vs Level evel HO BO 22 22 ee ae To aa ue aaa H Display Colour Default as Subset I Jan Jul WwW Feb Aug MoMa P Sep fon te wW Aor TF Uct F May IT Noy M Jun F Dec Start 1998701701 End 1998704701 Heset l i l Figure 2 37 This RCA has not yet been adjusted The example in Figure Figure 2 37 contains four months of data The power rating curve is used As shown the correlation coefficient is 0 9813 This data set has a high density of low flow data To remove data used in the rating curve a subset of the data can be completed to remove a majority of the low flow data A majority of the l
345. tify additional basin outlets There are Watershed outlet nodes on the grid Done Done BZ Ok Figure 2 5 This dialog shows the progress of a watershed being generated Once this dialog has been accepted by clicking OK two new objects Channels and Basin 1 will appear in the WorkSpace as children of the watershed object 120 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2007 2 1 3 2 DEMs The DEM digital elevation model tab from the watershed properties dialog describes the rectangular grid r2s containing the digital elevation data used in the delineation of the watershed The Meta Data tab indicates the source data from which the DEM was created The DEM appears as a child of the watershed object in the WorkSpace Properties of New WaterShed x Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Rendering wireframe Style Scale 11 I Visible Z Shift D Monochrome M fe Clip Contours 1 Line width zH Foint Size Figure 2 6 The DEM tab is accessible as a child of the watershed object 2 1 3 2 1 Checking for Errors and Editing the DEM Delineation of channels and the watershed boundary by EnSim is only as good as the DEM It is important to check the channels and watershed boundary with existing data for example GIS data to ensure correct location of streams and watersheds GIS data images of the actual paths of streams and r
346. tions for the live stream lines cursor may be changed in the Tools tab of the 2D view s Properties dialog box Properties of 7D Yiew 1 i Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Live Cursor W Enable Stream Lines Time5tep 4 PointCount Figure 1 61 The Tools tab contains the live stream lines cursor options e Enable Stream Lines Checking this box enables stream lines Unchecking the box enables the general live cursor see above The Live Cursor under Tools on p 82 e TimeStep The timestep used for calculating each point of the flow path e PointCount The maximum number of points within the calculated flow path 83 EnSim Core September 2007 Note For a vector grid or mesh with units of m s a TimeStep of 4 and a PointCount of 60 would compute a projected flow path over 240 seconds 4 times 60 using the velocities of the current frame To use the live stream lines cursor first ensure that the desired vector data object is selected and the Stream Lines are enabled then click on the button in the tool bar Once the cursor is placed in the view a projected flow path will be computed and displayed As the cursor is moved the projected flow path will be automatically updated To turn off the live stream lines cursor press the z button again or the lt Esc gt key A ii Pl HP a Bl 4 TUKA MAN NAN 7 igure 1 62 T HIN Live Stream Lines Cursor shows a projected flow Path Str
347. tre of each element The size of the labels can be adjusted 1 4 3 2 Colour Scale A colour scale consists of a colour spectrum and colour levels It is automatically generated upon opening or creating a data item and can be edited The colour scale legend can be created from the colour scale and displayed in a view window See the section Legends under View Decorations on p 54 for more information Properties of Example Object x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Colours Levels 6 152 Scale Parameters Colour Interpolation HSV Linear Levels mu hla coco Interval l 0 67 Min O12 Show Legend Options Figure 1 6 The Colour Scale tab of the Properties dialog box 19 EnSim Core September 2007 To edit the colour scale Open the Properties dialog box for the object Select the Colour Scale tab The following fields may be edited e Colours This is the colour spectrum Clicking on an individual colour box provides a dialog to modify its colour Changing the top or bottom colour and then clicking on the Colours heading will modify the entire spectrum This will cause the colours to be interpolated between the top and bottom colours e Levels This is the listing of colour levels Clicking on an individual level will allow you to edit its value Clicking on the Levels heading interpolates the levels based on the Scale Style Levels Max Min and Interva
348. tributes may be added manually see Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons on p 163 or automatically from preprocessed GeoTIFF files see Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs on p 166 e Bankfull capacities Bankfull capacity is the maximum flow in cubic metres per second the stream in a cell can handle before flooding It is used for animation of flooding The Include Bankfull Capacities checkbox adds a blank section to the map file Values need to be manually inputted for each cell If the Bankfull Capacities section is not included 161 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 WATFLOOD calculates default capacities when the watershed file is generated If the Include Bankfull Capacities box is checked but the values are not changed from the default values of zero they are disregarded and WATFLOOD generates them automatically Note The outlet cell should exist in the cell immediately downstream of the last watershed cell The outlet cell should only have a value for channel invert elevation All other parameters for this cell should have a value of zero 2 3 1 4 2 Calculating the Default Data Attributes from the Watershed Object Most of the data attributes of the Watflood Map are automatically calculated from the DEM Exceptions include routing reach number land use and bankfull capacities Once the default data attributes are calculated they should be checked for accuracy The default values are automatically calculated for a newly c
349. trol Points This area lists each control point used to construct the flight path You can examine a control point by checking Jump To Selection and clicking on the point name Add This button adds the current perspective to the end of the flight path Delete This button removes the currently selected control point Insert This button adds the current perspective to the flight path above the currently selected control point Replace This button changes the currently selected control point to the current perspective 1 5 13 Synchronizing Two Views The ability to synchronize two views 1s a very useful feature in EnSim This feature allows you to observe the value of a specific point over time within a multidimensional View An example 62 Section 1 5 Views September 2007 of this might be the synchronization of an animated data item in a 2D View Source View with a time series extracted from a selected point of the animated data item Result View Currently 1D Views can receive synchronization from 2D 3D or Spherical Views To synchronize Views 1 Load a temporal data item into the WorkSpace 2 Select a point on the data item and extract the time series from the selected point See Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 92 for more details 3 Drag the extracted time series into a 1D View the Result View 4 Ensure that the ID view is the current view Select the View Select Sync View option The follo
350. trol point along the flight path Control points should be locations where the flight path curves Placing multiple control points along a straight line usually has the same effect as placing points at the beginning and end of that line 61 EnSim Core September 2007 As you add control points EnSim calculates the cubic spline between each providing a smoothly curving path that intersects each point 1 5 12 1 Flight Path Properties The Properties dialog of a flight path can be accessed through its shortcut menu or by double clicking on its name in the WorkSpace Properties of new Flight Path q Ed Display Spatial Meta Data Control Points EH Delete Insert Replace Rendering ft Visible Animate ft Show Labels 11 a Font Size 2 Line Width Bi Point Size Path Length 100 W Jump To Selection OK Apply Cancel Figure 1 41 This flight path has seven control points Rendering This area controls the appearance of the flight path The Visible and Animate checkboxes may also be toggled through the flight path s shortcut menu Path Length This value determines the number of steps used to travel along the flight path The greater the number entered the more slowly the path will be animated Tip To slow down the animation while keeping the movement smooth increase both the Path Length and the Frame Rate The Frame Rate can be found on the View s Temporal Properties tab Con
351. tween glacial snowpack water equivalent and runoff coefficient per millimetre This simulates the effect of 22 The HBV EC Model September 2007 sub glacial drainage systems The default value is 0 05 The value is typically between 0 and 0 2 e DKG This is the difference between the minimum and maximum outflow coefficients for glacier water storage per day The default value is 0 05 The maximum value would be typical of a mature glacier in late summer KGMin This is the minimum outflow coefficient for glacier water per model time step The default value is 0 05 This value would indicate an early spring outflow coefficient e KGRC This is a recession coefficient that is applied to the computation of the glacier outflow coefficient This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 7 e Area This is the total area contained within the climate zone in square kilometres This value 1s obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Elevation Band Parameters These variables deal with a specific Elevation Band Since most watersheds will contain at least a few such bands you may need to provide some information for each of them To edit the variables for an Elevation Band other than the first select the band you d like to edit from the list box shown at the top of Figure 5 18 Elevation Band Parameters Elevation Band 4 1187 Sr lumber of Land Class 4 Band Elevation 1187
352. uire the data to vary with time This tool selects a specific value for each node of a grid The result is a 2D grid or mesh a surface identical to the parent grid or parent mesh but with a particular specified value at each node In EnSim core there are several options for the type of value that is to be extracted from each node of the parent grid or parent mesh 1 6 5 1 1 Extracting Temporal Statistics Temporal Maximums This option requires time varying data It finds the maximum value that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh Temporal Minimums This option requires time varying data It finds the minimum value that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh Temporal Ranges This option requires time varying data It calculates the range of values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh Temporal Sums This option requires time varying data It calculates the sum of the values over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh Temporal Mean This option requires time varying data It calculates the mean of the values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh Temporal StdDev This option requires time varying data It calculates the standard deviation of the values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh To extract temporal statistics as a surface l 2 Select the data item from which t
353. ully add subsequent time series to the table object they must have the same temporal attributes and item count as the first 1 6 2 Editing Data Items This section covers the editing of data items including regular grids triangular meshes line sets point sets parcel sets networks and time series Components of foreign but supported files such as MapInfo Interchange or ArcView Shapefile cannot be edited directly However they may be saved in a native EnSim format which may then be edited Editing data items in EnSim consists of altering the value of the current data attribute of a displayed object In some cases the coordinates of nodes or points of the object can be edited as well 71 EnSim Core September 2007 1 6 2 1 Editing Attributes Select the component to be edited 1 e the node line segment point etc and select the Edit command from the shortcut menu A dialog box will appear which differs depending on the type of object and the number of data attributes it has To edit an attribute value click on the value to highlight it Enter the new value and press DE e Fora triangular mesh or xyz data with one data attribute both the data attribute value and the x and y coordinates at the node or point may be edited The Edit dialog that appears is nearly identical for the two objects The dialog for a TI mesh is shown below The dialog for an xyz point set would ask you to specify the new values of the point inst
354. v in t3v indicates that the data in the file are vector Both t3s and t3v files may contain time varying data which is always stored in binary format Non time varying data may be stored in ASCII or binary format The scalar triangular mesh t3s can have one or more data attributes File Headers t3s t3v An example of an ASCII file for a simple mesh containing scalar data that does not vary over time is given below Hit HH HH HH HHH HEE HH HH HH EE EH EH EH EEE EE EEE EHO EEE OEE EE EEE EEE H FileType t3s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType 2D T3 Scalar Mesh it Application EnSimTelemac Version 2 4 18 WrittenBy UserName CreationDate Pri April 15 2005 11 20 AM i a GA KG BPI EN E Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown it NodeCount 17 ElementCount 24 ElementType T3 it EndHeader 953000 57107000 14 23n100510 392900479 0 29901000 22 693000 Sd s 29 000 55 835000 33 791000 35411000 384571468 329 16530 39 5260000 84 539000 48 753000 56 110000 525993000 27 661000 bo s6042272 19 650133 622110000 714322000 69 461000 52 369000 66 659458 70 452329 652194003 21 4520611 132594006 72916187 76 933000 32 419000 N DO DO NW XO DO TO N OCH O H 246 Appendix A September 2007 6 003000 427 2631000 5 4 Aa CO OI NM e DO O dm H XO NN O H 2 OW W FB N NO O HS Oo e O1 OD Fe N I O KO 9 d i 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4
355. w Ifthe RCA was generated using the Polynomial function the following lines will replace those describing the Power Curve coefficients The rating curve has been fitted in the form Polynomial fit of the square root of the discharge t SOTTO A F B E CH DFAS F E04 Pen GF Ga it gt SqrtCoeffA 34 0 031 rSorcCoer Ts L20519 If the RCA was generated using the Polynomial function the following keywords are used e SqrtCoeff A B C D E F G This keyword defines the square root coefficient for the polynomial SqrtCoeffA and SqrtCoeffB are present for a line while additional keywords sqrtCoeffc through SqrtCoeffe are included for polynomials of greater order File Format rca ASCII All RCA objects are saved in ASCII format Only the flow and the corresponding discharge for each record used in the RCA are saved within the file The following is an example of three records from the file whose header is excerpted above 1963 07 20 00 00 00 000 847 000000 29 059999 0 19637 07721 007001007000 841 000000 29 049999 O 19637 07722 00 00 00 0000 813000000 29 000000 0 Binary Because they do not vary over time there is no binary file format for RCA files 284 Appendix D September 2007 APPENDIX D FILE TYPES OF GEN1D The GEN1D Parameter File The GENID parameter file g1d is the only native file type for this model within EnSim Hydrologic This parameter file controls all aspects of a GEN1D s
356. w LAWA NAG 99 169 CALCU vadwedaawacaeueanbadedwaaeuws AA 100 1 6 9 1 The Calculator for Data Items 0 0 0 0 eee 100 e To use the calculator 0 0 0 0 ees 100 1 6 9 2 The Calculator for Gridded Objects 100 e To use the calculator aaa 101 1 6 9 3 The Calculator for Time Series Objects 102 e To use the calculator 2 aa 102 1 6 9 4 The Calculator Expressions 0 0 0 c eee ee eee 104 1 7 HOW TO HINTS AND TRICKS 2 0 00 cee es 106 1 7 1 Draping a 3D Image OntoaDEM 106 e To drape an image eee 106 1 7 2 Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data 107 e To create a cross section or 3D polyline 00 107 1 7 3 Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data 108 e To create a cross section or 3D polyline from points or line data 108 1 7 4 Displaying Two Features of an Object Simultaneously 108 e Some other things to remember 0 000 eee eee eee 109 1 7 5 Displaying Isoline Outlined Filled Contours 109 1 7 6 Creating a Sloping Structure ina Rectangular Grid 110 1 7 7 Extracting a Spatial Subset From a Larger Grid 111 e To define a spatial subset from a rectangular grid 111 1 7 8 Extracting a Temporal Subset of Time Varying Gridded Data 111 e To extract a temporal subset
357. w window to enhance the presentation of the data Colour scale legends compasses simulation clocks and labels are all decoration objects A decoration object is selected by double clicking on it in the view window Once selected the corners of the object are highlighted with magenta squares and a dashed magenta line surrounds the object Once selected a decoration object can be moved by dragging it to another location in the view window The decoration object does not move when the data items in the view are moved or resized The selected decoration can be resized by clicking and dragging the mouse on one of the magenta squares The decoration object size 1s a percentage of the window size it 1s resized automatically when the window is resized A four arrow cursor for moving and a two arrow cursor for resizing differentiate moving and resizing 53 EnSim Core September 2007 Figure 1 32 The cursor on the left is moving the compass rose the cursor on the right is resizing it The properties of a selected decoration object are accessed by the Properties command in the Edit menu or in the decoration object s shortcut menu Note To remove a decoration Object select it and press lt Delete gt or select Remove from the shortcut menu 1 5 10 1 Legends There are two types of legends that can be drawn in a view window The colour scale legend which is dependent on the select attribute of an associated data object and an independe
358. will be performed 2 Select Tools Calculator A dialog will open Calculator x Figure 1 80 The calculator applies an arithmetic operation to a data item 3 In the Function box select the operation you would like to carry out Plus Subtract Times Divide by from the pull down menu In the field beneath this menu enter the number factor or divisor by which the values of the data item should be changed The units for the data attribute can also be entered at this time Note The units entered are stored in the EnSim file header for the data item with the AttributeUnits keyword They may be displayed on the Data tab of an object s property dialog or in a popup window Note also that changing the units of an object will not perform a conversion this entry is for reference only If a data item cannot be modified with a calculator used with the calculator the icon on the tool bar and the menu option in the Tools menu will be unavailable 1 6 9 2 The Calculator for Gridded Objects A more sophisticated tool 1s available for gridded data Both scalar and vector or static and time varying gridded data items can be manipulated with this tool 100 Section 1 6 Tools September 2007 To use the calculator 1 Select a gridded data item in the WorkSpace This is an important step as only data item with the same geometry as the selected object will be available in the calculator 2 Choose Tools Calculator A dialog window
359. window turns red g e Xand Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes 1 5 6 The 2D View Window The 2D view window displays grid and cartographic data in a plane view The default view shows the entire extent of the data within the view with an overlaying grid and coordinates The 2D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the 2D view A new 2D View window can be opened by pressing the l button a 2D View 1 ON Figure 1 21 This 2D View window shows a watershed from EnSim Hydrologic 1 5 6 1 Coordinate Systems and Units in 2D Views The default coordinate system used in the 2D view is Cartesian but other systems may also be used For example if a data item is georeferenced in latitude and longitude coordinates these coordinates are displayed along the axes of the grid system If the data is georeferenced in a UTM projection the eastings and northings are the numbers displayed on the axes If the data is not georeferenced the units of measure used to make the grid may be anything e g feet metres miles kilometres etc You are advised to ensure that all data used during an EnSim 39 EnSim Core September 2007 session are in units compatible with other files used during the same session and with other software applications Refer to the section Coordinate Systems under Properties of Data Items on p 25 for additional information on coordinate systems 1 5
360. wing dialog will appear Cancel Figure 1 42 This dialog is used to synchronize two views 5 Select the View that will provide the synchronization Source View and press the DE button 6 Animate an object in the Source View Refer to Animation under Views on p 60 for more details on animating a data item A vertical red line will appear in the Result View While the Source View is being animated the vertical red line in the Result View will be redrawn at the same temporal location as the current Source View 63 EnSim Core September 2007 oie 444997 594 sv 5022443 000 Value 0 0711676254868507 M NE Figure 1 43 These two views have been synchronized 1 5 14 Saving and Copying Images Images from a View can be copied or saved for use in other Windows applications A snapshot of the current static display in a view can be copied for use in a word processing application to add the image to a report it can be copied to presentation software or copied to a photo editor to save the image for repeated use Static images can be printed to produce a quick paper copy of the View window display Time varying or dynamic images can be saved by recording the display data as a movie or animation in avi format 1 5 14 1 Recording A movie can be created showing animated data in the view window Movies created in EnSim are in avi format To create a movie 1 In the View window Properties dialog selec
361. with each class having a different value for the three roughness parameters roughness of floodplain channel and overland flow defined in the WATFLOOD parameter file EnSim Hydrologic provides a default value of 1 A maximum of five river classes can be defined e Contour density IROUGH This gives an indication of the number of contours in a cell It is a relative description of the roughness within a cell The contour elevation interval is defined at the top of the Data tab The default interval is 1 The value of contour crossings in a cell has a minimum of and a maximum of 99 WATFLOOD cannot handle contour densities greater than 99 so all cells having a contour density equal to or greater than 99 will be assigned a value of 99 If multiple cells have a contour crossing value of 99 increase the contour elevation interval to ensure the roughness is appropriately described e Channel density ICHNL This is the number of main channels that cross a grid square The value must be between 1 and 5 If it is greater than 1 each channel is considered equal in SIZe e Routing reach number IREACH Values greater than zero will output channel inflows at those cells These inflows can be used for external routing which may be desirable in modelling tidal or backwater effects The default value assigned by EnSim Hydrologic to all cells 1s zero e Land use The number of Land Cover Classes can be modified within the Data tab The land use data at
362. ws The second branch of the hierarchical tree consists of categories which are organizational headings for objects There are two categories in the EnSim WorkSpace Data Items represented by the 8 icon is the first category It contains all the files or data items that have been opened or created during the EnSim session The second category is Views represented by the amp icon It contains all the view windows that are active during the session and the objects associated with each view The remaining branches of the hierarchical tree are objects Objects can represent files parts of a file or views An example of an object would be a model results file in the Data Items category Another example would be a view window in the Views category 1 2 1 Managing Objects in the WorkSpace Objects sometimes contain other objects An example of an object containing another object is an EnSim Hydrologic watershed object shown below EnSim Core September 2007 WorkSpace Data Items E Testwatershed BA DEM 84 Channels Stream Order a Basin 1 AT Basin 2 H 5 a aet PT te pe pete EE ae 8 mai tem ma Figure 1 2 An EnSim Hydrologic watershed object contains other objects The three objects under the Test Watershed object are considered children of the parent object Other examples of objects that are shown as children are extracted time series and 3D line sets The children or components of an object can be disp
363. xtraction files carrying data from one frame of a parent file containing time varying data e EndHeader Required Always the last keyword in a header Anything appearing after this keyword is considered part of the body of the file Comments begin with the pound character All characters following on a line are ignored The copyright comment is the same for each file The DataType comment depends on the type of file It corresponds to the type of file specified by the keyword FileType but written out in full for informational purposes The example below shows a file type keyword line and a data type comment line from the same file FileType 13s ASCII EnSim 1 0 DataType 3D Line Set Other header information varies depending on the type of file However all headers must end with the keyword EndHeader 239 EnSim Hydrologic September 2007 ASCII and Binary Files Files containing data that does not vary with time may be in either ASCII or binary format Files having data that does vary over time must be in binary format Both ASCII and binary files have ASCII headers This file attribute 1s specified in the file header with the keyword FileType After the three letter file extension the identifier ASCII or BINARY 1s written ASCIl Files The format of ASCH files is usually fairly simple and they can be edited and saved with any text editor The data delimiter in ASCII files 1s white space in most cases any number of
364. y position a cross section 1 Within a 2D or 3D view window select either the segment or the cross section that is not properly positioned 2 From the shortcut menu select CrossSection Orthogonally Position CrossSection at Segment if you selected the segment or Orthogonally Position if you selected the cross section 4 2 1 5 5 Resampling a Cross Section If the data used to define a cross section is too detailed or not detailed enough the line can be resampled producing a cross section containing more or fewer points To resample a Cross section 1 Within the View window select the cross section that you d like to resample 2 From the shortcut menu select Resample followed by Max Distance to increase the number of points on the line or Equi Distance to decrease the number of points Resampling cross section length 79 092233 pointCount 308 Enter MAXIMUM inberpoint spacing Value Cancel Figure 4 16 This dialog allows you to enter a Maximum interpoint spacing value e For a Max Distance resampling the number to be entered represents the maximum distance that will be allowed between any two points on the line If any points are further apart than this additional points will be inserted to decrease the distance between them 204 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2007 Resampling cross section length 79 092233 pointCount 308 Enter EQUIDISTANT interpoint spacing Value Cancel
365. yright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc il ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS EnSim Hydrologic has been a collaborative effort funded in part by Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Special thanks are directed at several individuals who have supported the EnSim Hydrologic project by serving as beta testers and providing technical feedback constructive criticism and helpful comments Raymond Bourdages Technical Development Water Survey Branch Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Stuart Hamilton Pacific Yukon Region Meteorological Service of Canada Environment Canada Vancouver British Columbia David Hutchinson Pacific Yukon Region Meteorological Service of Canada Environment Canada Vancouver British Columbia Nicholas Kouwen Department of Civil Engineering University of Waterloo Waterloo Ontario David Morin Environmental Protection Services Environment Canada Gatineau Quebec Champa Neale Water Survey Canada Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Al Pietroniro National Hydrology Research Centre Environment Canada Saskatoon Saskatchewan Maurice Sydor Data Integration Modelling and Analysis Environment Canada Gatineau Quebec Jean Guy Zakrevsky Water Survey Canada Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Thanks are also given to the many users who have provided feedback and suggestions for other applications within the EnSim family 1 Table of Contents ENSIM CORE cpp AAO AA AA ALAN 1 1 1 A QUICK OVERVIEW popa h

ensim hydrologic - Civil and Environmental Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents